MFF mt10035 NX M

UNIGRAPHICS
MECHANICAL FREE FORM

STUDENT MANUAL
September 2002
MT10035 - Unigraphics NX
EDS Inc.
Proprietary & Restricted Rights Notices
Copyright
Proprietary right of Unigraphics Solutions Inc., its subcontractors, or its suppliers are included in this
software, in the data, documentation, or firmware related thereto, and in information disclosed
therein. Neither this software, regardless of the form in which it exists, nor such data, information, or
firmware may be used or disclosed to others for any purpose except as specifically authorized in writing
by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. Recipient by accepting this document or utilizing this software agrees
that neither this document nor the information disclosed herein nor any part thereof shall be
reproduced or transferred to other documents or used or disclosed to others for manufacturing or any
other purpose except as specifically authorized in writing by Unigraphics Solutions Inc.
2002 Electronic Data Systems Corporation. All rights reserved.
Restricted Rights Legend
The commercial computer software and related documentation are provided with restricted rights.
Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to the protections and restrictions as
set forth in the Unigraphics Solutions Inc. commercial license for the software and/or documentation
as prescribed in DOD FAR 227-7202-3(a), or for Civilian Agencies, in FAR 27.404(b)(2)(i), and any
successor or similar regulation, as applicable. Unigraphics Solutions Inc., 10824 Hope Street, Cypress,
CA 90630.
Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties and limitations thereof given by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. are set forth in the license
agreement under which the software and/or documentation were provided. Nothing contained within
or implied by the language of this document shall be considered to be a modification of such warranties.
The information and the software that are the subject of this document are subject to change without
notice and should not be considered commitments by Unigraphics Solutions Inc.. Unigraphics
Solutions Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may be contained within this document.
The software discussed within this document is furnished under separate license agreement and is
subject to use only in accordance with the licensing terms and conditions contained therein.
Trademarks
EDS, the EDS logo, UNIGRAPHICS SOLUTIONS, UNIGRAPHICS, GRIP, PARASOLID,

UG, UG/..., UG SOLUTIONS, iMAN are trademarks or registered trademarks of Electronic
Data Systems Corporation or its subsidiaries. All other logos or trademarks used herein are the
property of their respective owners.
Mechanical Free Form Student Manual Publication History:
Version 15.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . February 1999

Version 16.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . January 2000
Version 17.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . December 2000
Version 18.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 2001
Unigraphics NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 2002
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Course Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -1
Course Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -1
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -1
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -1
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -2
Student Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -2
Class Standards for Unigraphics Part Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -3
Class Part File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -3
Layers and Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -4
Seed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -5
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -6
Workbook Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -7
Classroom System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -7
Introduction to Mechanical Free Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Free Form Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Suggestions for the Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Developed Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Developed Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Degree and Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Segmentation, Knot Points, and Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Creating Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Through Points and By Poles Construction Methods . . . . . 2-10
Specifying Points From a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Assigning Slopes for Through Points Method . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Activity 2-1: Using Through Points and By Poles . . . . . . . . 2-12
Fit Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Fit Spline Construction Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Activity 2-2: Creating Fit Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Interactive Spline Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Spline by Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Snap Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Spline by Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Symmetric Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
EDS
Mechanical Free Form
Student Manual
i
All Rights Reserved
Table of Contents
Procedure for Symmetric Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Activity 2-3: Spline by Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Offset Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Offset Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Trim Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Rough Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
3D Axial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Activity 2-4: Offset Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Activity 2-5: Rough Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Activity 2-6: 3D Axial Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Bridge Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Curve Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Effect of Continuity on Degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Activity 2-7: Bridge Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Symmetric Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Activity 2-8: Symmetric Bridge Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Geometry Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Direction Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Activity 2-9: Project Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Combined Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Geometry Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Projection Vector Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Activity 2-10: Combined Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Intersection Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Activity 2-11: Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Offset in Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Activity 2-12: Offset in Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Editing Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Editing Poles of Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Activity 2-13: Move Poles, Changing Degree of Splines . . 2-81
Edit Spline by Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Activity 2-14: Edit a Spline Using the Fit Option . . . . . . . 2-87

ii Student Manual
EDS Unigraphics NX
All Rights Reserved
Table of Contents
Change Degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89

Change Stiffness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Spline Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Activity 2-15: Spline Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Framing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Dragging Poles with Deviation Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Activity 2-16: Dragging Spline Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
Trim Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
Trimming Associative Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
Activity 2-17: Trim Curve (non-associative) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
Curve Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Evaluating Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Spline Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Spline Analysis Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Analyze Shape Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Analysis - Curve Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Combs Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Peaks and Inflection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Information Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Activity 3-1: Obtaining Information about a Spline . . . . . 3-10
Non Planar Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Activity 3-2: Information about a 3D Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Deviation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Activity 3-3: Deviation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Primary Sheets and Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Free Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Primary Free Form Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Primary Bodies and Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
U and V Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Free Form Construction Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Determining the Face Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Edit Feature Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Distance Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Ruled Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Alignment Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Activity 4-1: Compare Parameter & Arclength Alignment 4-11
EDS
Student Manual
iii
All Rights Reserved
Table of Contents
Activity 4-2: Ruled, Parameter & Arclength Alignment . . 4-12

Activity 4-3: Through Curves, Arclength and Parameter . 4-16
Comparing Ruled and Through Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Through Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Activity 4-4: Creating Through Curves Features . . . . . . . . 4-22
More About Through Curves Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Maintaining Sharp Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Patch Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Closed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Alignment By Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Activity 4-5: Through Curves, By Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Other Alignment Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Through Curve Mesh Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Curve Mesh Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Activity 4-6: Curve Mesh with Tangent Constraints . . . . . 4-44
Swept Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Swept Feature Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Activity 4-7: Swept Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Activity 4-8: Swept Feature Using Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Orientation Control - With Only One Guide String . . . . . 4-67
Scaling Control - With Only One Guide String . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Activity 4-9: Orientation and Scale Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Area Law for Scale of Swept Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Activity 4-10: Swept Feature - Area Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Activity 4-11: Swept Feature-Orientation by Vector . . . . . 4-78
Activity 4-12: Cam Follower Groove (Face Normal) . . . . . 4-80
Activity 4-13: Airfoil Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Section Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Activity 5-1: Section Creation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Activity 5-2: Five-points and fillet-shoulder . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Activity 5-3: Fillet Section Between Two Sheet Bodies . . . . 5-30
Editing the Parameters of a Section Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Activity 5-4: Variable Rho Fillet Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Activity 5-5: Hilite Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Activity 5-6: Tangent Continuous Bridge - 1 Side Surface 5-45

iv Student Manual
EDS Unigraphics NX
All Rights Reserved
Table of Contents
Activity 5-7: Create Bottle Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Soft Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Activity 5-8: Blend Strut to Hull and Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Activity 5-9: Blend Airfoil Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
N-Sided Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Activity 5-10: N-Sided as Sheet Repair Tool . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Activity 5-11: N-Sided Shape Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Face Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Face Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Activity 6-1: Analyzing Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Activity 6-2: Face Analysis - Radius and Slope . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Activity 6-3: Face Analysis - Surface Quality . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Edge to Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Curve to Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Information B-Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Examine Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Activity 6-4: Examine Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Working with Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Tangential Extension Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Angled Extension Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Circular Extension Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Activity 7-1: Creating Tangential Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Activity 7-2: Angled Extension for Fuselage Recess . . . . . . 7-13
Law Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Activity 7-3: Law Extension Associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Enlarge Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Activity 7-4: Enlarge Sheet - Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Activity 7-5: Enlarge Sheet - Natural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Offset Sheet Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Distance Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Associative Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
EDS
Student Manual
v
All Rights Reserved
Table of Contents
Transforming and Deleting Base Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Variable Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Activity 7-6: Fuselage Recess Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Activity 7-7: Variable Offset Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Sew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Activity 7-8: Sew Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Trim Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Activity 7-9: Trim Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Change Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Activity 7-10: Change Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Activity 7-11: Force a Spline to a Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Constructing Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Activity 7-12: Ruled and Extension Draft Sheets . . . . . . . . 7-63
Activity 7-13: Match Partings with Section - Linear . . . . 7-81
Partings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90
Activity 7-14: Parting Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
Sheets and Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Thicken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Activity 8-1: Thicken Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Sheet to Solid Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Activity 8-2: Sheets to Solid Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Divide Curve and Stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Divide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Using the Law Subfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Law Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Controlling the Orientation of Law Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Law Subfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Numeric Laws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
By Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Parametric Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Helix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Number of Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Radius Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Turn Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Defining Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17

vi Student Manual
EDS Unigraphics NX
All Rights Reserved
Table of Contents
Activity B-1: Creating a Law Curve Using a Sketch . . . . . B-21

Activity B-2: Law Curve Relative to Datum Planes . . . . . . B-23
Inputting Points from a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Points from Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Activity C-1: Using Points from a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Splines Perpendicular to Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Splines Created Using Perpendicular to Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Activity D-1: Creating a Spline Perpendicular to Planes . D-4
Optional Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

Editing Points on a Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Move Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Add Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Remove Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Activity E-1: Add Points, Move Points, Change Slopes . . E-5
Moving Multiple Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
Activity E-2: Move Multiple Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
Graph Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
Activity E-3: Spline Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
Extract Geometry (Curve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
Activity E-4: Extract Geometry (Curve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
Join . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21
Activity E-5: Join Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-22
Extract (Isocline Curves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25
Activity E-6: Extract Curve (Isocline Curve) . . . . . . . . . . . E-27
Wrap/Unwrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30
Wrap Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32
Wrap Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32
Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32
Tangent Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32
Cut Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-33
Activity E-7: Wrap Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-34
Activity E-8: Trim Curve (associative) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-36
Activity E-9: Edge to Edge Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41
Activity E-10: Drag Sheet Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43
Activity E-11: Extension Sheet Applications . . . . . . . . . . . E-50
EDS
Student Manual
vii
All Rights Reserved
Table of Contents
Activity E-12: Creating Bodies from Wireframe Geometry E-54

Activity E-13: Trim a Solid Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-55
Activity E-14: Using a Point as a Primary String . . . . . . . E-61
Activity E-15: Compare Primary Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-64
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GL-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN-1

viii Student Manual
EDS Unigraphics NX
All Rights Reserved
Course Overview
Course Overview
Course Description
This course addresses using Unigraphics modeling functions to build Free Form
shapes. Free Form shapes are those which cannot be built using standard Form
Features. This includes creating splines and other developed curves, building
sheets through one or more sets of curves, sweeping profiles along guides, and
applying specially shaped transitions between faces.
Emphasis is given to common techniques that lead to low risk results. Sound
practices yield models that easily support creation and dependable updating of
model geometry such as hollows, offsets, thickened sheets, and trimmed bodies.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for designers, engineers, manufacturing engineers,

application programmers, CAD/CAM managers, and system managers who
have the need to use Unigraphics Free Form Feature Modeling.
Prerequisites
Practical Applications of Unigraphics course
Basic understanding of parametric/explicit modeling, and the Master Model

Concept.
Working knowledge of the following:
WCS manipulation.
Basic sketching or curve construction.
Expressions.
Using the Model Navigator.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
-1
Course Overview
Objectives
After successfully completing this course, you should be able to perform the
following activities in Unigraphics:
Creation and editing of splines and developed curves.

Creation and editing of primary bodies using Free Form curves.
Analysis of curves and faces.
Creation and editing of transitions.
Creation of bodies having one or more Free Form faces.
Student Responsibilities
Be on time.
Participate in class.
Stick with the subject matter.
Listen attentively and take notes.
Practice on the job what you have learned.
Have Fun!
EDS Unigraphics NX
-2 Mechanical Free Form
Student Manual All Rights Reserved
Course Overview
Class Standards for Unigraphics Part Files
The following standards will be used in this class. Standardization allows users
to work with others' parts while being able to predict the organization of the
part file. All work should be performed in accordance with these standards.
Class Part File Naming
This class utilizes the following filenaming standard:
user's initials
part name
(3 characters)
(1 - 120 characters)
***_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx•prt
extension
underscore delimiter (4 characters)
When you are requested to save a part file for later use, or any time you want to
preserve work you have done, use the initials of your given name, middle name, and
surname to replace the course identifier mff" in the new filename. The remainder of
the filename should match the original. These files should reside in your home
directory.
TIP Currently up to 128 characters are valid for file names. A four
character extension (.prt, for example) is automatically added to define
the file type. This means the maximum number of user defined
characters for the file name is actually 124.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
-3
Course Overview
Layers and Categories
The student will notice that there are standard layer assignments as well as
standard category names in each of the part files as follows:
Layers 1-100, Model Geometry (Category: MODEL)
Layers 1-14, Solid Geometry (Category: SOLIDS)
Layers 15-20, Linked Objects (Category: LINKED OBJECTS)
Layers 21-40, Sketch Geometry (Category: SKETCHES)
Layers 41-60, Developed Curve Geometry (Category: 3DCURVES)
Layers 61-80, Reference Geometry (Category: DATUMS)
Layers 81-100, Sheet Bodies (Category: SHEETS)
Layers 101 - 120, Drafting Objects (Category: DRAFT)
Layers 101 - 110, Drawing Borders (Category: FORMATS)
Layers 121 - 130, Mechanism Tools (Category: MECH)
Layers 131 - 150, Finite Element Meshes and Engr. Tools (Category: CAE)
Layers 151 - 180, Manufacturing (Category: MFG)
Layers 181 - 190, Quality Tools (Category: QA)
Layers 201 - 250, Assembly Component Objects (Category: COMPONENTS)
EDS Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
Seed Part
Seed parts are an effective tool for establishing customer defaults or any
settings that are partĆdependent (saved with the part file). This may include
nonĆgeometric data such as:
Sketch preferences
Commonly used expressions
Layer categories
UserĆdefined views and layouts
Part attributes
TIP Once a seed part is established, it should be writeĆprotected to avoid

accidental modification of the seed part.
Two seed part files are available for use in this course. These files incorporate
the standards described above. They have TFRĆTRI as the default view.
mff_mm_seed (Millimeters)
mff_in_seed (Inches)
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
-5
Course Overview
How to Use This Manual
It is important that you use the Student Guide in the sequence presented. Later
lessons assume you have learned concepts and techniques taught in earlier
lessons. If necessary, you can always refer to any previous activity where a
method or technique was originally taught.
TIP Always read the CUE and Status lines while working through
lesson activities.
The format of activities is consistent throughout this manual. Steps are labeled
and specify what will be accomplished at any given point in the activity. Below
each step are action boxes which emphasize the individual actions that must be
taken to accomplish the step. As your knowledge of Unigraphics increases, the
action boxes may seem redundant as the step text becomes all that is needed to
accomplish a given task.
Step 1 This is an example of a step.
This is an example of an action box.
The general format for lesson content is:
presentation
activity
One or more included in
most lessons
project
summary
For students who prefer more detail from an Instructor Led Course:
ask questions
confirm with restatement
attend and pay attention to instruction as it is given.
Obviously, it is always necessary for students to consider the classroom situation

and be considerate of other students who may have greater or lesser needs for
instruction. Instructors cannot possibly meet the exact needs of every student.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
At the start of each class day you will be expected to log onto your terminal and
start Unigraphics, and to be ready to follow the instructor's curriculum. At the
end of the day's class you should always quit Unigraphics and log off the
terminal.
Workbook Overview
The workbook is your opportunity to test your new skills in the context of
simulated work flow.
The workbook example is an automotive application. The automotive industry

requires a broad range of talents. This diversity makes it possible to test the
majority of functions you will learn via a single project. We anticipate that you
will evaluate each function you use in context of your own job, whatever it may
be.
It is the intent of this activity to allow you to apply the skills taught in this
course. Time constraints of the course are also a factor. At any point when you
are not making progress, please enlist the help of your instructor.
Classroom System Information
Your instructor will provide you with the following items for working in the
classroom:
Student Login: Username:
Password:
Work Directory:
Parts Directory:
Instructor:
Date:
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
-7
Course Overview
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
EDS Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Mechanical Free Form
Introduction to Mechanical Free Form ÏÏÏ

Lesson 1
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
1
ÏÏÏ
PURPOSE This lesson provides an overview of a typical Free

Form process.
OBJECTIVES This lesson will introduce the concepts of universal

and sound methods to construct models containing
free form elements.
This lesson contains no activities.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
1-1
ÏÏÏ Free Form Modeling

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
1
ÏÏÏ Definition
Free Form shapes are those which cannot be built using
primitive bodies; standard Form Features; or sketches
containing only lines, arc, and conics.
A Free Form" design process may include:
creating splines.
building primary" sheets or bodies:
through curves.
through a mesh of curves.
profiles swept along guide strings."
applying specifically chosen transitions."
editing Free Form data from any source.
constructing solid bodies partly or entirely from Free Form sheets.
Informed geometry construction leads to well behaved" Free Form models.
Well behaved models will easily update when edits are within
reason."
Well behaved models may be used efficiently in downstream
applications such as manufacturing.
EDS Unigraphics NX
1-2 Mechanical Free Form
Suggestions for the Designer ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ

Keep the model as simple as possible.
Always be consistent when selecting geometry.
ÏÏÏ
1
ÏÏÏ
We recommend keeping splines to degree three whenever possible.
A practical reason to use degree five curves is when curvature
continuity is required.
We suggest that you avoid degrees higher than five unless you have
and understand a reason to use a higher degree.
Unless you have compelling reasons to use more than two segments,
we recommend using separate curves whenever two segments are
insufficient to capture the shape you want.
Make sure the model meets the specifications that you were given.
Some items to check:
The model must be full scale, because manufacturing cuts the
actual part.
Check for sharp transitions or kinks where two sheets meet.
Use different layers for overlapping geometry.
Use layer categories to organize the data in your part file.
Name objects and features. This makes it much easier to identify and
select objects in a complex model.
Attach data concerning design intent or other important information
to individual features via the Model Navigator, Properties, Attributes.
Use the largest practical radius. Small radii may increase the
complexity of the manufacturing process.
When practical, create small blends, holes, or chamfers last. This
enables downstream users such as Finite Element Analysts to link at
timestamp" to avoid having to deal with these features.
To diagnose thicken, hollow, or blending problems, look to the
underlying curves!
Details regarding the above suggestions are given throughout the class.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
1-3
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
1
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Developed Curves
Lesson 2
PURPOSE Developed curves, including splines, offset curves,

bridge curves, and various projected curves,
supplement analytic curves, lines, arcs, and conic ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
curves, to meet a multitude of surfacing needs.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Create Splines using an appropriate method.

Create Offset and Bridge Curves.
Project Curves.
Combine Curve Projections.
Create Intersection Curves.
Create Offset in Face Curves.
Edit Splines.
Trim Curves.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-1
Developed Curves
This lesson contains the following activities:

Activity Page
2-1 Using Through Points and By Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-2 Creating Fit Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2-3 Spline by Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2-4 Offset Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2-5 Rough Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2-6 3D Axial Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
2-7
2-8
Bridge Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symmetric Bridge Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-45
2-49
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2-9
2-10
Project Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combined Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-57
2-62
2-11 Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
2-12 Offset in Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
2-13 Move Poles, Changing Degree of Splines . . . . . . . 2-81
2-14 Edit a Spline Using the Fit Option . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
2-15 Spline Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
2-16 Dragging Spline Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
2-17 Trim Curve (non-associative) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Developed Curves
A framework of curves is the basis of most primary Free Form features, such as
Through Curves, Ruled, Through Curve Mesh, and Swept.
When simple analytic curves (lines, arcs, conics) do not describe required
shapes, it is necessary to develop a suitable curve, either by computation, or
based on other geometry.
The following bullets list developed curve types discussed in this lesson.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2

Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-4
Offset curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-35
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Bridge curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-43
Project curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-52
Combined Projection . . . . . . . . Page 2-59
Intersection curves . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-64
Offset in Face curves . . . . . . . . . Page 2-72
This lists other types of developed curves, and Appendix pages where
information and practice activities are located:
Law curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page B-2

Helix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page B-15
Extract curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page E-17
Join curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page E-20
Isocline Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page E-25
Wrap/Unwrap curves . . . . . . . . Page E-30
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-3
Developed Curves
Splines
A spline is a standard curve in most CAD systems. Unlike lines and conic
curves, the spline can be adjusted to virtually any shape in two or three
dimensions.
Common spline creation methods
The fan-like structure is the
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
curvature comb of the spline.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Through Points
+ symbols
represent points
used to define the
spline.
Circles represent poles of the spline.
By Poles
Straight lines between poles are the

control polygon of the spline.
Fit
The three splines above were created using the same 5 points. You can easily
see that different construction methods yield dramatically different results.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
The term spline originated from a long flexible strip of wood, metal, or plastic
used to lay out various curved surfaces. Weights were attached to hold the
spline in place. To modify the curve, the weights would be moved.
Spline mathematics simulates, and sometimes improves upon, the behavior of

physical splines. Unigraphics splines are known as Non-Uniform Rational
B-splines or NURBS."
Their flexible nature and variety of data interpretation methods make splines
the foundation of Free Form modeling.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-5
Developed Curves
Degree and Segments
Splines have a degree and a segment count. The number of poles is related to
both the degree and segment count.
A spline will have at least one more pole than its degree.
Degree 1, 2 poles
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Degree 2, 3 poles
Degree 3, 4 poles
Degree 5, 6 poles
Degree 3, 5 poles, 2 Segments
Poles in the gray oval belong to two segments.

We sometimes say the segments overlap
If you know the degree of a spline, you can calculate the number of segments by
this simple formula:
poles - degree = segments
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Segmentation, Knot Points, and Poles
The minimum number of points required for all splines is one more than the
degree of the spline. There are two types of points associated with splines:
Defining Points - These are the points used to create the spline.
Knotpoints - These are the endpoints of the spline segments.
In multiple segment splines poles overlap from segment to segment. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
2
These identical splines were created using the same 5 points, by different methods.
Knotpoints: Ê Poles: 1. Defining Points +
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Degree 3, 5 poles, 2 segments
3.
2.
1.
Ë 4.
Ê
Ì 5.
Segment 1 Segment 2
Described by poles 1. to 4. Described by poles 2. to 5.
Degree 3, 7 poles, 4 segments
3. 4.
2. 5.
Ë Ì
1. Ê Í 6.
Î
7.
Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4

Poles 1. to 4. Poles 2. to 5. Poles 3. to 6. Poles 4. to 7.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-7
Developed Curves
Creating Splines
Methods:
Choose Insert → Curve → Spline...

Then choose:
By Poles
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Through Points
ÏÏÏ
Fit
ÏÏÏ Perpendicular to Planes

Specify the required parameters and points/poles
Choose Insert → Curve → Spline by Points...
Choose Insert → Curve → Spline by Poles...
Curve " Spline Data
The following data is stored for a spline created by Insert → Curve Spline:
The degree of the curve

An array of poles (vertices) for the curve
Parameter values which define the segments of the curve
Defining Points (if so created)
Fit (Least Squares) weight (if so created)
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Associative Spline Data
Spline by Points and Spline by Poles created with the associative option are
features. Thus, associative splines appear in the Model Navigator. They must be
edited via Feature methods, such as Edit → Feature → Parameters, or by
double click in the Model Navigator. Associative Splines will update upon
changes to geometry selected as:
points
poles
ÏÏÏ

tangency constraints
ÏÏÏ
2
curvature constraints ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Good Splines"
We recommend these guidelines to create Free Form curves:
Use single segment splines whenever possible.

If you need more than two segments to capture a shape, consider
framing the part with multiple curves. (Discussed on page 2-95)
Use degree three splines when possible.
Degree five is necessary to maintain curvature continuity with curves
at both ends of a spline.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-9
Developed Curves
Through Points and By Poles Construction Methods
If you use the Through Points option, the spline passes through the points that
are referred to as defining points.
When you use the By Poles option the input points are used as pole locations.
Through Points
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Control Polygon
By Poles
Fit Pole
Specifying Points From a File
For splines created using the Through Points, By Poles, or Fit method, you can
also choose the Points From File option and specify the points using a point
data file. For more information on point data file format, see Appendix C.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Assigning Slopes for Through Points Method
If you use Through Points, multiple segment method, you can control the slope
at any or all points. Use one of the following options to control slope:
Automatic Slope: the system calculates the slope internally for the
point by making inferences from the data points specified.
Vector Component allows you to define the slope by entering the
components of a vector in the work coordinate system. When you use
ÏÏÏ
the Vector Component option, the greater the component values, the
ÏÏÏ
greater the effect on the spline.
2
Direction to Point allows you to define the slope by specifying a point.
The slope between the defining point and the point that you specify
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
defines the slope of the curve at that defining point. Use the Point
Constructor to specify the direction point.
Vector to Point allows you to define the slope at a point by specifying
another point, using the Point Constructor. The vector between the
two points defines the slope of the curve at that defining point. Also,
the distance between the two points (i.e., the magnitude of the vector)
determines how strongly the slope affects the shape of the curve.
Slope of Curve allows you to use the slope at the endpoint of an
existing curve.
Angle allows you to define the slope using a specified angle with
respect to the WCS. The angle is measured from the XC axis in the
XCĆYC plane; counterclockwise about the ZC axis.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-11
Developed Curves
Activity 2-1: Using Through Points and By Poles
In this activity you will create splines. Feel free to zoom, pan, refresh, blank,
change object display color, or use layers as you perform the activity. The
purpose is to show the different results achieved using the various spline
creation techniques as well as to demonstrate the effects of curve degree.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Step 1 Open the part mff_spline_1 and start the Modeling
application.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Save As the part into your home folder, using your initials
instead of mff.
Row 1 + + +++ + +
+
++
+++ + +
Row 2 + + + + + +
+
++ +
+ + +
+ + +
+
+ +
+
+
+++ +
Row 3 + + + + +
+
++
+++ + +
Row 4 + + + + + +
+
++ +
+ + +
+ + +
+
+ +
+
+++ +
Row 5 + + + + +
+ +
++
+++ + +
Row 6 + + + + + +
+
++ +
+ + +
+ + +
+
+ +
+
+
+
+
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Step 2 Create a single segment spline using Through Points.
Choose Insert → Curve → Spline.
The spline creation methods display in a dialog and the cue

prompts you to specify the creation method you want to use.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Through Points as the creation method.
A dialog displays options for Through Points.
Select Single Segment.
Notice that the curve degree and closed curve options are no
longer selectable. The curve degree will be derived from the
number of points used to create the spline.
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-13
Developed Curves
A dialog of point selection techniques displays.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Chain From All as the point specification method.
The system prompts for starting and ending points in the chain
of points.
Select the starting and ending points of the first row of

points to create the first spline.
Chain Start
+ + +++
Row 1 + +
+
++
+++ + +
Row 2 + + + + + +
+
++ +
+ + + Chain End
+ + +
+
+ +
+
+
+
+
Step 3 Evaluate the spline.
Fit the view.
Choose Information → Object.
Select the spline.
Choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Evaluate the spline data in the dialog and in the graphics area.
How many segments does the spline have? What degree?
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Row 1
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
+ + +++ +++
++ +
+ + +++ +++ +
Row 2 ++ + ++ + +
++
+ + + ++
++
++
Choose Analysis → Distance.
Select the spline and an existing point to find the distance

between them.
A tolerance is used to define the spline. It may not pass

exactly" through defining points .
This is an example of how NOT to create a good curve.
Step 4 Create a multiple segment spline using Through Points.
Choose Spline, Through Points, Multiple Segments.
Notice the default value in the Curve Degree text box (18).
Set the Curve Degree to 3.
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-15
Developed Curves
Choose Chain From All and select the starting and ending
points of the second row of points.
Choose OK.
This curve should look much smoother.
+ + ++
Row 1 + + +
+
+ +
ÏÏÏ
+ +
+ + +
ÏÏÏ + + + + +
Row 2 +
2 +
ÏÏÏ + + +
+
ÏÏÏ
+ + +
+ +
+
+ +
+
+
+
+
Step 5 Evaluate the spline.
Choose Information → Object, select the spline, choose OK,

and examine the spline data.
Notice that the number of poles minus the degree of the curve
equals the number of segments created.
Choose Analysis → Distance and evaluate the distance

between some of the points and the spline.
Choose Information → Spline and set the Output to

Information Window option to Complete.
Choose OK.
Select the spline and choose OK.
Evaluate the spline data.
Cancel all dialogs.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Step 6 Create single and multiple segment splines using By

Poles.
Choose By Poles and Single Segment.
Choose OK.
Choose the Existing Point icon and, working from left to
ÏÏÏ
right, select all the points in the third row.
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK and choose Yes to create the spline.
Row 3 + + + + + + +
ÏÏÏ
+
+ +
+ +
+ + + + + +
Row 4 + + +
+
+ + +
+ + +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+
+
+
+
Choose Back on the Point Constructor dialog.
Create a Multiple Segment degree 3 spline using By Poles

through the fourth row of points.
Use Information → Object and Analysis → Distance to get

information about the spline.
Save your work.
Later, you may want to use to this part to practice your curve
analysis skills.
This concludes activity 2-1.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-17
Developed Curves
Fit Splines
Point data may be inexact, due to the data gathering method or the nature of a
physical model that is measured.
Fit splines are a least squares approximation" of defining data.

Neither the fit spline nor its control polygon are constrained to pass
through input points.
ÏÏÏ
Control
Polygon
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Input points
The curvature comb of the fit spline is

relatively smooth.
The Fit method is a starting point. Once you have created a fit spline, use
analysis methods to glean valuable insight into the design intent. From there,
formulate a final construction strategy!
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Fit Spline Construction Method
Fit creates a spline by fitting the input points using either a tolerance, or a
specified degree with a segment count, or a template curve.
Fit is the only option that provides direct control over degree and segmentation.
Characteristics of Fit Splines:
Useful for quickly producing smooth curves.

Slope control is allowed for first and last points.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ

Tangent or Curvature conditions may be added after construction.

ÏÏÏ
To create Fit splines, first select the data points. After you have selected all the
points, specify the parameters.
Fit Methods
By Tolerance lets you specify the maximum allowable distance that the
spline may deviate from a data point.
By Segments lets you specify the degree of the spline and the number
of segments in the spline.
By Template lets you use an already existing spline to control the
structure of the fit spline. The system creates the fit spline with the
same degree and shape characteristics.
The system calculates the average and maximum error. A white diamond is
displayed at the point of maximum deviation.
Change Weights
Change Weights lets you change the weight factor of any of the data points. A
weight value of zero causes the point to be ignored. The larger the weight value,
the closer the curve will come to that point.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-19
Developed Curves
Activity 2-2: Creating Fit Splines
Step 1 Continue using the part you saved in the previous activity.
If you did not save the part, use mff_spline_1. Steps in this
activity do not depend on previous steps.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Step 2 Create splines using the Fit method. Use both the
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
tolerance and segments methods and compare the two
processes.
Choose Insert → Curve → Spline, Fit, Chain From All.
Select the starting and ending points of the fifth row of

points.
A dialog displays options for Fit splines.
The default Tolerance in this dialog is the value set under

Preferences → Modeling in the Distance Tolerance field.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Choose By Segments as the control method for the fit spline.

Notice that you can change the curve degree and number of
segments. Tolerance is not selectable.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Choose By Tolerance and enter .1 as the tolerance value.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
The system creates a spline using the specified tolerance.
Notice that the error report shows a maximum error of .0000,
and an average error of .0000.
Choose Back on the error dialog and Refresh the view.

(OK or Cancel will create the spline)
The spline will not be created and you will be returned to the
Create Spline By Fit so you can enter different parameters.
Reset the Tolerance value to .5.
Choose OK.
The error report shows an average error of .1789... and a
maximum error of .4855...
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-21
Developed Curves
Choose OK to create the spline.
Choose Cancel.
Use Information → Object and Analysis → Distance to get

information on the spline.
Use the sixth row of points to create a Fit spline using the By
Segments control method with 1 segment and a degree of 3.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Row 1 + + ++ + ++ +
++
Row 2 + + +++ +++ ++++
+++ ++
+++ ++
++ +
++
Row 3 + +++++++ +
+
Row 4 + + ++++++ +++++
+++ + +
+++ ++
++ +
++
Row 5
+
+ ++++ ++ +
+
Row 6 + + +++++ + +++++
++
+++ + ++
++ ++
++
++
Check the distance and object data as before.
Choose Cancel.
Step 3 Save and Close the part.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Interactive Spline Functions
Spline by Points
Assign Slope/Curvature
Edit Points
ÏÏÏ
Create
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
Delete Points
ÏÏÏ
The process is similar to the Spline → Through Points and Spline → By Poles
dialogs, except that:
The spline will rubber band" in the graphics window as you create it
The Snap Point toolbar appears when the dialog is active
Visual handles" control slope, curvature, and tangent magnitude
Associative splines update with selected points, slope/curvature objects
The default Curve Degree is 5
Editing and Creating Associative splines are done via the same dialog
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-23
Developed Curves
Editing
Associative splines are features. Edit them from the Model Navigator or via Edit
→ Feature → Parameters...
Splines created using Spline by Points when Associative is OFF are ordinary
spline curves. Edit them via Edit → Curve → Parameters...
In Assign Slope/Curvature or Edit Point, handlebars will appear:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Â Â
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Ã
À
Á
Ã
À
Á
Wireframe Display Shaded Display
À Move Point
Á Change Slope
Â Change Curvature
Ã Change Tangent Magnitude
Snap Point
The Spline by Points and Spline by Poles dialogs both offer visual feedback for
point selection. When either dialog is active, the Snap Point toolbar may
appear:
Arc Center
Control Point Existing Point
Point on Surface
End Point
Mid Point Quadrant Point

Intersection Point Point on Curve
Any number of Snap Point icons may be chosen to mask point selection to only
the selected types of points. A small icon appears beside at the cursor, showing
the point type that will be selected if you click at the current cursor location.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Spline by Poles
Spline by Poles shares the same creation and editing features as Spline by
Points. You will see the visual feedback of rubber banding" and Snap Point.
Assign Slope/Curvature is available only for the end points.
Assign Slope/Curvature
Edit Poles
Create
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Delete Points
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-25
Developed Curves
Symmetric Constraint
The Symmetric constraint applies to Spline by Poles and Bridge Curve. A

symmetric constraint is useful when creating only half of a model that is to be
mirrored across a center plane.
Procedure for Symmetric Constraint
First, use Spline by Poles to create an associative spline between one

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
or two objects that you intend to connect with smooth continuity.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ

After the spline is created, choose the Assign Slope/Curvature option.
Select the end point of the new spline where you want to apply the
symmetric constraint. The Slope Handlebar then displays at that end
point.
Click the Change Curvature handle on the Slope Handlebar.
Select a datum plane, datum axis, or a curve with which you wish to
match continuity.
If you select a datum plane or datum axis, the spline changes its
slope so that it is symmetric (smoothly continuous) with the plane
normal of the selected plane or axis.
If you select a curve, you get a spline that is curvature continuous
with the curve.
Continuity
Common Math Internal Curve to Curve

In Calculus
Term Continuity Continuity
f(a) = f(b)
Same Position C0 G0
same value of the function
f(a) = f(b)
Same Slope C1 G1
same first derivative
f(a) = f(b)
Same Curvature C2 G2
same second derivative
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
With the Symmetric constraint, the curvature comb will be parallel to the curve
at the point of symmetry. Continuity conditions are easy to describe with a
simple illustration:
G0
The curves are in contact at the end points,
but not tangent.
Three poles form a line. Adjacent combs are not the same length. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
G1 ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The curves are tangent. Notice that the common pole and the adjacent
pole in each curve form a straight line.
Adjacent combs may have

sharp angle between them.
G2
The curves are tangent. Notice that the combs, which have an identical scale
factor, are the same length at the point of contact. This is curvature continuity.
Symmetric
Comb and its mirror flow Mirror need not exist to

together smoothly. apply the constraint.
The curvature has zero rate of change at the plane of symmetry. The curve is
perpendicular to the plane of symmetry. The comb is parallel to the curve at the end
point.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-27
Developed Curves
Activity 2-3: Spline by Points
Step 1 Open the part mff_hook and start the Modeling

application.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
À
Á
Ã
Step 2 Create a spline by points through the four existing points

shown.
Change the degree to 3.
Ensure that Associative is ON.
If necessary, display the Snap Point toolbar. Set the mask for
only Existing Points.
Select the four existing points in the order shown above.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
The points are controlled by sketches. You could simply

choose the end points of sketched curves. The points were
provided to help to make it clear where to indicate.
Choose OK (or MB2) to create the spline.
Step 3 Edit the spline to add tangent control.
In the Selection toolbar, choose Select Features.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select the spline.
Keeping the cursor over the spline, open the MB3 menu, as
illustrated above.
Choose Edit Parameters...
You could also choose Edit → Feature → Parameters.

...or...
You could double click over the appropriate Spline icon in
the Model Navigator.
...or...
You could double click over the Spline in the Graphics
window, if Select Features is active.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-29
Developed Curves
The Spline by Points dialog appears. It is in Edit mode, with

fewer options than when you created the spline:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The Create icon is missing. The Point Options, Closed

Curve, and Curve Type choices are all grayed out. These
options are irrelevant after the spline has been created.
The Curve Degree field is active. Do not change the value!
You may edit a degree down to 1, or upwards to the number
of points minus one. This spline has only four points, thus,
degree 3 is the highest permitted.
Choose the Assign Slope/Curvature icon.
The cue will read Select a point or drag constraint

modifiers."
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Tangent control for

points À and Á.
Tangent control
for point Â.
ÏÏÏ
Á
Ã
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Â Tangent control
for point Ã.
Select point À.
Click once on the slope handlebar.
TIP Change Slope has a closed" or filled" circle. The cue

will read Change Slope."
The tangent magnitude handle is an open" circle. The
cue will read Change Tangent Magnitude."
Over the curvature handle the cue will read Change
Curvature."
Over the point handle the cue will read Move Point."
Curvature
Tangent Point Slope

Magnitude
Move the cursor until the upper end point of the vertical line
identified in the figure above is highlighted. Indicate the
vertical line at its end point, using Quick Pick if necessary.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-31
Developed Curves
Á
Ã
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Â
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Snap the slope handle for point Á to the same line.
Snap the slope handle for point Â to the horizontal line

shown.
Snap the slope handle for point Ã to the arc shown, at the
end shown.
ÀÁ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Enable combs display on the new spline.
Orient the view to Front.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Notice that the spline curvature changes abruptly at two

points indicated. This condition may lead to less than
optimum load bearing ability. You cannot eliminate the
abrupt changes in this spline, but you may minimize them.
Change Slope for the point indicated, and Change Tangent
Magnitude controls for all points until the spline follows the
other curves more smoothly, somewhat like this illustration:
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-33
Developed Curves
Orient the view to Trimetric when you are done.
Step 4 Change a controlling expression in the part.
Choose Tools Expression...
Change AngleAdjust from 10 to 35

Hint: Enter to save change.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
As two sketches update, the spline will update as well.
A smart sheet built through the spline would also update.
Step 5 Close the part without saving.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Offset Curve
Offset Curve by Distance, Draft, or Law Control will offset 2D lines, arcs, conics,
splines, and edges. 3D Axial will offset 3D curves along a specified vector.
Distance
Draft
Law Control
3D Axial
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
None
Extended Tangents
Fillet
Associative Associative
Output Off Output On
Retain Retain
Blank Blank
Delete
Replace
If the resulting curves are splines, their degree is controlled by the Curve Fit Method
setting in Preferences → Modeling. The options are Cubic (degree 3) or
Quintic (degree 5).
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-35
Developed Curves
TIP Information → Feature provides information on associative offset

curves, such as lists of parents and lists of expressions used in the
creation parameters.
Offset Options
There are four choices for Offset by:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2

Distance offsets curves in the plane of the input curves.
Draft offsets curves in a plane parallel to the plane of the input curves at a
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
specified distance.
Law Control offsets curves at a distance defined with the Law Subfunction.
3D Axial offsets 3D curve strings by 3D Offset Value in a direction
specified by choosing an Axis Vector using the standard vector
functions.
Trim Options
You can choose a method for trimming or extending the offset curves to their
intersection points. The choices for Trim Method vary, depending on whether or not
you use Associative Output.
Rough Offset
Use Rough Offset when you want to discard regions of self intersection in the
offset string of curves. The output of rough offset is a single spline that
approximates the input string at the specified offset distance. The following
activity will make this clear.
3D Axial
3D axial offset creates an offset of selected 3D curves by a given distance along

a vector direction that you specify. The function further corrects the curves
similar to rough offset, to maintain the specified distance between curves
regardless of the steepness" of the input curve. When you select 3D curves for
offset, only the 3D axial offset is available.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Activity 2-4: Offset Curves
In this activity you will create associative, offset curves. The intent is to form
part of the walls of a cavity in the airfoil.
Step 1 Open the part mff_offset_curve_1 and start the modeling

application.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Step 2 Offset the curves which represent the airfoil shape. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Insert → Curve Operation → Offset.
Select the two airfoil curves as shown.
Concave side curve
Convex side curve
Choose OK.
Verify that the vector is pointing to the inside.
Verify that Offset by is set to Distance.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-37
Developed Curves
Set the Distance to 0.075.
Ensure that Trim is set to Extended Tangents.
Ensure that Associative Output is toggled on.
Ensure that Input Curves is set to Retain.
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Offset curve feature
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Examine the features in the Model Navigator.

Notice that the offset curves you just created are now listed as a
feature.
Step 4 Close your part.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Activity 2-5: Rough Offset
In this activity you will create associative, rough offset curves.
Step 1 Open the part mff_offset_curve_2 and start the modeling

application.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Offset the curves using Rough Offset.

Select any one curve.

The curves belong to a sketch. By default, selecting one will
select the entire sketch.
Choose OK to indicate selection is complete.
Toggle Rough Offset on.
Change the Distance to 2.0.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-39
Developed Curves
Verify that the direction is inwards. If necessary, choose

Reverse Direction.
Choose Apply.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
Each Apply and OK creates a new offset curve feature. Notice
how self intersections are removed in each successive curve.
Step 3 Verify the associativity of the offsets.

Edit the expressions r0 to 5.0, and w1 to 45.
When you apply the changes, the offset curves update along
with the sketch curves.

EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Activity 2-6: 3D Axial Offset
Step 1 Open the part mff_3d_offset and start the modeling

application.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Offset the curves.
Select the two curves (a helix and a bridge) and OK.
In the Offset Curve dialog, Offset by is automatically set to 3D

Axial, because you selected 3D curves.
Choose Reverse Direction, so the vector indicator points

along ZC-.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-41
Developed Curves
Enter the 3D Offset Value: 10.0.
Choose Apply.
The system calculates and displays a 3D offset curve.

Notice that:
the concave radius becomes smaller in the offset À
the convex radius becomes larger Á
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
the specified distance is maintained everywhere,
especially in the steep" region of the bridge curve Â
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Choose OK.
The system calculates and displays a second offset curve. Ã
À Â
Ã Á
Step 3 Close the part file.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Bridge Curve
A Bridge Curve connects 2 curves or edges with a spline that is either tangent
or curvature continuous with the 2 input curves. Another curve may also be
used as a reference for shape.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-43
Developed Curves
Procedure
To create a BRIDGE CURVE feature:
Choose Insert → Curve Operation → Bridge.

Use the First Curve selection step to select the first curve or edge.
Use the Second Curve selection step to select the second curve or
edge.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Choose desired options.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK or Apply.
Curve Selection
Curves or edges are selected using the First Curve and Second Curve selection step
icons.
Effect of Continuity on Degree
Specified Parameters Resulting Degree

Tangent 3 (Cubic)
Curvature, End Points Slope Control 5 (Quintic)
Curvature, Peak Slope Control, Stiffness Low / Auto 5 (Quintic)
Curvature, Peak Slope Control, Stiffness High 7
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Activity 2-7: Bridge Curves
In this activity you will create associative bridge curves between the parallel
edges of the two faces.
Step 1 Open the part mff_bridge_curve_1.
Step 2 Use Bridge Curve to create a smooth transition curve

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
between the edges of the two sheets. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Insert → Curve Operation → Bridge.
Ensure that Associative Output is toggled on.
Accept the defaults for the rest of the options.
Select Edge 1 and Edge 2.
NOTE Select the edges near the ends shown. Although you can
modify the point along the edge at which the bridge curve
starts, it will save time to pick on the desired end.
Edge 1
Edge 2
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-45
Developed Curves
Since only one entity is allowed for the First Curve selection step,
as soon as you pick the first edge the icon advances to the Second
Curve selection step.
Toggle the Continuity Method between Tangent and

Curvature and notice the difference in the shape of the
curve.
Ensure that the Continuity Method option is set to Tangent.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Choose Apply to create the first bridge curve.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Edge 3
Tangent continuous Edge 4

bridge curve
Select Edge 3 and Edge 4 and create another tangent

continuous bridge curve on the other side.
Choose OK to create the second bridge curve.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Step 3 Edit the parent ellipse for EXTRUDED(0) to change the

Semimajor from 2 to 1.5 and the Semiminor from 1 to
1.25
Hint: Edit → Feature → Parameters → Extruded(0) → Edit
Curve → Select the ellipse.
Step 4 Edit the parent arc for EXTRUDED(1) to change the

Radius from .5 to .375.
Hint: The radius can be edited from a text window at the
bottom of the screen, as the arc is being edited by the ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
procedure in the preceding hint.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 5 Choose OK until the model updates. Observe how the
associative bridge curves change to match their parent
geometry.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-47
Developed Curves
Symmetric Bridge
A Symmetric constraint is useful when creating only half of a model that is to
be mirrored across a center plane.
The symmetric Bridge Curve is automatically constructed when the dialog is

configured exactly as described below:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2 À
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Any
Curve
Edge
Datum
Vector Ã
Á ÀĄSecond Curve
ÁĄCurvature Continuity
ÂĄPeak Point Shape Control
ÃĄFilter specifically Datum or Vector
When you filter for a Vector the

Â changeable window presents vector
methods.
Procedure
Enable the options Curvature and Peak Point

Select the first curve.
Filter to Datum or Vector. For symmetry, Any is not a valid choice. You
must specify Datum or Vector every time you choose a second curve.
Select a datum or vector.
Choose Apply.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Activity 2-8: Symmetric Bridge Curves
In this activity you will create symmetric bridge curves to complete a framework for a
sheet that represents only half of an end product.
Step 1 Open the part mff_symmetric_bridge and start the

modeling application.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Step 2 Orient the view to Right. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
First selection
Step 3 Create four symmetric Bridge Curves, using the four

roughly horizontal splines and a datum plane in layer 63.
Make Layer 63 Selectable.
Adjust the view until just enough of the datum is visible to

select it.
Choose Insert Curve Operation Bridge...
or choose the Bridge Curve icon.
Select the lowest spline on the screen at the right end, as

illustrated above, as the first curve.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-49
Developed Curves
Verify that:
Associative Output is ON.

Continuity Method is Curvature.
Shape Control is Peak Point.
Change the Filter to Datum.
NOTE You must change the Filter to Datum before selecting the
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
second curve for each of the four Bridge Curves.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select the datum plane.
A Bridge Curve is created. The curve is active for editing.
Closely examine the bridge curve at the tip of the spline. Use
Zoom as necessary. If your curve is reversed at the end of the
spline, as shown below, choose the Reverse Direction button.
If the Bridge Curve is

reversed at the tip of the
spline, like this example... Bridge Curve
Spline Reversed direction
... choose Reverse Direction.
Spline
Bridge
Correct Curve
configuration
Choose Apply to complete the first Bridge Curve.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Continue to create Bridge Curves.
For each curve, Filter for Datum as the second curve.

Each time, if the curve is reversed, correct the direction.
Each time, choose Apply when the curve is correct, before
selecting geometry for the next curve.
Step 4 Close the part.
This concludes activity 2-8. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-51
Developed Curves
Project
This option lets you project curves and points onto faces, planes, and datum planes by
any one of several direction methods.
Projected curves are trimmed at holes or edges of the faces.
Projected curves and points can be associated, copied, or moved onto the specified
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
faces/planes.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Faces/Planes
Curves/Points
Curves/Points Faces/Planes
Filters Filters
Curves/Points Faces/Planes
Curves Only Faces Only
Points Only Planes Only
Sketches Only Datum Planes
Along Face Normals

Toward a Point
Toward a Line
Along Vector
Angle to Vector
Equal Arclength
Both X and Y
First X, then Y
First Y, then X
X Only
Y Only
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Procedure
To create projection curves, follow these steps:
Choose Insert → Curve Operation → Project.
Select the curves and points to project.
Choose the Faces/Planes icon.
Select the faces and planes onto which the curves and points are to be
projected. You can also specify temporary planes using the Plane Constructor.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2

Choose Associate, Copy, or Move (Associate is the default).
Choose the direction method, then specify the point, line, datum axis, vector,
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
and/or angle if necessary.
Choose OK or Apply.
Geometry Selection
When the Project Curve dialog is displayed, there are two Selection Steps icons
available; Curves/Points and Faces/Planes.
During curve and point selection, the following filter options are available:
Curves/Points (the default), Curves Only, Points Only, and Sketches Only. You can
select an entire sketch by setting the Filter to Sketches Only, or, when the Filter option
is Curves/Points, by choosing Next Object until the sketch is selected.
During face and plane selection, the following filter options are available: Faces/Planes
(the default), Faces Only, Planes Only, and Datum Planes.
You can use the Plane Subfunction button to define temporary planes. If the
Associative copy method is chosen, these temporary planes are ignored.
Direction Method
There are 6 projection methods: Along Face Normals, Toward a Point, Toward
a Line, Along Vector, At Angle to Vector, and Equal Arclength.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-53
Developed Curves
Along Face Normals projects the objects along the normals of the faces and
planes.
NOTE Only projections onto a plane using either the Along Face
Normals or Along Vector options are exact. All other
projections are approximations that use the modeling
tolerance.
ÏÏÏ
Curves to be
projected
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Normals to Z
Z the face
Y Resulting
projected
Y X curves
X
Toward a Point projects the objects towards a specified point. For a projected
point, you get the intersection point on the line between the selected point and
the projection point.
Curves to be
projected
Z
Z Curves projected Resulting
to this point Y
projected
Y X X curves
Toward a Line projects the objects along vectors perpendicular to a specified

line or datum axis. For a projected point, you get the intersection point on the
line between the selected point perpendicular to the specified line.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Curves to be
projected
Z
Z
Y
Curves projected toward Resulting
Y X X
ÏÏÏ
this line projected curves
Along Vector projects the selected objects along a specified vector, which is
ÏÏÏ
2
defined using the Vector Constructor. When using a vector, selecting the "both"
option performs bi-directional projection. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Curves to be
projected
Z
Z Resulting
projected Y
Specified curves
vector Y X X
Projecting curves along a vector in both directions
At Angle to Vector projects the selected curves at the specified angle to a

specified vector. This option is not available for projection of points.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-55
Developed Curves
Approximate
Projection
curve
direction
centroid
vector
Angle in
(negative value)
Angle out
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Z Z
Y Resulting
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Y X
X
projected
curves
The Equal Arclength direction method allows the projection of curves from an X-Y
coordinate system to the u-v isocurve coordinate system on a face, preserving the
curve arclengths in the X (or uĆisocurve) and/or the Y (or vĆisocurve) directions.
Point on face V
VĆisocurve
U
U-isocurve
Reference
point X
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Activity 2-9: Project Curves
In this activity you will create associative, projected curves to produce an

outline on a fuselage surface. The curves will represent the start of an angled
transition to a recess in the fuselage.
Step 1 Open the part mff_project_curves_1.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Step 2 Use Project to project the PROFILE sketch normal to its
parent datum plane onto the fuselage surface.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Filter for Sketches only, then select the PROFILE sketch for
the curves to be projected.
Choose OK (Selection step marches to the next icon).
Select the Fuselage sheet body as the face to which the

curves will be projected.
Projection Vector
PROFILE Sketch
Datum plane upon
which PROFILE sketch
resides
Fuselage
Verify that the Copy Method is set to Associate.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-57
Developed Curves
Set the Direction Method to Along Vector.
Select the Datum Plane Normal icon on the Vector

Constructor dialog, select the datum plane, use the Cycle
Vector Direction button until the vector arrow is pointing as
shown in the previous illustration (in the -ZC direction),
and then choose OK.
Choose OK to create the projection.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
PROFILE Sketch
Projected curves
Step 3 Edit the PROFILE sketch and update the model to

demonstrate the associativity of the projected curves.
Choose Tools → Expression.
Change the following expressions as shown:
From To
front_width=.625 front_width=1.25
radius=1.5 radius=1
rear_width=1.5 rear_width=1.75
Choose OK to update the model.
Observe that the projected curves update.

EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Combined Projection
This function combines 2 curve strings. Combined Projection is frequently used

as a step in editing 3 dimensional curves.
First Projection Vector

Second Projection Vector
ÏÏÏ
Any
First Curve String
ÏÏÏ
Curve
Edge
2
ÏÏÏ
Face Normal to Plane of Curves
ÏÏÏ
Second Curve String Sketch Specified Vector
String Specify New Vector
+XC Axis
+YC Axis
+ZC Axis
Selected Datum Axis
Retain Retain
Blank Blank
Delete
Replace
Procedure
To create a new curve by combining two existing curves:
Select the first string of curves when the First Curve String icon is active.
Choose the Second Curve String icon, and select the second string of curves.
Specify the First Direction Vector, if required.
You can use the projection vector options in the dialog to help you define the vector.
Specify the Second Direction Vector, if required.
If you do not want the combined projection curve to be associative with the
input curves, toggle Associative Output off.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-59
Developed Curves
Specify what you want to happen to the Input Curves:
Retain or Blank, when the output curve is associative.
OR
Retain, Blank, Delete, or Replace, when the output curve is nonĆassociative.
If you want to preview the results, toggle on Confirm Upon Apply.
Choose OK or Apply.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2 Projection
ÏÏÏ
First curve
vector 1 New curve
ÏÏÏ Plane of 1st

curve
YC YC
XC XC
ZC ZC
Second curve Projection

Plane of second
curve vector 2
BEFORE AFTER
You can use Edit → Curve → Parameters to modify the parametric information of
combined curves.
If the resulting curve is a spline, its degree is controlled by the Curve Fit Method
setting in Preferences → Modeling. The options are Cubic (degree 3) or
Quintic (degree 5).
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Geometry Selection
You can select curves, edges, faces, sketches, and strings.
2 dimensional input strings: The projection vector defaults to the plane
normal to the string plane.
3 Dimensional input strings: The projection vector must be defined for
both strings.
Projection Vector Options

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
The methods you can use to specify the projection direction for each curve are: ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Normal to Plane of Curves
Specified Vector
Specify New Vector (Reset)
+XC Axis
+YC Axis
+ZC Axis
Selected Datum Axis
Normal to Plane of Curves lets you specify the desired projection direction normal
to the plane of the curve. The input curves must be coplanar.
If you have already defined a vector and wish to reuse it after choosing one of the other
options, choose Specified Vector.
Specify New Vector brings up the Vector Constructor to allow you to define the vector.
The +XC Axis, +YC Axis, and +ZC Axis options use a projection vector in the given
direction.
Selected Datum Axis lets you select a datum axis to define the projection direction.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-61
Developed Curves
Activity 2-10: Combined Projection
In this activity you will create an associative, combined projection curve from
two sets of 2D curves.
Step 1 Open the part mff_combined-projection_1.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Use Combined Projection to create a 3D curve that is
associated to the two sketches.
Choose Insert → Curve Operation → Combined Projection.
Select the TOP_VIEW sketch as the First Curve String.

Hint: Watch the status line as you select, or use the Filter to
assure that you select the sketch and not a member curve.
Choose the Second Curve String icon.
Select the SIDE_VIEW sketch as the Second Curve String.
TOP_VIEW sketch
SIDE_VIEW sketch
Verify that Associative Output is toggled on.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Verify that the Input Curves option is set to Retain.
Choose OK until the combined projection is created.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3D Combined Curve
Step 3 Edit the TOP_VIEW sketch and change the Length to 9.

If necessary, open the Model Navigator.
Open the MB3 menu over TOP VIEW:SKETCH(3).
Choose Edit Parameters...
From the Edit Sketch Dimensions dialog, choose

Length=7.5.
Edit the value and change it from 7.5 to 9.
Choose Task → Finish Sketch, or the checkered flag Finish

Sketch icon.
Observe that the combined projection curves update.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-63
Developed Curves
Intersection Curve
Intersection Curve creates curves defined by the intersection of two sets of

faces, two sheet bodies, two solids, two datum planes, or any combination of the
above.
ÏÏÏ
Second Set
ÏÏÏ
First Set
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Any
Faces
Datum Planes
Sheet Body
Solid Body
NOTE Intersecting two datum planes produces a

non-associative line that extends to the view boundaries.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Procedure
Choose Insert → Curve Operation → Intersect.
Choose First Set.
Select the first object or objects.
Choose Second Set.
Select the second object or objects.
Entity Selection
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
You may select one or more faces for each set, but the faces must all be part of
one sheet or solid body. If you are selecting datum planes, you may select only
one datum plane for each set. If you are selecting a sheet or solid body, you may
select only one for each set.
Reuse first set
If this option is toggled on and you choose Apply to create the Intersection
Curves, the entities that were selected for the First Set are retained and you
can then select new entities for the Second Set and generate another set of
intersection curves.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-65
Developed Curves
Activity 2-11: Intersect
In this activity you will create associative intersection curves. The intent is to
use the curves later in the creation of Soft Blend transitions.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Hull
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Intersection curve 1
Strut
Projected curve
Pickup
Step 1 Open the part mff_intersect_curve_1.
Step 2 Use Intersect to create an intersection curve between the

bottom mounting face of the hull and the offset face of the
strut.
NOTE Use the Associative output option so that if either surface

is modified, the intersection will automatically update.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Select the Mounting surface (the bottom side of the hull) as

shown for the First Set and the Strut offset as shown for the
Second Set.
Mounting surface
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Strut offset
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ensure that Associative output is toggled on.
Choose Apply.
Step 3 Create another intersection curve between the strut face

and an offset of the mounting surface.
Once again, use the Associative output option so that if

either surface is modified, the intersection will automatically
update.
Make layer 52 the work layer, make layer 82 selectable and

layer 81 Invisible.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-67
Developed Curves
Select the Strut as shown for the First Set and the Mounting
surface offset as shown for the Second Set.
Mounting surface offset
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Strut
Choose Apply.
Step 4 Intersect the strut face and an offset of the pickup body.
Once again, use the Associative output option.
Make layer 53 the work layer, layer 83 selectable, and layer

82 invisible. (Leave the rest of the layer settings as is)
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Select the Strut as shown for the First Set and the Pickup
body offset as shown for the Second Set.
Strut ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Pickup body offset ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
Step 5 Use Project to create a projected curve on the pickup

body using an arc.
The arc will be projected normal to its plane. The projection
vector will update to remain normal to the arc plane.
The Associate Copy Method will be used. If either the arc or the
surface is modified, the projection will automatically update.
Make layer 54 the work layer, layer 44 selectable, and layer

83 invisible. (Leave the rest of the layer settings as is)
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-69
Developed Curves
Select the Arc as shown for the curve that is to be projected

and the Pickup body surface as shown for the face to which
the curve will be projected.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Arc
Pickup body surface
Select Along Vector as the Direction Method and then use

the Edge/Curve Vector option to select the Arc to define the
projection direction.
Ensure that the Copy Method is set to Associate.
Ensure that Directions is set to Single.
Choose OK.
Make layer 44 Invisible.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
NOTE You should now have three intersection curves and one
projected curve as shown.
Hull
Intersection curve 2 ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
2
Strut
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Projected curve
Pickup
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-71
Developed Curves
Offset in Face
This option will create a degree 3 spline that lies on a face and is offset at a
specified distance from another curve on the face. The distance is measured
along face sections which are normal to the base curve.
NOTE The resultant spline is C1 (tangent continuous). Also, it is not

associative.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Procedure
Choose Insert → Curve Operation → Offset in Face.
Select the face on which the curve is to be offset.
Select the curve which you wish to offset.
Enter the offset value.
Choose OK.
Distance
When the curve to be offset is selected, a vector will be displayed. A positive

Distance value will offset the curve in the direction of the arrow. A negative
Distance value will offset the curve in the direction opposite the arrow.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Activity 2-12: Offset in Face
In this activity you will create curves that are offset a specified distance along a
face from the edges. These curves will later be trimmed and then used to
generate extensions on the face.
ÏÏÏ
Step 1 Open the part mff_offset-in-face_1 .
ÏÏÏ
2
Step 2 Use Offset in Face to create curves which are offset one
inch from the edges along the top face.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Insert → Curve Operation → Offset in Face.
Select the Top face.
Select one of the four edges shown.
Top face Offset these edges one

inch to the inside
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-73
Developed Curves
TIP The side of the curve where you select will determine the
default offset direction..
If the vector is pointing to the inside, enter a Distance value

of 1. If the vector is pointing to the outside, enter a Distance
value of -1.
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Choose Back.
Select the next edge.

ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ Use a Distance of 1. Be sure to use the appropriate sign.
Choose OK.
Choose Back.
Repeat the process until all four edges are offset.
Choose Cancel.
Choose Refresh.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Editing Splines
Unigraphics offers many methods to edit or modify a spline.
Once a spline has been selected to edit parameters, the Edit Spline dialog
appears. You may consecutively perform several edits on the same spline.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Undo
While editing a spline, the Undo button in the dialog becomes enabled. This
Undo is incremental.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-75
Developed Curves
Change Slope
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Procedure
Select a spline point
Choose a Slope Method
Specify geometry or parameters for the chosen method.
NOTE If the curve has least squares defining data, only the end
slopes are definable.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Change Curvature
The Change Curvature option changes the radius of curvature value at any
specified point on a spline.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
TIP Curvature can be assigned to Fit splines only by using Edit Pole.
Choose Match End Curvature in the Edit Method option list.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-77
Developed Curves
Editing Poles of Splines

Choose Edit → Curve → Parameters
Select the spline
Choose Edit Pole
Move Pole
Add Pole
Match End Slope
Match End Curvature
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Destination Point
Delta Offset
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
On Curve Plane
End Slopes
End Curvatures
Along Direction
On a Plane
On View Plane
0.1
0.01
0.001
0.0001
Micro Positioning provides

fine control for dragging
points. The number in the list
shown above is the ratio of
cursor movement to pole
movement.
2D Curvature Comb allows

you to view the curvature
comb, poles, inflections and
peaks dynamically, and
temporarily, while edits are
being done.
Deviation Check opens the Deviation Check dialog. This dialog can provide
graphical and numerical feedback about the deviation between the spline and a
defined reference.
Points From File: If there are not enough poles in the file to maintain the curve's
degree, the degree is reduced. Tangents or curvatures assigned to the original
curve are not maintained.
NOTE Edit Pole permits curvature control to be added to fit splines.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Common Options
Once you choose an Edit Pole Method, select the pole you want to edit by
clicking anywhere near it. The closest pole is selected. For Match End Slope
and Match End Curvature, the closest endpoint pole is selected. Move Pole also
lets you select multiple poles.
Some of the options on the Edit Pole dialog are grayed out unless Move Pole is
chosen. These options are: the Move Pole By options, Constrain, Define Drag
Direction, Define Drag Plane, and Micro Positioning.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
Holding the <Shift> key while using MB1 to drag a pole or multiple poles
constrains the end cursor position in the horizontal or vertical direction (with
respect to the position of the cursor when MB1 was first pressed). The cursor
will snap to whichever is closest. This cursor constraint works if no directional
ÏÏÏ
constraint is currently active (i.e., End Slope, End Curvature or Along
Direction).
Holding the <Ctrl> key while using MB1 to drag a pole turns on Micro
Positioning.
Moving Poles
There are three ways to move a single pole:
Move Pole (Default): Place the cursor over the pole and drag it to its
new location before releasing MB1.
Destination Point: Move a pole by selecting the pole and using the
Point Constructor to specify the new location.
Delta Offset: Move a pole by selecting the pole and entering delta
offset values.
Multiple poles may be selected by dragging a rectangle around them. Once the
poles are selected, they can be moved using Destination or Delta as the offset
method.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-79
Developed Curves
Constrain Options
The Constrain options let you control the shape of the spline by restricting the
movement of the pole or the shape of the spline. These options only apply when
dragging a pole:
On Curve Plane - No constraints are put on the pole's movement or

the spline's shape.
End Slopes - Lets you change the shape of a curve near its endpoint
without changing the end slopes of the curve. Editing poles with the
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
end slope option enabled will constrain the last 2 poles of the spline.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
End Curvatures - Lets you change the shape of a curve near its
endpoint without changing the curvature. Editing poles with the end
curvature option enabled will constrain the last 3 poles of the spline.
Along Direction - Lets you drag the selected pole(s) along a vector
that you specify with the Define Drag Direction option.
On a Plane - Lets you drag the selected pole(s) on a plane that you
specify.
On View Plane - Lets you move the selected pole(s) on the plane of
the view.
Control polygon Pole to be moved
New point indicated

BEFORE New pole position AFTER
Adding Poles
The Add Pole toggle allows you to add a pole without changing the shape of the
spline. Adding poles causes the deletion of defining data.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Activity 2-13: Move Poles, Changing Degree of Splines
In this activity you will move poles in order to make the splines tangent to the
edges of the solid. The view at the bottom of the screen is a solid block that was
trimmed using the Free Form feature on the top part of the screen. Notice that
the edges of the face on the solid model are not tangent. You will edit the two
splines at the top and bottom of the Free Form feature so that the edges will be
tangent.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
Step 1 Open the part mff_editspl_2.
If you wish, display the curvature comb of the blue splines.
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Verify that the two side faces on the block are not tangent
to the trimmed face on the corner.
Choose Analysis → Deviation/Edge to Edge.
Select face À as shown near the edge that is adjacent to the

trimmed corner face as shown.
Select the trimmed corner face Á near the edge that is

adjacent to face 1.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ Trimmed corner
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
À ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ Á Â
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Face À
Select near this
edge
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Face Á
Select near
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
this edge
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-81
Developed Curves
Set the number of Check Points to 50.
Set the Distance Tolerance to .001.
Set the Angle Tolerance to .5.
Choose OK.
Set Number of deviations to Minimum angle.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The Information window reports the minimum angular
deviation and the location. Vectors are shown in the graphics
area to visually indicate the deviation.
Choose Back until the cue line reads Select face 1 and close
edge."
Repeat the process to check the angle between face Â and

the trimmed corner face Á. The deviations appear as shown
in the following illustration.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ Minimum angle
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
between the faces
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
À
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Â
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÁÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Minimum angle
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
between the faces
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Adjacent faces not
tangent at these edges
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Step 3 Edit the Through Curves feature and edit the poles of the
splines so that the splines are tangent to the adjacent
edges of the block.
Choose Preferences → Modeling and set Dynamic Update to

Continuous and Immediate Children to All.
Choose Edit → Feature → Parameters.
Select Through Curves(3). Notice that two splines appear at

the top and bottom of the trimmed corner face. These are
the curves that were used to create the through curves
feature.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Choose Edit Curve.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose the Edit Curve Parameters icon.
Select the top spline as shown.
Top spline
Bottom spline
Choose Edit Pole.
Set the Edit Method to Match End Slope.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-83
Developed Curves
Indicate near the left end of the spline.
Select the line that is attached to the top left corner of the
block.
NOTE You must select curves when matching the slope or

curvature on a spline.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Match this spline
end to this line
Top spline
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Match this
spline end to
this line
Match this spline Match this spline

Bottom spline end to this line
end to this line
Indicate near the right end of the spline.
Select the line that is attached to the top right corner of the
block.
NOTE Notice that as the spline updates, the through curves

feature at the corner of the block temporarily updates.
This is because the preference is set to show continuous
updating. The trim of the solid block is not an immediate
child of the spline, thus it does not update.
Choose OK twice. You are now back at the Edit Curve dialog.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Select the bottom spline and repeat the editing process so

that the end slopes match the corresponding lines attached
to the bottom corners of the block.
Choose OK until the solid completely updates. Your part

should now match the following illustration.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 4 Once again check the angular deviation between the

trimmed corner face and the two, adjacent side faces.
Optional:
Change the degree of the splines to 5.
Match the end curvatures to the lines.
Define Drag Vectors. Drag the poles along their corresponding lines to
change the shape of the corner trim without breaking the curvature
continuity.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-85
Developed Curves
Edit Spline by Fit
This option is most effective when used on a relatively smooth spline that has
more points than necessary to retain the shape of the spline.
To edit a spline using the Fit method:
Select the spline you wish to modify.

Define the control method for fit.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The control method for fit is defined using the same process as that
described for creating a Fit spline.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Activity 2-14: Edit a Spline Using the Fit Option
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Edit the spline using the Fit method.
Choose Edit → Curve → Parameters.
Select the cyan spline.
Choose Fit.
Choose By Segments as the Fit Method, enter 4 segments.
Choose OK twice (once on the dialog, and once in the fit

computation message window.)
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-87
Developed Curves
Step 3 Edit the spline by the Fit method again. Choose By

Segments and change the number of segments to 1.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2 Step 4 Edit the spline by Edit Pole.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Use Edit Method Move Pole, Constrain End Slopes.
Drag poles to achieve a similar shape to the one illustrated

below:
TIP When you drag poles to shape a spline, use ConstrainĂ

ĂEndĂSlopes and ConstrainĂ ĂEndĂCurvatures to
maintain slopes or curvatures as necessary.
Using end constraints, poles are considerably easier to

manage, and the desired shape is achieved more quickly.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Change Degree
This option lets you change the degree of the spline, by entering a new value
when prompted. When entering the desired degree, you must specify an integer
value between 1 and 24.
Multiple segment splines may only have their degree increased. If you enter a
degree which is less than the current value, the following error message
displays:
Can Not Decrease Degree Of MultiĆsegment Spline. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
2
Increasing the degree increases the number of poles. The shape of the curve ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
does not change if the degree is increased.
Control polygon Control polygon
2 3 3
2
7
6
4
1 1
6
4 5
5
Degree = 5 Degree = 6
BEFORE AFTER
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-89
Developed Curves
Change Stiffness
This option allows you to modify the shape of a curve by changing its degree,
without changing the number of poles. Changing the stiffness increases or
decreases the number of segments in the spline. Using this option, you can
change a multiple segment spline into a single segment spline and vise versa.
The system will prompt you to enter the desired degree. The minimum degree
allowed is 1; the maximum degree is equal to one less than the number of poles
defining the curve. If the degree entered is less than 1, an error message
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
displays:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Degree Less Than Minimum.
In the same manner, if you enter a degree value greater than the possible
maximum, an error message will display:
Degree Greater Than Maximum.
Increasing the degree by Change Stiffness keeps the control polygon (the
number of poles) the same. The segmentation changes.
+ + Control polygon
+
+ + + +
BEFORE Degree = 3, Segments = 3 AFTER Degree = 4, Segments = 2
Decreasing the degree reduces the stiffness of the curve, allowing it to mimic
the undulations of its control polygon more closely.
Control polygon +
+ +
+ +
+ + + +
BEFORE Degree = 3, Segments = 3 AFTER Degree = 2, Segments = 4
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Spline Smoothing
The Smooth function works on open splines only. It can be applied to either the
whole spline or to segments of a spline based on defining points.
The Source Curve option list lets you

choose whether you wish to smooth the
original spline or a copy that is
ÏÏÏ
currently being edited.
ÏÏÏ
2
Smoothing is a two-step process.
Choose the Edit Curve icon and select ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
a spline to initialize the procedure.
Step 1: Choose Approximate. The

spline changes to degree 5 and becomes
smooth.
Step 2: Choose Smooth to continue

smoothing the entire curve or select a
point on the curve to smooth a spline
segment.
NOTE The Smooth button becomes available after selecting

Approximate. You can either smooth the entire spline or
the spline at individual points.
The spline is smoothed based on the Threshold factor.
Smoothed splines have a degree of 5 after smoothing.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-91
Developed Curves
Activity 2-15: Spline Smoothing
This activity shows methods to smooth a curve created Through Points.
Step 1 Open the part mff_smooth.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Unblank all of the part to examine a body in the part.
Ctrl-Shift-U is a shortcut to Unblank All of Part.
Use view rotation or orientation. Visually examine the solid.
Notice that the solid appears to be fairly smooth, without any

obvious, visual undulations.
Choose Undo.
Step 3 Enable curve analysis display of Combs for the spline.
Select the spline. Toggle Combs display on.
In Combs Options, increase the Scale Factor to ~10.0.
Click OK. Use Zoom In/Out to make the comb completely

visible on the screen. Examine the curvature comb. Notice
the short comb teeth near the fifth point from the left.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Step 4 Verify the current degree of the spline.

Use Information Spline Short Output.
The spline is currently degree 3. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Step 5 Edit the spline using the Smooth method ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select Edit → Curve → Parameters.
Select the spline
Choose Smooth.
Toggle Match End Slopes and Match End Curvatures to on.
Select Approximate. The sharper peaks in the curvature

comb become smoother (more rounded).
NOTE Note: After choosing Approximate, the Smooth button

becomes active. Selecting the Smooth button will affect
the entire curve, whereas, clicking with MB1 on the curve
will localize the smoothing action.
Select Smooth, watching the dip in the comb at the fifth

point.
Use MB1 and click near the 5th point from the left.
NOTE In the following step, do not click on the end points of the
curve.
Click near the 6th point and continue working back and forth
along the curve to iron-out" local ripples. It is generally
best to work the points sequentially back and forth along the
spline.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-93
Developed Curves
The intent is to reduce the sharp points in the curvature comb to a

minimum. Remember that Undo is available at any time. If you start to
notice unwanted undulations in the comb, you can select Undo to back
up one or more steps.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ When you are finished, choose Back in the Smooth Spline
dialog.
Choose OK in the Edit Spline dialog.
Choose Cancel in the Edit Curve Parameters dialog.
The associated solid updates. The solid face generated by a

spline in a similar part will be analyzed for smoothness in an
upcoming activity.
Step 6 Verify the degree of the spline.
Use Information Spline Short Output.
The spline is now degree 5.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Framing Data
In aesthetic work, splines are usually extended or overbuilt" to frame major

sheets. It is much easier to trim a large sheet to adjacent geometry than to
extend a small sheet.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The pole structure of nicely balanced" splines is similar to that of conic curves.
Many product designers prefer exactly one peak per curve, and they require an
aesthetically pleasing progression of curvature:
Peak indicator
Typical curve segment from a vehicle body panel:

one peak, at the end point (monotone change in curvature)
smoothly changing curvature, or length of comb teeth
only one or two segments (more about segments later)
One of our primary best practices" is to construct each primary sheet as a

separate entity. Each element of geometry should be kept as simple as possible.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-95
Developed Curves
It is not necessary to add complexity to underlying splines to accomplish sheet

to sheet transitions. Unigraphics provides several functions to create smooth,
aesthetically pleasing transitions.
Modular construction leads to ease of editing. It is conceivable that a major

change could be made with little or no rework to adjacent sheets. When large
amounts of data depend on each sheet, it is vital to manage the scope of rework.
In our approach you will use curve trim to overbuild" your splines. You want to
trim by natural extension. Here is why:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Sharp change in comb
Circular extension creates a sharp change in

the curvature comb. The line of change on a
sheet made from this spline will be visible
(and unacceptable) on highly polished sheet
metal.
Splines have to be carefully shaped to permit natural extension. Here is why:
Path of Natural Extension
Too much curvature at the end. Spline cannot be trimmed to

intersect with the adjacent spline.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Dragging Poles with Deviation Checking
You can change both the shape of a spline and the shape of the curvature comb
by dragging" poles.
During pole editing, visual feedback available in Unigraphics dynamic

Deviation Check allows you to monitor the amount that your spline varies from
defining data points.
Moving a pole perpendicular to a spline has a large effect on shape and

curvature. Moving a pole roughly parallel to the spline affects the curvature ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
comb without excessively changing the position of the spline curve.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The smoothing function is useful to make final" tweaks to edited splines.
Final" is used as a relative term. When you are dealing with splines it takes
practice, and possibly several iterations, to get a shape that you and your
customer find to be pleasing.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-97
Developed Curves
Activity 2-16: Dragging Spline Poles
In this activity you will practice creating by eye a nicely curved spline that closely
approximates the input data. The shape illustrated below is your goal:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
The above illustration shows the shape of the curvature comb we
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
want to achieve.
With practice, you can maintain relatively even spacing and progressively
changing curvature as you edit the curves.
Step 1 Open the part mff_drag_poles.
Step 2 Move a pole to establish a csys.
Choose Edit Curve Parameters...
Select the spline.
The Edit Spline dialog appears.
Choose Edit Pole.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
The Edit Pole dialog appears.
À ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Define Drag Plane. À
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-99
Developed Curves
A generic Plane dialog appears.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Plane of WCS.
TIP When a spline is linear it has no associated plane. It is

possible, on the first edit, to accidently skew the spline
into almost any plane. To assure that a spline remains in
the plane of data:
move the WCS to the plane of the spline (we
did this for you)
define the drag plane to be Plane of WCS (the
XC-YC plane)
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
NOTE In the next action, please avoid moving either end pole.
Click and drag any internal pole by a few millimeters.
ÏÏÏ
Position the cursor over an
internal pole.
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Click and Drag the pole a few

millimeters from its original location.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-101
Developed Curves
Step 3 Activate Deviation Check.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
From the Edit Pole dialog, choose Deviation Check. À
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Options in the Deviation Check dialog will remain grayed out
until some comparison geometry has been selected.
Choose the icon for Reference Point.
Select the five white data points within the interior of the
spline.
À Á
Â Ã Ä
Although it does not matter in this case, in general, it is a

good habit to avoid moving end poles. This avoids
accidentally creating a gap between adjacent curves.
Since you don't intend to move the end poles, there is no
reason to select the end points for deviation checking.
Choose OK to end selection.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-103
Developed Curves
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ À
Á
Â
Ã
In the Deviation Display area, enable all three options,

Vectors, Markers, and Numbers. À
Enter 1.0 as the Threshold. Á
Enter 100 as the Length factor. Â
Choose OK. Ã
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
These Vectors have Length approximately 100 times the

deviation between the spline and a selected point.
These Markers appear when the deviation

exceeds the Threshold value, which you set as
1.000.
This vector has no marker. You
can be sure that the spline has
less than 1.000mm deviation from ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
the adjacent data point.
ÏÏÏ
3.96372
Numbers appear at only the point of

maximum deviation.
NOTE You must repeat the point selections every time you edit
the spline. With a Shape Studio license you may create
permanent deviation checking entities.
Step 4 Drag poles to approximate the shape.
Drag each pole while watching the comb.
NOTE Try to achieve only coarse" deviation, within 1 or 2 mm,

in the initial drag mode. In just a moment, you will switch
to Micro Positioning.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-105
Developed Curves
Step 5 Micro Position poles for better control.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Micro Positioning
OFF"
When you click the Micro Positioning icon, the

open lock icon updates to a closed lock:
Micro Positioning ON"
Locate and activate the Micro Positioning Lock icon on the

Edit Pole dialog.
In Micro Positioning mode, a selected pole moves only about

one tenth as far as you drag the cursor.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
TIP With practice, you will see that:

moving any pole can affect curvature along a
large percentage of the curve.
moving a pole along the length of a spline can
affect curvature without necessarily causing a
large change in deviation from data points.
Your goal is to obtain a smoothly varying curvature. Try to

capture the shape of the comb.
For the purpose of this lesson, a well shaped curve within a
millimeter of the data points is better than a poorly shaped
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
curve that passes close to the points. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The illustration below shows the deviation display for a
similar spline. The comb is smoothly changing, flat near the
ends, and the maximum deviation 0.6mm is quite acceptable.
0.59551
The curvature must be shallow enough at the ends to permit

you to extend this framing spline using its natural curvature.
You want to intersect it with an adjacent framing curve.
NOTE Do not be discouraged if you find it difficult to persuade

the curve to behave as you wish. In a few minutes, you
will have a chance to switch to previously prepared
splines.
Choose OK only one time, to exit from Edit Pole.
Step 6 Optionally, repeat the dragging process using the other

spline.
Cancel from Edit Curve Parameters when you are finished.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-107
Developed Curves
Step 7 Display previously prepared splines.
Orient View to Top.
Make layer 53 the Work Layer, layer 54 Selectable, and

layers 51 and 52 Invisible.
ÏÏÏ
0.64874705
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
0.58128711
Your splines could very well be better" than the examples.

Layer 54 contains permanent analysis entities. These were
created using Deviation Gauge, a feature available with a
Shape Studio license.
If aesthetic spline editing is important in your work, be
reassured that results will improve with practice.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
Trim Curve
The Trim Curve function allows you to perform either associative or
non-associative trim to curves using bounding objects. If an edge is selected to
be trimmed a curve is automatically extracted from the edge.
Second Bounding Object String to Trim
First Bounding Object Any

Point
ÏÏÏ
Curve
ÏÏÏ
Edge
2
ÏÏÏ
Face
Changeable window
ÏÏÏ
Sketch
based on Filter
String
Plane
Datum Plane
Changeable window
Datum Axis
based on Selection
Step
Natural
Linear
Circular
None
Retain Retain
Blank Blank
Delete
Replace
NOTE If you are trimming splines, you are warned that the defining data of
the spline will be changed. You can choose Cancel to quit or OK to
continue with the trim operation.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-109
Developed Curves
Procedure
The basic procedure to trim (or extend) a curve is shown in the following steps:
Choose Edit → Curve → Trim.

Use the First Bounding Object selection step to specify the first
bounding object. If you want to trim or extend the bounding object,
turn on Trim Bounding Objects and set the Trim/Extend option to
either Start or End.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Select the Second Bounding Object (optional). If you have already
turned on Trim Bounding Objects for the first bounding object, the
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
second bounding object is also going to be trimmed. You can
independently set the Trim/Extend option for the second bounding
object to Start or End.
Set the desired Method to Find Intersections option to either Shortest
3D Distance, Along Screen Normal or Along a Vector.
Use the String to Trim selection step to specify the curve you wish to
trim or extend. The end of the curve you select is the end that is
trimmed.
Set the Extend and Trim options for the selected curve.
If you chose Along a Vector for the Method to Find Intersections
option, use the Vector Direction selection step to specify the desired
direction of the trim.
Turn on the Associative Output option if you want the output trimmed
curve to be associative with its input parameters.
Use the Input Curves pull-down menu to specify the disposition of
the curves to be trimmed.
Click OK or Apply.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
If you are trimming a spline that is to be extended to its bounding object(s), you
can choose the shape of the extension. Options are:
Natural - Extends the spline from its endpoint along the natural path
of the spline.
Linear - Extends the spline from either endpoint to the bounding
object where the extended portion of the spline is linear.
Circular - Extends the spline from its endpoint to the bounding object
where the extended portion of the spline is circular.
None - The spline is not extended.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
If you choose a solid or sheet edge to trim, the edge is first extracted (this
ÏÏÏ
extracted curve is trimmed. If you choose Associative Output, a TRIM_CURVE ÏÏÏ
happens internally, you will not see an extracted feature) and then the
feature is created which is linked to the solid or sheet edge and will update
when the solid or sheet is modified.
Trimming Associative Splines
Original associative splines are not trimmed. A copy is automatically extracted

and trimmed. The copy will update with both the parent spline and the
trimming geometry.
To trim associative splines created with Spline by Points or Spline by Poles, use
this procedure:
À Input Curves set to Retain (optionally, Blank)

Á Associative Output set to ON (you want the trimmed curve to
update with the parent spline)
Proceed to trim the spline in the normal way
Á
À
Associative Trim appears in feature listings and the Model Navigator.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-111
Developed Curves
Activity 2-17: Trim Curve (non-associative)
This activity lets you practice trimming curves (non-associatively) and prepares
the curves for use in later features. These curves will be used to generate
extensions which are normal to the face on which they lie.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
Step 1 Open the part mff_trim_curve_2.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Step 2 Trim the 4 splines so that they form a contiguous, closed
shape.
Choose Edit → Curve → Trim.
Ensure that Associative Output is toggled off.
Trim the splines as shown.
Trimmed shape
EDS Unigraphics NX
Developed Curves
SUMMARY A good curve skeleton is prerequisite for
ÏÏÏ
problem free sheets, which in turn are essential
ÏÏÏ
to constructing solid bodies with one or more
non-analytic faces. 2
In this lesson, you practiced an assortment of
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
practical construction methods to create
smooth, contiguous strings and grids of curves.
You:
Created splines, using several construction
and editing methods.
Used Offset and Rough Offset for planar
curve strings, and 3D Axial Offset for
non-planar curve strings.
Created Bridge curves of varying continuity,
and applied the symmetric constraint.
Projected Curves.
Practiced Combined Curve Projection
Created Intersection Curves
Offset curves in a face.
Practiced manipulating spline poles to
manage both shape and curvature
characteristics.
Trimmed curves, associatively and
non-associatively.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
2-113
Developed Curves
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Curve Analysis
Curve Analysis
Lesson 3
PURPOSE In the introduction you saw the value of spline

analysis as a tool in producing high quality curves.
In this lesson you will expand your understanding of

curve analysis methods and options.
Manipulate the visual display of a spline using

ÏÏÏ
curve analysis options in menus and on the Analyze
ÏÏÏ

Shape toolbar.
Create a listing of peaks and inflections.
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Obtain a listing showing curvatures and torsions.
Use Deviation Check to measure distances
between a spline and other objects.
Activity Page
3-1 Obtaining Information about a Spline . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-2 Information about a 3D Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-3 Deviation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
3-1
Curve Analysis
Evaluating Splines
Spline Quality
The decision of whether a spline is good" or simply good enough" is very

subjective.
Many months of modeling and hundreds of features could depend on the

quality of initial splines. It is therefore economical to spend a great deal of
effort to create splines that offer a low risk of problems with dependent child
features.
Automotive sheet metal typically has the most stringent requirements.
For molded plastic products with a grain finish, surface quality requirements
are slightly less stringent.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ In many applications, modeling quickly is of the utmost concern. There may be
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
only a small number of features that directly depend on spline quality. For
example, in cast metal parts, appearance concerns might be minimal or
non-existent. In such applications, fast creation methods are preferred.
Spline Analysis Display
Unigraphics provides these visual cues to help you to monitor spline quality
during construction and editing:
Control Polygon
Curvature Combs
Inflection markers
Peak indicators
Aesthetic designers look for uniformly spaced poles and smooth curvature
combs.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Curve Analysis
Analyze Shape Toolbar
Visual tools to dynamically monitor curve properties are found in two places.
The Analyze Shape toolbar can be enabled and managed like any other
Unigraphics toolbar.
Enable the Analyze Shape toolbar.
ÏÏÏ
Some of the icons shown below
are not visible by default. We
recommend that you enable the
ÏÏÏ
command icons that you use most
often using Customize... ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Curve Analysis Icons
Output
Listing
Poles Options...
Combs Peaks Output
Combs Graph Listing
Options... Inflections Graph Options...
Peaks Inflections
Options... Options...
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
3-3
Curve Analysis
Analysis - Curve Menu
The same options found in the Analyze Shape toolbar may also be accessed
from the menu Analysis Curve.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Enabled Options for

selected curves
have a check mark
beside them
EDS Unigraphics NX
Curve Analysis
Procedure
For the Analyze Shape toolbar or the Analysis Curve menu, the procedure is
the same.
When Not Editing a curve
Select one or more splines

Enable the options you want
Optionally change selected curves and set options
Deselect the splines
While Editing a curve
Toggle the options you want at any time (the display of curves already
highlighted will be modified)
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Comb Tooth
Pole
Peak Point
Inflection Point
Peak Point
Pole Curvature Profile
Control Polygon
Inflection Point
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
3-5
Curve Analysis
Combs Options
Control size, number of

teeth, and extent along
curve of comb display
None
Plane of Curve
Specified Vector
Work View
Specify Vector
(when
applicable)
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Peaks and Inflection Options
Both dialogs are the same.
None
Plane of Curve
Specified Vector
Work View
Specify Vector
(when
applicable)
EDS Unigraphics NX
Curve Analysis
Information Spline
Choosing Information → Spline displays the Spline Analysis dialog.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Procedure
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Choose the options you want.
Choose OK.
Select one or more splines or solid edges that are splines, then OK.
A temporary display is generated. Symbols depict:
C0 knots (#)
C1 knots ()
C2 knots ().
Poles are represented by circles ().
Defining Points are represented by plus signs (+).
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
3-7
Curve Analysis
Output to Information Window
None: does not display the Information Window.
Short: generates the following information for each spline:
Closure Status
Degree
Number of Poles
Number of Segments
Number of C0 knots
Number of C1 knots
Number of C2 knots
Rational status
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Defining Data
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Scale Constraint
Approximate rho
Degeneracies (if there are any)
Complete: generates the Short option information for each spline, plus the
following information if the corresponding option is enabled:
Show Knot Points: the coordinates of the knot point and the continuity
(C0, C1, or C2) are shown.
Show Poles: the coordinates of the pole and the weight are shown.
Show Defining Points: the coordinates of the defining point are shown.
Also, where applicable: least squares weight, curvature, slope, least
squares tolerance and/or least squares number of segments.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Curve Analysis
A sample listing is shown.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
A legend explaining the symbols used to indicate the knots, poles, and defining
points appears at the top of the Information Window.
Each selected spline is numbered in the graphics window. Information

pertaining to each appears in the Information Window with its corresponding
number.
Temporary information displays can be removed by choosing Refresh.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
3-9
Curve Analysis
Activity 3-1: Obtaining Information about a Spline
Step 1 Open the part mff_curve_analysis.
Peak points
ÏÏÏ Inflection points
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
The spline was saved with peak and inflection analysis
displayed.
Step 2 Display Analysis Data for the spline.

Select the spline.
TIP If a spline cannot be selected, make sure that the mask in

the Selection toolbar is set correctly. It should be on
Select General Objects for curve spline selection.
Choose Analysis Curve Output Listing,
or, if it is visible, choose the icon
EDS Unigraphics NX
Curve Analysis
Values for the current analysis options, Inflections and Peaks:
Curvature Analysis For Curves

Number of Check Points = 50
Projection Plane = Plane of Curve
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Analysis for Curve # 1
projection vector = (0.000000 0.000000 1.000000)
** Inflection Points at
Parameter XC YC ZC
0.054913 141.573451 –2.957299 0.000000
0.075576 214.690528 –5.103657 0.000000
0.075580 214.703911 –5.104043 0.000000
0.469614 682.211811 –306.944143 0.000000

0.701630 773.195039 –557.964454 0.000000
0.931673 998.329931 –713.731465 0.000000
0.971670 1010.806663 –772.687524 0.000000
** Peak Points at
Parameter XC YC ZC Curvature
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 9.016456e–002
ÏÏÏ
3
0.062500 169.079178 –3.776540 0.000000 –2.767950e–005
0.301048 643.521498 –71.131340 0.000000 1.061463e–002
0.623370 705.598831 –532.810496
0.854415 973.515042 –638.509859

0.968556 1009.520784 –767.481639
0.000000 –2.864139e–002
0.000000 1.256598e–002
0.000000 –1.507206e–003
ÏÏÏ
1.000000 1014.800000 –812.200000 0.000000 1.135123e–001
Step 3 Enable Combs display, at a Density of 10.
Use the toolbar icons, or choose Analysis Curve Combs

and Analysis Curve Combs Options...
Step 4 Create a second Output Listing.

This time, Coordinates, Curvature and Torsion are listed for the
position of every tooth on the comb. That is why we chose a low
Density!
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
3-11
Curve Analysis
Step 5 Get Information about the spline.
Choose Information Spline...
ÏÏÏ Enable:
ÏÏÏ

Show Knot Points
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Show Poles
Show Defining Points
Choose Output to Information Window Complete.
Choose OK.
Select the spline in the graphics window, then choose OK.
The Information window will appear, and several hundred

lines of data will scroll by.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Curve Analysis
Display symbols: C0=# / C1=<> / C2=[] / Poles=o / Defining Points=+

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Information on spline # 1
Closure Status Open
Degree 3 General Information

Number of Poles 11
about the spline.
Number of Segments 8
Number of C0 Knots 0
Note that the degree
is 3, and there are 8
segments.
Rational Status Polynomial

Defining Data Linked to curve
Knot Number 1
Next follows data

Continuity C2 about 7 knotpoints.
Coordinates XC = 169.07917685820 X = 169.07917685820 7 knotpoints divide

YC = –3.77653991714 Y = –3.77653991714 the spline into 8
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ZC = 0.00000000000 Z= 0.00000000000 segments, exactly as
the data tells us.
ÏÏÏ
3
...
Pole Number
Weight =
1
1.00000000000
ÏÏÏ
Immediately after the
Coordinates XC = 0.00000000000 X= 0.00000000000
7th knot point data,
there is information
YC = 0.00000000000 Y= 0.00000000000
about 11 poles.
ZC = 0.00000000000 Z= 0.00000000000
...
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Least Squares Tolerance = 3.00000000000
Poles data is
followed by the
Least Squares
Defining Point Number 1
Tolerance, and
Least Squares Weight = 22.60353954583
weights and
Coordinates XC = 0.00000000000 X= 0.00000000000 coordinates of 77
YC = 0.00000000000 Y= 0.00000000000 defining points.
ZC = 0.00000000000 Z= 0.00000000000
Lastly, you see

... information about
the sketcher
Scale Constraint None geometric scale
Approximate rho 0.307079384361887 constraint, and
approximate rho.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
3-13
Curve Analysis
When you have examined the listing, scroll back to the top
and move the window away from the graphics display.
Examine the Display symbols on the graphics display.
The meaning of each symbol is identified by the Display symbols

legend at the top of the listing.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Curve Analysis
Non Planar Splines
A default setting for combs, Projection Plane, is set to Plane of Curve. This
specifies that the comb will be relatively flat, even when the spline has a three
dimensional shape:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
When Projection Plane is set to Plane of Curve, the system does not attempt to
measure torsion. Analysis output list will display a torsion column, but torsion
values will be zero throughout.
If Projection Plane is set to None, the system calculates torsion at every tooth,
in order to reflect the relative twisting effect. Torsion values can then be seen in
analysis output listing.
A simple activity will demonstrate this point.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
3-15
Curve Analysis
Activity 3-2: Information about a 3D Spline
Step 1 Open the part mff_3dspline.
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Output an analysis listing with the default settings.
ÏÏÏ Choose Select General Objects on the Selection toolbar.

ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ Select the spline.
Choose Analysis Curve Output Listing.

Are any values of torsion shown in the listing?

Projection Plane = Plane of Curve
projection vector = (0.004753 -0.026522 -0.999637)
Parameter XC YC ZC Curvature Torsion
0.000000 -2.801948 -1.198089 0.000000 1.884724e-001 0.000000e+000
0.020408 -2.781179 -0.923995 -0.006187 1.727471e-001 0.000000e+000
0.040816 -2.748156 -0.655682 -0.009940 1.465468e-001 0.000000e+000
0.061224 -2.704799 -0.389968 -0.010978 1.128266e-001 0.000000e+000
0.081633 -2.653027 -0.123667 -0.009020 7.544987e-002 0.000000e+000
0.102041 -2.594760 0.146405 -0.003786 3.824968e-002 0.000000e+000
0.122449 -2.531764 0.423175 0.005000 6.033102e-002 0.000000e+000
0.142857 -2.462538 0.704154 0.017464 1.361525e-001 0.000000e+000
0.163265 -2.382452 0.981665 0.033592 2.243199e-001 0.000000e+000
0.183673 -2.286754 1.247823 0.053365 3.390541e-001 0.000000e+000
0.204082 -2.170689 1.494743 0.076763 4.937921e-001 0.000000e+000
0.224490 -2.029506 1.714541 0.103767 6.902303e-001 0.000000e+000
0.244898 -1.858458 1.899342 0.134355 8.449925e-001 0.000000e+000
0.265306 -1.655336 2.044530 0.168115 7.213389e-001 0.000000e+000
0.285714 -1.424006 2.153293 0.203685 5.639794e-001 0.000000e+000
EDS Unigraphics NX
Curve Analysis
Step 3 Change the Projection Plane.
Choose Analysis Curve Combs Options...
Change the Projection Plane to None.
Choose OK.
Step 4 Repeat the listing.

Notice torsion values that now appear.

Projection Plane = None
Parameter XC YC ZC Curvature Torsion
0.000000 -2.801948 -1.198089 0.000000 1.899709e-001 -1.539328e-001
0.020408 -2.781179 -0.923995 -0.006187 1.754043e-001 -2.076402e-001
ÏÏÏ
0.040816 -2.748156 -0.655682 -0.009940 1.508805e-001 -2.987375e-001
0.061224 -2.704799 -0.389968 -0.010978 1.196542e-001 -4.697572e-001
ÏÏÏ
0.081633 -2.653027 -0.123667 -0.009020 8.637026e-002 -8.330393e-001
0.102041 -2.594760 0.146405 -0.003786 5.715879e-002 -1.653006e+000
0.122449
0.142857
0.163265
0.183673
-2.531764
-2.462538
-2.382452
-2.286754
0.423175
0.704154
0.981665
1.247823
0.005000
0.017464
0.033592
0.053365
7.290402e-002
1.418322e-001
2.273275e-001
3.395966e-001
2.018006e+000
5.045458e-001
2.099472e-001
1.114026e-001
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
0.204082 -2.170689 1.494743 0.076763 4.906017e-001 6.772591e-002
0.224490 -2.029506 1.714541 0.103767 6.809422e-001 4.488498e-002
0.244898 -1.858458 1.899342 0.134355 8.286979e-001 7.240383e-002
0.265306 -1.655336 2.044530 0.168115 7.059050e-001 9.371303e-002
0.285714 -1.424006 2.153293 0.203685 5.535611e-001 1.244032e-001
0.306122 -1.169231 2.229967 0.239570 4.170507e-001 1.702749e-001
Step 5 Try to set the WCS to the curve.
Choose WCS Orient...
Choose the icon for CSYS of Object.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
3-17
Curve Analysis
Select the spline.
An error message will appear.
Choose OK to dismiss the Error message.
TIP To quickly check whether a spline is planar or 3D,

attempt to set the WCS to the spline.
ÏÏÏ Step 6 Close the part without saving.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Curve Analysis
Deviation Check
Temporary dynamic deviation display is available inside the Edit → Curve →

Parameters... menu for splines, on the Edit Pole dialog.
With a Shape Studio license you can create a permanent deviation gauge that
dynamically updates with any edit.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
3-19
Curve Analysis
Reference Plane Reference Defining

Points of Original
Reference Curve
Reference Point
Face Vector
Reference Plane
Curve
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Dialog options change depending on what kind of comparison has been

selected.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Curve Analysis
Activity 3-3: Deviation Check
Step 1 Open the part mff_deviation and start the Modeling

application.
Step 2 Prepare to edit the spline.
Select the spline.
ÏÏÏ
Choose Edit Pole.
ÏÏÏ
Choose Deviation Check À. ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
À
Step 3 Set Deviation Check options.
Choose Reference Defining Points of Original Curve Á.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
3-21
Curve Analysis
TIP Reference Defining Points of Original Curve is available

whenever defining data exists.
Choose Vectors Â, Markers Ã, and Numbers Ä.
Enter the following values:

Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 Å
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100.0 Æ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ Â Ã Ä
Æ
Ç
EDS Unigraphics NX
Curve Analysis
Choose OK Ç.
Make a note of the current maximum deviation:
Step 4 Move two poles.

The poles are unevenly spaced. Note also that there is
greater curvature on the right. A general guideline for
aesthetic splines is to make intervals between points
progressively decreasing as the curvature increases. If you
edit the second pole from the left, by moving it laterally,
along the length of the spline, it is possible that the curvature
comb will take a more pleasing shape.
Click once to select the second pole from the left, as shown:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Click Here
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Chose the Existing Point icon in the Point Constructor.
Click once over the white point on the left.
Click Here
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
3-23
Curve Analysis
What is the maximum deviation now?
The appearance is now more pleasing, but the maximum

deviation from defining points has increased.
The largest deviation is quite near the second pole from the
right. Other deviation vectors in the same general area lie in
the same direction, with similar magnitude.
Perhaps if you move the second pole from the right roughly
perpendicular to the spline, and slightly closer to it, deviation
values will improve without excessively changing the shape.
Repeat the same click selection process to move the second

pole from the right to the white point that is almost in the
same location as the pole.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
Move this
pole to this
point.
Choose OK twice, to update the spline.
What is the maximum deviation now?
Cancel from the Edit Curve Parameters dialog.
The original spline was created by Fit from approximate

point scan data. As you have seen, with practice, analysis
display, and Deviation Check, you can improve both the
shape and tolerance of Fit splines.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Curve Analysis
SUMMARY Good curves lead to good sheets, which in turn

lead to good solid models. Unigraphics'
collection of diagnostic tools for curves
provides a range of valuable visual and analytic
feedback to assure that curves meet your
standards.
In this lesson you:

Obtained extensive data about splines.
Developed an understanding of how spline
information is crucial to managing design
ÏÏÏ
criteria, and detecting unwanted undulations
ÏÏÏ

or unnecessary complexity.
Practiced using Deviation Check to
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
dynamically compare a spline to data. In this
case, you used a built in function to compare
the spline to its own defining data.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
3-25
Curve Analysis
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
3
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Primary Sheets and Bodies

Lesson 4
PURPOSE You will extend your understanding of splines to

include Free Form bodies whose structures are based
upon the mathematics of splines.
Define Ruled features between two strings.

Create Through Curves features using multiple
section strings.
Use a grid of curve strings to create a Through
Curve Mesh feature.
Create Swept bodies using guide strings and
section strings.
Activity Page
4-1 Compare Parameter & Arclength Alignment . . . . 4-11
4-2 Ruled, Parameter & Arclength Alignment . . . . . . 4-12 ÏÏÏ
4-3 Through Curves, Arclength and Parameter . . . . . 4-16 ÏÏÏ
4
4-4
4-5
Creating Through Curves Features . . . . . . . . . . . .
Through Curves, By Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22
4-33
ÏÏÏ
4-6 Curve Mesh with Tangent Constraints . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4-7 Swept Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4-8 Swept Feature Using Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
4-9 Orientation and Scale Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
4-10 Swept Feature - Area Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4-11 Swept Feature-Orientation by Vector . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4-12 Cam Follower Groove (Face Normal) . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4-13 Airfoil Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-1
Free Form Features
Insert Free Form Feature options provide the ability to create non-analytical
shapes. Non-analytical shapes are those not available from Primitive,
Extruded, Revolved, Sweep Along Guide, or Form Features.
Free Form Features require some form of pre-existing information, such as

point data, curves, edges, faces, sheets, or, in the case of Midsurface, a solid
body.
Free Form Features allow a third method of initializing a body, as opposed to

Primitives and Sweeps. The feature can be either a solid body or a sheet body.
Solid bodies have thickness, and enclose a volume.

Sheet bodies are solids that have zero thickness and do not enclose a
volume.
Most Free Form features can be either sheet bodies or solid bodies, depending
upon:
the modeling preference for Body Type.

the closed or open nature of defining curve strings.
A solid body can be created when:
The body is closed in both directions.

The body is closed in one direction and the other direction has planar
ÏÏÏ

ends.
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Primary Free Form Sheets
Free Form methods to create primary sheets include:
Curve Mesh
Through Curves
Swept
Splines form the mathematical basis for the above sheets. Your understanding
of what makes a good" spline is a major step towards understanding what
makes a good" Free Form sheet.
Earlier, we defined Free Form shapes as those which cannot be built using
primitive bodies; standard Form Features; or sketches containing only lines, arc,
and conics.
Point for discussion: By the above definition, is an extruded spline a Free Form
shape?
Strings
A string is a contiguous chain of curves and/or edges. Unless a smaller number

is specified, Free Form features can be based on up to 150 strings. For example,
a Through Curve Mesh feature could conceivably have 150 Primary and 150
Cross strings. Swept features specifically restrict you to a smaller number of
guide strings; one is required, up to three are allowed.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
Each string can consist of many contiguous member objects. Typically the upper
limit is close to 5000, available memory permitting; however, we recommend
using the least number of elements as practical.
ÏÏÏ
Some features require that certain strings must be planar, or must be tangent
continuous. Each of these cases will be discussed individually.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-3
Primary Bodies and Transitions
Primary bodies (sheets or solids) are, in general, the main" features that
define a required shape.
Transitions are secondary contours that define a blend" or transition from one
primary face, or set of faces, to another face or set of faces.
Applications for Primary Sheet Bodies
Sheet bodies may be used for the following:
Create contours and shapes that would be difficult or impossible to

achieve with standard solid modeling (Insert → Feature).
Trim a solid body to create a contour or shape on one or more faces of
the solid body. See the following illustration.
Trimming Solid
Sheet Body
Body
ÏÏÏ
Before After
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Create a solid body by (creating and) sewing several sheets together to
totally enclose a volume.
U and V Grids
Sheet or solid bodies are visually represented by UĆV grids and boundaries. The
grid is a display feature only. The density of the UĆV grid has no relationship to
the mathematical accuracy of the sheet.
EDS Unigraphics NX
When a body is first created, the density

of the grid is determined by the U Count
and V Count values that are set in
Preferences → Modeling.
To change the grid display of an existing

body, choose Edit → Object Display,
select the object, then change the grid
count values. The grid display of
individual faces can be modified using
Edit → Object Display, and specifying
Type → Face.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-5
Free Form Construction Result
Under Preferences Modeling, on the Free Form tab, there are three options
that affect free form feature construction and analysis display.
The Free Form Construction Result options allow you to control the type of
body created when using Through Curves, Through Curve Mesh, Sweep, and
Ruled options.
If B-Surface is toggled ON, the system will always create a BĆSurface body,
even if the generator geometry is planar.
If Plane is toggled to on, and the defining curves are coplanar, the system will
create a Trimmed Planar surface.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Determining the Face Type
You can determine the type of surface of a Free Form feature by using
Information → Object, Type, Face and selecting the face. A listing window
displays the information about the faces selected.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Edit Feature Parameters
Edit → Feature → Parameters lets you modify the creation parameters of

parametric features only. It can be used for Free Form features as well as for
any other parametric feature (Form Features, Sweeps, etc.). Parameters of
parametric Free Form features can also be edited using the MB3 → Edit
Parameters option on the Model Navigator.
Tolerances
Free Form Feature Smart sheets Uses a Distance Uses an Angle

Creation Method Tolerance Tolerance
Through Points No No No
From Poles No No No
From Point Cloud No No No
Through Curves Yes Yes Yes
Through Curve Mesh Yes Yes Yes
Swept Yes Yes Yes
Section Yes Yes No
Extension Yes Yes No
Fillet No Yes No
Offset Yes Yes No
Foreign -- No No
Bounded Plane Yes No No
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ruled Yes Yes Yes
4
Quilt
Face Blend
Yes
Yes
Tolerances on dialog
Tolerances on dialog
ÏÏÏ
Soft Blend Yes Tolerances on dialog
Midsurface Yes Yes Yes
Bridge Yes Yes No
Thicken Yes Yes No
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-7
Distance Tolerance
Distance tolerance is the

maximum allowable
distance between the true
theoretical sheet and the
resulting approximated
sheet that the system
creates. Methods using
approximation require a
distance tolerance. The
distance tolerance can be
set in Preferences →
Modeling.
Angle Tolerance
Angle tolerance is the

maximum allowable
angle between the
normal of the true
theoretical sheet, and the
normal of the sheet that
the system creates to
approximate it. Some
methods require an angle
ÏÏÏ tolerance.
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Increasing a tolerance to a very large value effectively removes that tolerance

from consideration.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Ruled Features
A ruled feature is a sheet or solid created through two section strings, where
each string consists of one or more contiguous curves, solid edges, or a solid
face. Ruled features are similar to features created through curves, but only two
strings are used.
When you select the section strings, you can choose from the options shown in
the illustration below. You can choose a point for the first string selection.
Choose OK after each complete string, and choose OK to create the ruled
body.
Select the alignment method, change the tolerance if you want a different value
than shown, and choose OK in the dialog (see the illustration below).
Parameter
Arclength
By Points
ÏÏÏ
Distance
Angles
Spine Curve
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Alignment Methods
The Alignment options allow you to control the alignment between the section
strings. This establishes connection points of the isoparametric curves to the
section strings and therefore controls of the shape of the feature to some
extent. Options are: Parameter, Arclength, By Points, Distance, Angles, Spine
Curve, and for Through Curves, Spline Points.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-9
Parameter spaces the points, through which the isoparametric curves will pass,
at equal parameter intervals along the defining strings. The entire length of
each curve will be used.
Arclength spaces the points, through which the isoparametric curves will pass,
at equal arclength intervals along the defining strings. The entire string length
will be used.
Parameter Arclength
Line Conic Conic
Line Line Line
Line Conic
Line
Ellipse
Conic Conic
Line Line Line Line
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 4-1: Compare Parameter & Arclength Alignment
In this activity you will create Point Sets using Equal Arc Length spacing on one
and Equal Parameters on the other. This clarifies the difference between Arc
Length and Parameters spacing, the two most common options of Alignment
for Ruled and Through Curves features.
Step 1 Open the part mff_align_1 and start the modeling

application.
Step 2 Create 30 points on the top curve, using Equal Parameter

spacing.
TIP Choose Insert → Curve → Point Set, Points on Curve,

Spacing Method → Equal Parameters, Number of
Points=30, select the top curve, choose Apply
Step 3 Create 30 points on the bottom curve, using Equal ÏÏÏ

Arclength spacing. ÏÏÏ
4
TIP Spacing Method → Equal Arc Length, choose Select
ÏÏÏ
New Curve, select the bottom curve, choose OK,
choose Cancel.
Step 4 Carefully examine the spacing of the points along both

splines, then Close the part.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-11
Activity 4-2: Ruled, Parameter & Arclength Alignment
In this activity you will create sheet bodies using Ruled and the two alignment
options, Parameter and Arclength, and evaluate the results.
Step 1 Open the part mff_ruled_1 and start the Modeling

application.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ Step 2 Set the U and V grid line count to 20.
Choose Preferences → Modeling.
Enter 20 in the Grid Lines/U Count text field.
Enter 20 in the Grid Lines/V Count text field.
Choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Step 3 Create a Ruled feature through the yellow curves using

Parameter Alignment.
Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Ruled.
Select the 3 curves (yellow) as shown for section string 1.
Choose OK until prompted for section string #2.
Select the 3 curves (yellow) as shown for section string 2.
Section string 1
Section string 2
Parameter
Alignment
Section string 1
Section string 2
Arc Length
Alignment
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
Choose OK until you are at the Ruled parameter dialog.
ÏÏÏ
Ensure that Alignment is set to Parameter.
Ensure that the Tolerance is set to .001.
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-13
Step 4 Create another Ruled feature through the cyan curves

using Arclength Alignment.
After a ruled feature is created, the dialog remains active. You
are prompted to select section string #1 for the next feature.
Select the 3 curves (cyan) as shown for section string 1.
Choose OK until prompted for section string #2.
Select the 3 curves (cyan) as shown for section string 2.
Section string 1
Section string 2
Parameter
Alignment
Section string 1
Section string 2
Arc Length
Alignment
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK until you are at the Ruled parameter dialog.
Change Alignment to Arclength.
Ensure that the Tolerance is set to .001.
Choose OK.
Choose Create.
Choose Cancel.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Step 5 Compare both sheet bodies.

Your finished part should match the illustrations below.
Parameter Arclength
À
Á
Parameter
Arclength
When there are equal numbers of curves in each string, the

rulings of parameter alignment join corresponding curves end
to end," as shown by the fan shaped rulings between two arcs of
ÏÏÏ
different radius À.
ÏÏÏ
4
Equal arclength rulings from the same large arc connect to part ÏÏÏ
of a line Á. This may result in twisting" of the surface, when
viewed from certain angles Â.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-15
Activity 4-3: Through Curves, Arclength and Parameter
In this activity you will preview the Through Curves function, using various
alignment options. You will evaluate the faces of the resulting sheet bodies. In
the following lesson your instructor will provide details about Through Curves.
Step 1 Open the part mff_thrucurves_3, and start the modeling

application.
Step 2 In the Modeling Preferences dialog, set both U and V

grids to 3.
Step 3 Create a Through Curves feature through the 6 sets of

curves.
Use the following parameters:

Patch Type Multiple
Alignment Arclength
V Degree 3
Tolerance .0254
Evaluate the result. The entire arclength of each string is

used to construct a single face sheet that has few changes of
curvature.
ÏÏÏ Step 4 Edit the Alignment of the previously created feature and
ÏÏÏ
4 observe the difference.
ÏÏÏ Choose Edit → Feature → Parameters.
Select the THROUGH_CURVES feature.
Choose OK.
Choose Edit Alignment.
Set the Alignment Method to Parameter.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Choose OK until the feature updates.
Notice the change in the surface of the sheet. The U and V

parameters are more erratic due to the emphasis on the
amount of curvature of the section strings entities. The
default tolerance is still being used.
Arclength Alignment Parameter Alignment

Default Tolerance Default Tolerance
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
Step 5 Once again, edit the Alignment of the previously created
feature and observe the difference.
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
Choose Tolerance.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-17
Set the Distance Tolerance to 0 (zero).
Choose OK until the feature updates
Once again, notice the change in the surface of the sheet.

Because you specified a zero tolerance for the parameter
alignment sheet body, the system created a sheet with
multiple faces.
Parameter
Alignment
Zero Tolerance
NOTE The system will not allow you to create a Free Form body
ÏÏÏ using arclength alignment with a zero tolerance.
ÏÏÏ
4 The curves comprising each string have various lengths. In this
ÏÏÏ particular case, parameter alignment causes the rulings to be
quite twisted, while arclength provides uniformly space rulings.
NOTE One cannot claim in general that either parameter or

arclength alignment is better." In choosing an alignment
method, you must be guided by the nature of the data.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Comparing Ruled and Through Curves

Ruled features are a special case of Through Curves features.
Ruled features only allow two Section Strings. They are always linear (1 degree)
in V, or between the strings.
Through Curves features can have up to the maximum of 150 strings. V degree
up to 24 is possible.
If a Through Curves feature is created with 2 strings, it will behave like a Ruled
feature, but, you have the benefit of being able to add additional strings later.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-19
Through Curves
This option allows you to create a body through a collection of strings, referred
to as section strings.
These section strings and the newly created body are associative. The system
updates the body when you modify the creation strings.
If you create a multiple patch sheet, you can specify a degree in V. You can also
choose among seven options to control the alignment of the isoparametric
curves.
The body type, distance tolerance, angle tolerance, density, and grid lines
settings under Preferences → Modeling will affect the creation of bodies
created with Through Curves.
Through Curves Section

string #1
(V-direction)
Direction vector
(U-direction)
Section
string #2
Section
string #3
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Resultant Sheet Body
EDS Unigraphics NX
Procedure
To create a body using Through Curves:
Select the desired section strings through which the body will pass and
choose OK.
Choose a Patch Type for the body.
Choose an Alignment method.
For multiple patch, enter a degree for the V direction.
For multiple patch, specify whether the body will be closed in the V
direction.
Enter a tolerance.
Select the desired Section String Constraint type.
Single
Multiple
Parameter
Arclength
By Points
Distance
Angles
Spine Curve
Spline Points
No Constraint
Tangency
Curvature
Not Specified
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Isoparametric
Normal 4
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK on the Through Curves dialog.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-21
Activity 4-4: Creating Through Curves Features
In this activity you will create a Free Form sheet body using Through Curves
and then edit its parameters.
Step 1 Open the part mff_thrucurves_1 and enter the modeling

application.
Step 2 Create a Free Form sheet body using Through Curves.
ÏÏÏ Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Through Curves.
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ Note: In parts that include
bodies, the filters in the dialog
are useful.
If only some of the curves in a

sketch or a feature that outĆ
puts curves are desired, it is
necessary to select Curve or
Chain Curve before selection.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the first curve as shown for section string #1.

Choose OK to complete the section string selection for
section string #1.
Select
string 4
Select Select
Select string 3
string 2 string 5
Select
string 1
Repeat the process for section strings 2-5, until all five
curves have been selected as shown in the following
illustration.
NOTE Be sure to watch the cue line!
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
After each section string is completely selected, a coneĆhead is
displayed showing the starting entity vector.
The vectors must be located at equivalent endpoints of each
string and point approximately in the same direction. Otherwise,
the body will be twisted.
TIP In the Cue Line, after a section string selection, a prompt

option permits you to Reselect Starting Entity." Only one
reselection pick is allowed, to correct the vector if it is in
the wrong location or orientation.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-23
After all the curves are selected, choose OK to complete the

section string selection.
Choose OK on the Through Curves dialog to accept the

default settings.
Choose Create when you are prompted for a Boolean

operation.
NOTE The above dialog displays only when another body is

present in the part.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Z
Y
EDS Unigraphics NX
Step 3 Make layer 41 Invisible.
Step 4 Shade the part to see the surface contour.
Step 5 Interrogate the sheet using Information BĆSurface with

all options on.
There is 1 seam
in the V direction
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-25
A listing window displays the information about the face selected.
Step 6 Make layer 82 selectable to see the two sheet bodies at

each end of the Through Curves feature.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Step 7 Edit the THROUGH_CURVES feature.
In the Selection toolbar, choose Select Features.
Double-click over the THROUGH_CURVES feature. À
EDS Unigraphics NX
Choose Show
Parameters to view the
section strings and
direction vectors on
the features.
NOTE: Show
Parameters
information might be
partly obscured by
shaded faces. In
wireframe mode, all of
the text will be visible.
In order to make the sheets tangent to the adjacent sheets,

choose the Edit Boundary Constraints option.
Choose First Section String

Tangency, and select the left
cylindrical sheet, then choose
Last Section String Tangency,
and select the right cylindrical
sheet.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select last tangency here
4
ÏÏÏ
Select first tangency here
Choose OK until the Through Curves feature updates.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-27
Double-click the THROUGH_CURVES feature again.
From the dialog that displays, choose Edit Curve.

The Edit Curve Parameters icon should be highlighted.
Select the middle arc to edit. (Be sure to select it in between

control points)
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ Select this arc
The curve parameters are displayed in the Basic Curves

Dialog Bar below the graphics area. Enter 4 in the Radius
field, and press the Enter key. The resized arc displays.
TFR-TRI WORK
EDS Unigraphics NX
Choose OK until the sheet body updates.
Step 8 Repeat the procedure on the arcs at the ends of the

Through Curves feature.
Change the first and last arcs to a smaller radius, and notice
how the model changes.
Why do you think it changes as it does?
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-29
More About Through Curves Features
Maintaining Sharp Corners
When you create a through curves feature with sections that have sharp corners
a tolerance of 0 will maintain the corners in the resulting body. Otherwise, at
sharp corners, the section string is approximated as shown below:
Through Curves and Sweep

create a spline (internally) to
approximate section curves.
This spline is a smooth curve
lying inside a tolerance zone.
Thus, at corners, there is a

very small radius.
Tolerance value
The tolerance zone is simply the

tolerance value on each side of
section curves
Alternatively, to maintain edges between specific points, align by Points for an

exact fit. By Points alignment is discussed on page 4-32.
Degree
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
The degree of the created body in the U direction (along the strings) will
ÏÏÏ
default to 3. If the tolerance is small, the U degree may match the degree of the
selected curves, depending upon their degree and segmentation.
The degree of the created body in the V direction (perpendicular to the strings)
will be determined by the Patch Type switch, and/or the number of strings
selected.
Patch Types
The Patch Type for the body can be Single or Multiple. Patches are similar to
segments of splines. Multiple patches does not mean multiple faces.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Single creates a single patch sheet body. For Single patch, you must
specify at least two strings, up to a maximum of 25. The V degree will
be one less than the number of strings selected.
Multiple creates a sheet body with multiple patches. You must specify
at least one more string than the degree. For example, if you entered a
V degree of 3, you must specify at least four strings. After the
minimum number of strings have been selected for the specified V
degree, selecting additional strings increases to the number of patches
in the sheet.
Closed Features
Closed in U - If the strings you select are all closed, the body generated will be
closed in the U direction. The closed status of the body along rows (U
direction) is based on the closed status of the selected section strings.
Closed in V - This toggle allows you to close a sheet along columns (V

direction) by turning this option on (see the illustration below). If you select
closed section strings and turn Closed in V on, the system creates a solid body.
String #1 V Degree =3
String #2
String #6
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
String #5
ÏÏÏ
String #4 String #3
Before After
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-31
Alignment By Points
By Points aligns points between the ends of curves. This accommodates section
strings which have different shapes; for example, a rectangle and a triangle.
To align points, select rows of points, one from each section string. The system
will assign each row of points the same number, displayed on the screen, and
create an edge joining them:
Points with like numbers will be 2

aligned together.
1
= start location of each string
2 1 3
2
3 Section
string #3
1
3 Section
string #2
Section
Direction string #1
vector
Resultant body
All the selected sections should contain at least one object for alignment. The
starting points are automatically aligned.
All alignment points on each section string should follow one direction, for
example, clockwise, or counterclockwise, or the resultant body will be twisted.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4 For each alignment point, you must identify corresponding points on all section
ÏÏÏ strings.
The system will create separate faces bounded by the edges formed between
rows of aligned points, and by the section curves themselves.
If sharp points are not aligned, a smoothed corner face will be created to
approximate these sharp corners, as described on page 4-30. Subsequent
feature operations preformed on such faces (e.g., blends, hollows, or Boolean
operations) may fail due to the tiny curvature.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 4-5: Through Curves, By Points
In this activity you will create a sheet body using Through Curves, edit the
V-degree of the sheet, and evaluate the results.
2
1
1 2
Step 1 Open the part mff_thrucurves_4.
Step 2 Create a Through Curves feature through the 3 sets of

curves.

Patch Type Multiple
ÏÏÏ
Alignment By Points
ÏÏÏ
4
V Degree
Tolerance
1
0 (zero) ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Analyze the result to determine the number of faces and
their type.
Choose Information → Object, Type, Face.
Select all the faces.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-33
Choose OK.
Notice that you have six faces: 2 trimmed planar faces, and 4
B-surface faces.
Step 4 Edit the parameters of the feature.
Choose Edit V Degree.
Set the V degree to 2.
Choose OK until the model updates.
Step 5 Once again, analyze the result to determine the number

of faces and their type.
Choose Information → Object.
Select the faces and the curved edges of the feature.
How many faces are there and what type are they? Also what
type of entities are the curved edges?
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ Step 6 Close the part.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Other Alignment Options
Distance spaces the points along each section string at equal distances in a
specified direction. This results in isoparametric curves which all lie in planes
perpendicular to the specified direction vector. The extents of the body are
determined by the defining curves: the body continues until it reaches the end
of some defining curve.
You specify the direction in which the system will space the isoparametric
curves. Internally, the system constructs planes which are intersected with each
of the defining curves to obtain the points needed for the isoparametric curves.
Angles spaces the points along each section string at equal angles around a
specified axis line. This results in isoparametric curves which all lie in planes
containing the axis line. The extents of the body are determined by the defining
curves: the body continues until it reaches the end of one of the defining curves.
By Distance By Angles
Conic
Line
Line Axis line
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
Ellipse Vector ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-35
Spine String places the points at the intersections of each of the section strings
and planes perpendicular to the input curve. The extent of the resulting body is
based on the limits of this spine curve.
Spine curves which are all, or in part, perpendicular to the defining curves
(section strings) are invalid because the intersection between the section planes
and the defining curves will be non-existent or poorly defined.
Line as
Spine
Conic
TOP VIEW Line TOP VIEW
Line
Ellipse Spine
TFRĆTRI VIEW TFRĆTRI VIEW
Arc as Spine
TOP VIEW
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ TFRĆTRI VIEW
EDS Unigraphics NX
Through Curve Mesh Features
Use Through Curve Mesh to create a body from a collection of existing strings
running in two different directions. A string consists of single or multiple
objects. Each object can be a curve, solid edge, or a solid face. Strings running
in one direction should be designated as the primary strings, while the strings
running in a roughly perpendicular direction would then be the cross strings.
The creation strings and the new body are associative. The system will update
the body when you modify the creation strings.
Primary string #2
Cross string #3
Cross string #1 and #5
Cross
string #2
Cross string #4
Primary string #1
You can select a point or an endpoint of a curve as a primary string if it is the

first and/or last string specified. If all the selected primary strings form a closed
loop, you can reselect the first cross string as the last cross string. This allows
you to create a closed tubeĆtype solid body. See the illustration above.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-37
Procedure
To create the curve mesh body:
Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Through Curve Mesh.

Select a primary string (or point) and choose OK to finish the
selection. Repeat this primary string selection until all primary strings
are selected.
Choose OK to end the primary string selection process and start the
cross string selection process.
Select a cross string and choose OK to finish the selection. Repeat this
cross string selection until all cross strings are selected. If desired,
re-select the first cross string as the last cross string.
Choose OK to end the cross

string selection process and
start the spine string selection
process.
Select a spine string, if you are
using one, and choose OK
when finished. If not, choose
OK to omit the spine.
Choose an Emphasis method
for determining the strings to
which the body will more
closely pass.
ÏÏÏ Enter an Intersection Tolerance

ÏÏÏ

4 or use the default.
ÏÏÏ Select the type of constraint to
be applied to the first and last
strings in each set.
Choose a Construction Option.
Choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Grid Lines
The grid lines are only a display feature. The number of grid lines does not
affect the accuracy of the actual surface. If the grid counts are small, the
surface may appear to be jagged. To obtain a smoother display, a larger number
of grid curves should be used.
2 3
4 10 11
1 5 9 12
6
7 8
U" Grid
Line 1
2
3
4
5 V" Grid
6 Line
U Count = 12 7
V Count = 10 8
9
10
Selecting the Strings
Select primary and cross strings in an orderly manner, moving from one side of
the body to the other (see the following illustration). The minimum number of
primary strings permitted is 2; the maximum is 150.
For example, in the following illustration, you would select all primary strings in
order (1, 2, and 3), and choose OK to complete the end of primary string
selection, and then select all cross strings in order (4, 5, 6), again choosing OK
ÏÏÏ
to complete the end of string selection.
ÏÏÏ
4
1 2
4 ÏÏÏ
Primary Strings 1-3
Cross Strings 4-6
3
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-39
Selecting Points as Primary Strings
During the primary string selection, you may select a point or an endpoint of a
curve as the first and/or last string. See the illustration below.
Five
cross
Last primary strings
string is a
point
First
primary
string
ORIGINAL GEOMETRY
RESULTS
When only one point is going to be selected as a primary string, it is best to

select it as the last string. This will enable you to more easily insert a section
string adjacent to the point through editing. If the first primary string is a point,
you must select the same geometry (i.e. actual point entity, curve endpoint or
control point, etc.) used to specify the point during the initial creation for
Unigraphics to understand that you wish to insert a string after the point.
Using a Spine
ÏÏÏ You can select a spine string to control the parameterization of the cross strings.
ÏÏÏ
4 The spine can improve the surface smoothness by forcing U isoparameter lines
ÏÏÏ to be always perpendicular to the spine. Thus, the spine must be long enough to
intersect the cross strings everywhere. If the spine is too short, you will receive a
No Intersection" error.
The select spine" prompt will appear only if both the first and last primary
strings are planar.
The spine string will be valid if the string is perpendicular to the first and last
primary strings. Spine curves are invalid if they are all, or in part, perpendicular
to the cross strings. This is because the intersection between the section planes
and the cross string (defining curves) will be nonĆexistent or poorly defined.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Curve Mesh Constraints
You can constrain the body so that it is tangent to, or curvature continuous
with, a face or set of faces at the first and/or last primary and cross string.
The Tangency constraint lets you constrain the new body tangent to a face or set
of faces.
The Curvature constraint option lets you constrain the new body tangent to,
and curvature continuous with, a face or set of faces. When the constraints are
created, they match the tangency and the normal curvature, in the tangent
direction of the new body.
You can match the constraints along common edges, as well as when the edges
of the curve mesh body are in the interior of the constraint body. Constraints
can be created during the initial creation of the curve mesh, or by editing it
after it has been created.
Specifying Intersection Tolerance
The Intersection Tolerance value is used to check the mesh of strings for
intersection with one another. If the strings do not intersect within the specified
intersection tolerance, the system displays a message. The value must be a
positive value greater than zero.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-41
Y
X
Z
Á
À
À Cross Strings Á Primary Strings
Â Ã
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Ä
Emphasis on:
Â Primary
Ã Cross
Ä Both
EDS Unigraphics NX
Specifying Emphasis
The Emphasis setting (primary, cross, or both) determines which set of strings
has the most effect over the shape of the curve mesh body, or that both sets
have equal effect.
The preceding illustrations show the differences in emphasis options.
Emphasis has a bearing only in locations where a primary and cross string pair
does not intersect. The resulting body will pass through either the primary or
cross strings, or an average of the two, based on emphasis of primary, cross, or
both, respectively.
Specifying Other Parameters
You can determine how closely the body conforms to the control strings by
specifying distance and angle tolerances using the Preferences → Modeling
option.
The distance between the curve mesh body and its defining strings is controlled
by the tolerances you specify, in general, the body will not interpolate (i.e. pass
through) these strings exactly.
Specify the type of body (solid or sheet) that the system creates depending on
the Body Type setting.
ÏÏÏ
Editing Through Curve Mesh Features
ÏÏÏ
4
The selection steps allow you to replace the primary curves, the cross curves, ÏÏÏ
and/or the target faces.
Choosing the Primary Curves icon allows you to reselect primary

curves.
Choosing the Cross Curves icon allows you to reselect cross curves.
Choosing the Target Faces icon allows you to reselect target faces.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-43
Activity 4-6: Curve Mesh with Tangent Constraints
In this activity you will create Through Curve Mesh sheets with tangency
control associated to adjacent faces.
Step 1 Open the part mff_mesh_3.
Step 2 Create a curve mesh with tangent constraints on two

sides.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Choose Insert Free Form Feature Through Curve

Mesh...
The cue reads Select primary string 1."
Select the arc illustrated below, at the end shown:
When the cursor is over the arc, the status will read Arc."
After you select the arc, the status line changes to Choose OK
to finish selecting string 1."
Choose OK to end primary string 1 selection.
The cue reads Select primary string 2 or reselect starting

entity."
ÏÏÏ
Choose the Curve selection mask.
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-45
Select the outer" arc illustrated below, at the end shown:
Choose OK to finish selecting string 2.
The cue reads Select primary string 3 or reselect starting

entity."
The status line reads Choose OK to finish selecting strings"
because you now have the minimum number of primary strings
needed to create a Through Curve Mesh feature.
Choose OK.
The cue reads Select cross 1."
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4 Choose the selection mask Solid Edge.
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the solid edge illustrated below, at the end shown:
Choose OK once to indicate you are done selecting edges,

and OK again to indicate you are done with cross 1.
Again choose the selection mask Solid Edge.
Select the solid edge illustrated below, at the end shown:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-47
Choose OK once to indicate you are done selecting edges,

and OK again to indicate you are done with cross 2.
Choose OK a third time to indicate you are done selecting

cross strings.
The cue reads Select spine."

The status reads Choose OK to omit spine."
Choose OK to omit spine string selection..
The Through Curve Mesh dialog appears.

The surface must be tangent to the two adjacent faces.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
The faces are adjacent to cross 1 and cross 2; therefore, change

the constraints for First Cross String and Last Cross String to
Tangency:
ÏÏÏ
Leave the other options as shown.
ÏÏÏ
4
Choose OK to proceed with constraint selections.
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-49
Select face À below as a constraint on the first cross string.
À Á
Choose OK to end constraint selection for the first cross

string.
Select face Á above as a constraint on the last cross string.
Choose OK to end constraint selection for the last cross

string.
Choose Create.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
The surface will be created.
Do not dismiss the dialog that appears next.

You will continue to use it in the next step.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Step 3 Create a through curve mesh with tangent constraints on

three sides.
Use a similar procedure to Step 2 to create a curve mesh

feature using the illustration below as a guide:
Å
Â
Æ
Ã Ç
Ä
À Á
NOTE Select string objects at the ends illustrated!
ÀÁ First Primary Two Curves

Â Last Primary Solid Edge
Ã First Cross Solid Edge
Ä Second Cross Solid Edge
ÏÏÏ
Å Tangency, Second Primary Face ÏÏÏ
4
Æ Tangency, First Cross Face ÏÏÏ
Ç Tangency, Second Cross Face
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-51
Step 4 Examine the pole structure of the faces you created.
Choose Information B-Surface...
Set all of the options to ON:
Choose OK.
Select the two new sheets.
Choose OK.
What is the degree of the sheets in U and V?

How many patches were created in U and V for each?
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Swept Features
A swept feature is defined as the shape swept out by one or more curve outlines
moving along one, two, or three guide strings.
Guide
String #3
Section
String #2
Guide
String #2
Section Guide
String #1 String #1
Solid Body
Result
ÏÏÏ
Guide Strings
ÏÏÏ
4
A Guide String can consist of one or more segments. Guide strings control ÏÏÏ
orientation and scaling of the surface in the V direction (the sweeping
direction). Each segment can be either a curve, solid edge, or a solid face. All
segments in a guide string must be smooth and tangent continuous (C1). You
can use from one to three guide strings for a swept feature. In the illustration
above, 3 guide strings are being used.
One Guide String - When you select only one guide string, you can further
specify how the section string will be oriented and scaled as it moves down the
guide.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-53
Examples could be:
a centerline guide string for duct development.

a guide string on a body, where orientation with respect to face
normals is important.
a simple translational sweep along the guide.
NOTE When using an orientation curve, a spine is frequently used

to align the guide with the orientation curve. The spine
can be the guide.
Two Guide Strings - Two guide strings fully specify the scale and orientation
intent for the swept body. A second guide will always scale the body. If 2 curves
define a path for a swept body and the body should not be scaled, the second
curve (or string) should be used as an orientation string instead of a guide.
Scaling can be lateral or uniform. Lateral scaling scales the section string
between the guide strings, but not perpendicular to the guide strings. Uniform
scaling scales the section string in all directions.
Lateral scaling Uniform scaling
ÏÏÏ TOP VIEW
ÏÏÏ
4 (ROTATED)
ÏÏÏ
Three Guide Strings - When 3 guides are used, the first and second guide fully
define the orientation and scaling of the body and the third guide shears the
body on an independent axis.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Section Strings
A Section String may contain sharp corners.
If all the selected guide strings form closed loops, the first section string can be
selected as the last section string, as shown below:
First Last
Section Section
String String
Closed
Guide
String
Second
Section
String
Result
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-55
Interpolation Methods
If you select more than one section string for the sweep, you must specify the
interpolation method: Linear or Cubic.
Linear - the rate of change from one section string to the next will be
linear. A separate face will be created between each section string.
Cubic - the rate of change from one section string to the next will be a
cubic function. One face will be created that passes through all strings.
The Linear and Cubic options are illustrated below. Each result used arcs as
section strings, a single guide string, no spine, Parameter alignment, tolerance
of 0.001, Fixed orientation, and Constant scale set to 1.0.
Fourth section string

Third section string
ORIGINAL
GEOMETRY
Guide Guide
string string
First section string
Second section
string
Second section string
First section string
RESULTS
Linear
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ 1 Face 3 Faces
Cubic
1 Face 1 Face
EDS Unigraphics NX
One Guide, One Section
Guide
String
Section
Swept
String
Sheet
Two Guides, Two Sections
First Guide
String
Second
Section
String
Second First
Guide Section
String String
ÏÏÏ
Two Guides, One Section
ÏÏÏ
4
Scaled Laterally
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-57
Swept Feature Strings
You can generate a swept feature using:
1, 2 or 3 guide strings
1 to 150 section strings
Rules common to strings used in swept features:
The section and guide strings do not have to be planar.

The section and guide strings can be any type of curve except points.
Although it is generally desirable, the section strings do not have to be
physically connected to the guide strings.
A spine string can be used to further control the orientation of the
section string as it sweeps out the body.
Tolerance
Tolerance is the maximum distance between the input geometry and the
resulting body.
A tolerance of zero will maintain sharp corners with parameter alignment.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Spine String
To control the orientation of the section string, you can use a spine string.
A spine is used with 2 or 3 guides or with one guide and an orientation string.
The purpose of the spine is to create alignment points along the guide(s) or
orientation strings that match the design intent so the body maintains the
desired shape.
At each point on the spine string, the system constructs a plane, called a section
plane, perpendicular to the spine. The system intersects section planes with the
guide strings. All isoparametric curves in the U direction will lie on a member
of this family of planes.
The effect of a spine string can be seen in a ruled sheet between two curves that
have very uneven parameterizations, where the directions of the rulings will
vary in an unpredictable fashion.
A spine string will eliminate the effects of guide parameterizations.
First
Section
Spine First Guide
Second String
Guide
String
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Second
Section
USING SPINE STRING NO SPINE STRING
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-59
Activity 4-7: Swept Features
In this activity you will create several different swept features.
Step 1 Open the part mff_sweep_1.
Step 2 Create a swept feature using one guide string and one
section string.
Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Swept.
Select guide string #1 as shown.
Section String Guide String #1
Guide String #2
(when needed)
ÏÏÏ Spine Curve
ÏÏÏ
4 (when needed)
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK when the Cue Line prompts you for a second
guide string (use only one guide string and one section string).
Select the section string as shown.
Choose OK when the Cue Line prompts you for a second

section string.
EDS Unigraphics NX
The Swept feature

dialog displays,
allowing you to specify
the Alignment Method,
Section Location, and
Tolerance.
Choose OK to accept the defaults.
Choose Fixed as the

Orientation Method.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
Choose Constant as
the Scaling Method.
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-61
Choose OK to accept
the default scale of 1.
Your part should now look like the following illustration.
Use shaded display to evaluate the sheet for smoothness and

shape.
Step 3 Create a swept feature using two guide strings and one
section string.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Change the Object Preferences Color for sheet bodies to a
4 different color for the next section of this activity.
ÏÏÏ
Blank the sheet you just created.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Choose Swept and select guide strings #1 and #2 as shown.
Section String Guide String #1
Guide String #2
Spine Curve
Select the section string.
Accept the Swept Feature dialog defaults.
Choose Scale Laterally as the Scaling Method. No spine

string is used for this sheet. The part should look like the
illustration below.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-63
Optional: Change the color for sheet bodies, and create the
sheet again using Scale Uniformly.
Unblank the first sheet you created and visually compare the
two or three swept features. What are the differences?
Step 4 Create a swept feature using two guide strings, one

section string and one spine.
Change the Object Preferences Color for sheet bodies for the
next part of this activity.
Blank the other sheets that you created.
Choose Swept and select guide strings #1 and #2 as shown.
Select the section string.
Accept the Swept Feature dialog defaults.
Choose Scale Laterally as the Scaling Method.
When prompted for a Spine string, select the straight line for
the spine string.
Choose OK to create the sheet.
ÏÏÏ Unblank All of Part and compare the sheet bodies.

ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ Close the part.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 4-8: Swept Feature Using Faces
In this activity you will create a swept feature using faces for the section strings.
Step 1 Open the part mff_sweep_2 and start the modeling

application.
Step 2 Set the Modeling Preferences for U and V grids to 10.
Step 3 Create a swept feature using two guide strings, two

section strings, and a spine.
Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Swept.
Select guide strings #1 and #2 as shown and section faces #1

and #2 as shown. See the note below if you have problems.
Guide String #2
Spine Curve
Section Face #1
Guide String #1
ÏÏÏ
Section Face #2 ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
NOTE Remember to make the vectors point in approximately

the same direction. The elliptical face has only one start
and end point. The rectangular face's left edge is divided
in the middle. One correct orientation of direction
vectors is shown in the illustration on the next page.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-65
The base of the

vector should be
touching the end
of Guide String #1
Set the Interpolation

Method to Cubic.
Set the Alignment

Method to Parameter.
Set the Tolerance to

.001.
Choose Scale Laterally

as the Scaling Method.
Select the Spine String.
Choose Create.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
Examine the new solid body to determine if the alignment is
ÏÏÏ correct.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Orientation Control - With Only One Guide String
When you have only one guide string, you can impose orientation control. The
orientation rule controls the section string as it moves along the guide.
The system defines intermediate local coordinate systems at various points

along the guide. The tangent vector of the guide string is one axis of this local
coordinate system, and the system provides seven orientation control options
for specifying a second axis vector. These are:
Fixed: No orientation control is necessary. The section string maintains a fixed

orientation as it moves along the guide. The result is a simple parallel or
translational sweep.
Face Normals: The second axis of the local coordinate system is aligned with
the normal vector of some base face at every point along the guide.
Vector Direction: The second axis of the local coordinate system is aligned with
a vector you specify over the length of the guide string. You must define this
vector so that it never becomes tangent to the guide string.
Another Curve: The second axis of the local coordinate system is obtained by
joining corresponding points on the guide and the other curve (as though a
ruled sheet had been constructed between them). This second curve must not
intersect the guide.
A Point: This option is similar to using another curve, where the analogy of a
ruled sheet between 2 curves, is replaced by a three-sided ruled sheet between
the guide string and the point. We recommend that you use this option only to
construct a three-sided swept body, where one end of the section string is held
in a fixed position and the other end slides along the guide.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
Angular Law: Use the Law Subfunction to control the angular rotation of the
swept feature relative to the section string. There are several possible law ÏÏÏ
functions. With Law Curve, the orientation of the resultant body is determined
by Y distances from a law curve to the X axis or a reference curve. If there are
90 units between a point on the law curve and the X axis, then the system
applies to a 90 degree rotation at the corresponding point along the guide.
Forced Direction - This option lets you fix the orientation of the section plane
with a vector as the section string is swept along the guide string. The section
string slides along the guide string in a set of parallel planes. This option
prevents selfĆintersections when the guide string has a tight curvature radius.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-67
Scaling Control - With Only One Guide String
When you specify only one guide string, you can also impose scaling control.
This allows the section string to increase or decrease in size as it is swept along
the guide. The six scaling options are described below:
Constant: Enter a scale factor that will remain constant along the entire guide.
The default scale factor is 1.0. If you enter a scale factor other than 1.0, the
system scales the section string prior to sweeping. The section string is scaled
about the start point of the guide string.
Blending Function: This allows for linear or cubic scaling between specified
starting and ending scale factors, which correspond to the start and end of the
guide string.
Another Curve: This is similar to using another curve for orientation control.
The scale at any given point is based on the length of the ruling between the
guide string and the other curve or solid edge.
A Point: The same as the Another Curve option but using a point instead of a
curve. Choose this form of scale control when also using the same point for
orientation control in the construction of a three-sided swept body.
Area Law: Use the Law Subfunction to control the cross-sectional area. The
Section Strings are used as shape definers" and are uniformly scaled based on
values obtained from the Law definition. The section strings must be closed.
Perimeter Law: This function is the same as Area Law except that the Law
ÏÏÏ Subfunction is used to determine the perimeter of the resulting body's
ÏÏÏ
4 cross-section. The section strings do not need to be closed.
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Activity 4-9: Orientation and Scale Control
In this activity you will create a swept feature using each of the orientation
control options.
Step 1 Open the part mff_sweep_orient_1.
Orientation Control
Before this attempt,
turn on layer 3
Forced
Direction
XC+ Before this attempt,
turn on layer 2
Angular Law
(By Law Curve)
A Point
Another Curve
(no spine)
Vector XC+
Face Normal
ÏÏÏ
Fixed
ÏÏÏ
4
Use Parameter alignment ÏÏÏ
Tolerance = .001
Orientation as shown
Constant Scale = 1 in all cases
Step 2 Create a Swept feature for each of the pairs of guide and
section strings shown in this part.
Use the orientation control options as indicated.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-69
Your finished part should have sheet bodies like this.
Orientation Control
Forced
Direction
XC+
Angular Law
(By Law Curve)
A Point
Another Curve
(no spine)
Vector XC+
Face Normal
Fixed
Scaling Control
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4 Step 3 Make layer 5 the work layer and make all other layers
ÏÏÏ invisible.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Step 4 Create a Swept feature for each of the pairs of guide and
section strings shown.
Use the scaling control options as indicated.
For Area Law and Perimeter Law Section String, select both
the arc and the line connecting the arc end points.
Scaling Control
Perimeter Law
(By Law Curve)
Area Law
(By Law Curve)
A Point
Another Curve
(no spine)
Blending Cubic
1.0 to .5
Blending Linear
1.0 to .5
ÏÏÏ
Area and
Perimeter
Law curve Constant .5
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Use Parameter alignment
Tolerance = .001
Orientation = Fixed
Scale as shown
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-71
Area Law for Scale of Swept Features
Section Strings are used only to define the shape between sections. The size of
the cross section at any point is uniformly scaled based on values obtained from
the Law definition.
All section strings must form closed loops.
ORIGINAL GEOMETRY:
section string #2
guide string
Y constant area law curve
section string #1
X
AREA LAW:
One guide string

Two section strings
Interpolation method is Linear
Alignment method is Parameter
Tolerance = 0.001
Orientation is Fixed
Scaling is Area Law - By Law Curve
RESULTS:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4 ÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ Y
cross sectional area
is constant
throughout
X
EDS Unigraphics NX
Area Law with Y=constant

Y line has constant height (y-value) above
the X-axis, so cross sectional area of body
is constant
y=constant
x=0 x=1
Area Law with a linear curve

Y
y=aX
Î X
x=0 x=1
line begins at zero... so area here

starts at zero and increases linearly
cross sectional area at the end of the

Area Law with a Free Form curve sweep is equal to the Y-value at the
Y end of the curve
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
cross sectional area
ÏÏÏ
X between the ends
changes according to the
x=0 x=1 Free Form curve
cross sectional area at the start of the

sweep is equal to the Y-value at the
start of the curve
There is additional information about law functions in Appendix B.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-73
Activity 4-10: Swept Feature - Area Law
In this activity you will develop a solid body that has a constant area throughout
its length.
The initial section defines both the starting shape and the desired area
for the entire sweep.
The area of the starting string was calculated and used to position the
area law string.
Subsequent sections define the desired shape at their locations, but do

not define the area.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Create a swept feature using the one guide string, the 3
section strings, and the area law curve to control the
scaling of the feature.
Choose Swept.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Select the guide string and the three section strings.
NOTE Your direction vectors should be pointing in similar

directions. One possible arrangement is shown on the
next page.
One side on each of the rectangular section strings is split

into two segments. One segment is white. Starting points
can be lined up so that the body does not twist.
Guide String Section String
Section String
Section String Area Law Line
Set the Interpolation Method to Linear.
Set the Alignment Method to Parameter
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Set the Tolerance to .001.
4
Choose Fixed as the Orientation Method. ÏÏÏ
Choose Area Law as the Scaling Method.
Choose By Law Curve as the Area Law Option.
Select the Area Law Line that you created.
Choose OK when prompted for a Base Line. This will omit

the use of a Base Line.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-75
The swept feature is associated to the law curve as well as the guide and section
strings.
TIP If the feature seems to be twisted, edit it and

respecify the starting curves so that all the vectors
are starting at the proper location on the section
strings and are pointing in the correct direction.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Step 3 Hollow the swept body.
Hollow the body with a -.1 (negative) thickness and select

the planar faces at each end as the faces to be pierced.
TIP Choose Insert → Feature Operation → Hollow, key

in -.1, and select and confirm the two end faces of
the swept body.
Change the display of Hidden Edges to Invisible.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
Step 4 Experiment with moving the Law Curve ends or move the
entire curve to a different Y location.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-77
Activity 4-11: Swept Feature-Orientation by Vector
In this activity you will create a swept body whose orientation is controlled by
using a vector.
Create a compression spring made of square wire by using the

provided guide and section strings.
The inside curve of the section string is to remain parallel to the ZC

axis throughout the sweep.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
NOTE Because of the torsion in the guide curves, the square
4
ÏÏÏ
section tends to twist as it follows the helical path of the
guide. To create the correct body, it is necessary to
control the orientation of the section string.
Step 2 Create a Swept feature using the helical curves as the

guide string and the square as the section string.
Alignment Method . . . . . . Parameter
Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0
Orientation Method . . . . . Fixed
Scaling Method . . . . . . . . . Constant
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
EDS Unigraphics NX
Notice how the square twists as it sweeps along the guide string.
FIXED ORIENTATION +ZC VECTOR DIRECTION

ORIENTATION
Step 3 Undo or Delete the body.
Step 4 Create the swept body again. Orient it using Vector

Direction and the +ZC Axis as the direction.
NOTE Don't forget to set the tolerance to 0 (zero). This will

maintain the sharp corners of the square section string.
ÏÏÏ
Notice that the square now stays properly oriented as it sweeps along the guide ÏÏÏ
4
string. ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-79
Activity 4-12: Cam Follower Groove (Face Normal)
the face normal of a cylinder.
A groove in the solid cylinder must follow a cam path defined by a

wrapped curve.
The cam groove walls must remain perpendicular with the face of the
cylinder.
Step 1 Open the part mff_cam_1.
Step 2 Create a Swept feature using the wrapped curve as the

guide string and the CAM_PROFILE sketch as the
section string.
Cylindrical face to be used

Solid body for orientation control
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4 Wrapped Curve feature
ÏÏÏ is Guide String
Parameters:
Alignment Method . . . . Parameter
Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0
Orientation Method . . . Face Normals
Scaling Method . . . . . . Constant
Sketch is Section String Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Boolean Operation . . . Subtract (from cylinder)
EDS Unigraphics NX
Cam follower groove
Step 3 Add a 4 millimeter radius Blend to the two inner edges of

the groove.
Step 4 Add a 2 millimeter Single Offset Chamfer to the two outer

edges of the groove.
Front view of finished groove

with blends and chamfers
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
Step 5 Close the part. ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-81
Activity 4-13: Airfoil Cavity
an angular law that is defined by an equation. You will subtract this swept body
from the existing solid to form a cavity.
Step 1 Open the part mff_angle_law.
Step 2 Create a Swept feature using the vertical line as the guide
string and the trimmed outline (the inside curves) as the
section string.
Section String
Guide String
Solid body
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX

Alignment Method . . . . . . Parameter
Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0
Orientation Method . . . . . Angular Law
Angular Law . . . . . . . . . . . By Equation
Parameter Expression . . . t
Function Expression . . . . ft
Scaling Method . . . . . . . . . Constant
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Boolean Operation . . . . . . Subtract (from airfoil body)
TIP Curves in this part belong to associative trim features.

You will get multiple curves with each selection.
To avoid an error message about ambiguous strings, use

the Curve mask during section string selection.
Solid with cavity
Step 3 Examine the part from a top orientation. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
4
The expression ft=28*t creates a 28° rotation along the length
of the guide curve. Expression t is used internally by the system,
as it defines the orientation along the U parameter from 0 to 1.
ÏÏÏ
If you use Tools → Expression to change ft to another value,
45*t for example, the part will update accordingly.

Appendix B has additional information about law functions.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
4-83
SUMMARY Primary sheets and solid bodies define

non-analytical contours of a part.
Primary Free Form bodies depend on
underlying points, curves, faces, or edges.
Free Form bodies can be solids or sheets,
depending upon a preference setting, and the
nature of underlying curves.
In this lesson you:

Created four types of primary sheets:
Ruled - exactly two section strings
Through Curves - multiple section strings
Through Curve Mesh - grid of strings
Swept - guide strings and section strings
Discovered the basics of Law Functions,
using laws to govern the area and orientation
of swept features.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Transitions
Lesson 5
PURPOSE You will learn how to create smooth transitions

between primary sheet bodies or solid faces.
Transition methods discussed include both Free Form
sheets and certain feature operations.
Create several types of Section features.

Use Bridge Surfaces.
Create Soft Blends.
Identify situations for and use N-Sided Surface.
Activity Page
5-1 Section Creation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-2 Five-points and fillet-shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5-3 Fillet Section Between Two Sheet Bodies . . . . . . . 5-30
5-4 Variable Rho Fillet Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5-5 Hilite Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5-6 Tangent Continuous Bridge - 1 Side Surface . . . 5-45
5-7 Create Bottle Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5-8 Blend Strut to Hull and Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5-9
5-10
Blend Airfoil Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Sided as Sheet Repair Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-56
5-61 ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
5-11 N-Sided Shape Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-1
Transitions
Section Features
This option allows you to construct bodies using conic surface techniques. To
completely define the body, you must supply enough data to specify the five
conditions required to define a conic, such as 3 points and 2 slopes.
You can think of a section body as an infinite family of conic section strings
lying in prescribed planes, starting and ending on, and passing through, certain
selected control strings. Additionally, the system obtains conic end-slopes
directly from the control strings, and uses a continuous 2D conic shape
parameter to vary the fullness of the conic sections along the body.
Left to Right
ends-apex-shoulder,
ends-slopes-shoulder, Left to Right
fillet-shoulder, ends-apex-rho,
three-points-arc ends-slopes-rho,
fillet-rho,
ends-apex-hilite,
two-points-radius
ends-slopes-hilite,
fillet-hilite,
ends-slope-arc four-points-slope,
ends-slopes-cubic,
fillet-bridge,
five-points,
point-radius-angle-arc
linear-tangent,
circular-tangent,
circle
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Highlight Conic
A highlight conic (shortened to hilite for the icon names) is defined as a conic
through two points tangent to three lines. You specify points and slopes for the
ends of the curve and then a line to which the conic is tangent.
Spine String
The definition of the section body depends upon the use of a spine string. The
body is constructed using a series of sections normal to the spine curve and
intersecting with the control strings. The resulting body will reflect the quality
of the spine curve.
S P
Spine string
S
P
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-3
Transitions
The sheet in the following illustration is created using the ends-slopes-rho

method.
Four strings and a spine are needed to define the conic sheet: S is the start
edge string, S is the end edge string, S
defines the start slope control string,
S defines the end slope control string, and S is the spine string.
A Rho value is also required.
Points P , P
, P, and P are obtained by intersecting the defining strings with a
typical section plane which is perpendicular to the spine string.
If you are creating a section sheet with a varying Rho, the starting end of the
spine string will determine where the starting Rho value will be applied.
P
P
S5 spine string P
S
P
S
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Spine String Requirements
The spine string should be a high quality curve. The spine curve determines the
quality of the body.
Since the extent of the body is controlled by the shortest string, a spine must be
long enough to define the body over the desired extent. The illustration below
shows how the spine string determines the extents of the sheet.
The sheet was created by filleting two adjoining sheets using the fillet-rho
option.
The spine string determines the extent of the sheet since it is shorter than the
edge strings.
Section sheet
V
U
Edge strings
Spine string
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-5
Transitions
Section Body Definition
A Section feature is comprised one or more B-surfaces. The following topics

discuss the character of the surface(s).
Section Type (U Direction)
The Section Type options control the shape of the sections in the u-direction
(i.e., perpendicular to the spine string):
Conic - since rational B-spline curves can represent conic curves

exactly, this option produces a true, exact conic shape with no
reversals in curvature. It accepts rho values between 0.0001 and
0.9999.
Cubic - these curves have roughly the same shape as their rational
counterparts (used in the Conic option) but produce a surface with a
better parameterization. This option distributes the flow lines along
the entire curve, but does not produce exact conic shapes. For
example, rho values greater than 0.75 create section curves which are
not shaped like a conic. For this reason, the maximum rho allowed
when creating polynomial cubic sections is 0.75.
Quintic - the surfaces are degree 5, and are C2 (curvature
continuous) between patches.
NOTE For the fillet-bridge section feature, the Section Type

choice is controlled by options on the Fillet Bridge dialog.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
The illustration below illustrates the differences when using Conic and Cubic
section types. Both conic surfaces were created from the same geometry, using
the endsĆapexĆrho creation method, with the rho value determined by cubic
blend and varying from 0.3 Ć 0.7. The distance tolerance was set to .001. Notice
the difference in the shape of the iso-parametric rulings between the two
surfaces.
end edge end edge

apex apex
spine spine
start edge
start edge
Conic (exact) Cubic (approximate)
Fitting Type (V Direction)
The Fitting Type choices control the degree and shape of the feature in the
v-direction (i.e., parallel to the spine string):
Cubic - yields degree 3, and is C1 (tangent continuous) between

patches.
Quintic - yields degree 5, and is C2 (curvature continuous) between
patches.
Apex String
To define a section body, you must supply enough data to specify the five
conditions required to define a conic.
The apex string is also commonly referred to as the common slope control string,
or anchor string.
In situations where the apex string must be computed, you may choose to create
ÏÏÏ
this string along with the body. The resulting apex strings will often illustrate
problems encountered when constructing a section body with separate slope
controls. This is helpful since it is not always easy to tell how two continuously ÏÏÏ
5
changing slope controls will intersect. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-7
Transitions
System Created Apex String
The Create Apex option is a toggle that allows you to specify whether or not to
create the apex string. If you toggle this option ON, the system creates the apex
curve(s) as well as the resulting body. This step is the same for each creation
type in which the system must create the apex string internally. The Create
Apex is not available if you must select an existing apex string.
Start edge string
Start slope control string

System-created
apex curve
Spine string
End slope control string
End edge string
The illustration above shows a section sheet created using the ends-slope-rho
method. The Create Apex option was toggled on. Four existing strings were
selected as control strings, along with an existing string along the Y-axis used
as the spine string. The system created the resulting apex string.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Rho
Rho is a value that controls the fullness" of each section (see the following
illustration).
Apex curve
D1
Smaller rho value rho =
Shoulder D2
D2
Section sheet
D1
Larger rho value
Start edge End edge

string string
You can select the control strings at either end without regard for directional
sense; however, the spine string is direction sensitive. The end you select
becomes the start direction of the spine string and thus determines the
direction of the body.
Constant - The value of rho is constant along the entire body.

Least Tension - The rho value is computed from the input geometry
according to a leastĆtension condition. In most cases this produces an
ellipse. When the angle between the chord and the tangent is the same
at each end of the conic, the result is a circular arc.
General - The rho value is computed using the Law Subfunction. See
Appendix B for more information on the law subfunction.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-9
Transitions
Section Feature Options
ends-apex-shoulder
This option allows you to create a body that starts on the first string selected,
passes through an interior string known as the shoulder string, and ends on the
third string. The slope at each end is defined by a selected apex string.
Apex
Shoulder
Start edge
End edge
ends-slopes-shoulder
passes through an interior string known as the shoulder string, and ends on the
third string. Slope is defined at the start and end by two independent slope
control strings.
Start edge Start slope control
Shoulder End slope control
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
End edge
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
ends-apex-rho
This option allows you to create a body that starts on the first string selected
and ends on the second string. The slope at each end is defined by a selected
apex string.
The rho value is a constant of 0.8, so the sections are hyperbolas.
Existing string used

Start edge string as apex string
Spine string
End edge string
A
Start edge Apex
B
rho = BC
AC
End edge
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-11
Transitions
fillet-rho
This option allows you to create a body that forms a smooth blend between two
strings. The fullness of each section is controlled by the corresponding rho
value.
The rho values range between 0.8 at one end and 0.4 at the other.
First face
Section sheet
String on first face
Spine string
String on second face
Second face
First face
rho = BC
AC
First string Second string

C
B
A
Second face
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
fillet-bridge
This option creates a body with sections that form a bridge between two strings
that lie on two sets of faces. At each end, the body is tangent to the face at the
string. This option allows several methods of controlling the shape of the
resulting feature. You can choose to match tangents or curvatures at the ends of
the fillet-bridge section, or you can choose a spline whose general shape will
be reflected in the feature. If the feature is created with the Match Curvatures
or Match Tangents option, you can change its initial shape until you get the
shape that you want.
The Shape Control Dialog Options allow you to control the following:
Reverse Direction
1st Wall Match
Tangency or Curvature
nd
2 Wall Match
Tangency or Curvature
Control Region
Entire, Start, or End
Bridge Depth
Bridge Skew
Stiffness Control
Auto, Low, or High
Flow Direction on 1st Wall
Not Specified, Perpendicular, Iso Line U, or Iso Line V
Flow Direction on 2nd Wall
Not Specified, Perpendicular, Iso Line U, or Iso Line V
Reset restores defaults if Apply was never used, or last values Applied.
First face
First curve
Second face ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
5
Second curve ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-13
Transitions
fillet-shoulder
This option allows you to create a body that forms a smooth blend between two
strings that lie respectively upon two bodies. The body starts on the first string
selected, is tangent to the first body selected, ends on the second string, is
tangent to the second body, and passes through the shoulder string.
First face
First string
Shoulder string
Second string
Second face
The radius can be zero at either or both ends of the surface, but it cannot be
zero at any other location.
NOTE A face that has a zero radius will not offset.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Activity 5-1: Section Creation Methods
In this activity you will create an intersection curve and section sheets using
ends-apex-shoulder, ends-apex -rho, and fillet-shoulder.
Step 1 Open the part mff_section_1.
Step 2 Create Apex Intersection Line

You will first create an intersection line between the two
extension sheets. This line will be used as the Apex Line for the
creation of a Section feature.
Select the extension of sheet 1 as the First Set.
Select the extension of sheet 2 as the Second Set.
Sheet 1 extension
Sheet 2 extension
Sheet 1
Sheet 2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-15
Transitions
Step 3 Make layer 83 the work layer and layer 82 invisible. The
extensions will no longer be visible.
Step 4 Create a section feature using ends-apex-shoulder.
Set the preference for the U and V Grid Lines to 0 so the

grid will not display.
The ends-apex-shoulder option allows you to create a Section

feature that starts on the first string selected, passes through an
interior string known as the Shoulder string, and ends on the
third string. The slope at each end is defined by a selected Apex
string.
Apex
Shoulder
Start edge
End edge
Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Section.
Choose the ends-apex-shoulder option.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Select the start edge string, the shoulder, the end edge string,
the apex string, and the apex string again as the spine string.
Your part should look similar to the following illustration.
Apex and Spine
Shoulder
Start edge
End edge
Step 5 Make layer 84 the work layer and layer 83 invisible.
Step 6 Create section features using ends-apex-rho (constant).

You will create two Section features using the ends-apex-rho
option. Use a Constant Rho value of 0.5 for a section body on
layer 84, and 0.75 for a section body on layer 85.
Choose the ends-apex-rho option.
Select the start edge string, end edge string, apex string, and
spine string (use the apex string).
Choose Constant as the Rho option
ÏÏÏ
Enter .5 as the Rho value.
ÏÏÏ
5
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-17
Transitions
Your part should now match the following illustration.
Apex and Spine
Start edge
End edge
Make layer 85 the work layer and make layer 84 invisible.
Choose OK to use the ends-apex-rho option again.
spine string (use the apex string).
Choose Constant as the Rho option.
Enter .75 as the Rho value.
Choose OK.
TIP The following steps will guide you to create separate

sheets in different layers, so that you may compare
results. You could also edit any of these sheets to achieve
the other specified shapes.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Notice the difference in the shape. Your part should now match the following
illustration.
Apex and Spine
Start edge
End edge
Step 8 Create a section feature using ends-apex-rho (linear).
Choose OK to use the ends-apex-rho option again.
spine string (using the apex string).
Choose General as the Rho Definition method.
Choose Linear as the Rho Law option.
Use .4 as the Start Value.
Use .6 as the End Value.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-19
Transitions
Your part should now match the following illustration.
NOTE The Rho Start Value is determined by where you select

the spine string.
Apex and Spine
Start edge
End edge
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Step 10 Create a section feature using fillet-shoulder.
Choose the fillet-shoulder option.
Select the objects as prompted by the Cue Line. See the

following illustration.
Spine
Shoulder
Curve String
Curve String
First face
Second face
Your finished part should now match the following illustration.

ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-21
Transitions
Section Feature Options (Part 2)
linear tangent
This option lets you create a section sheet body that is tangent to a face. To
create this feature, select its tangent face, a starting string, and a spine string.
You may be prompted to select a supporting face if the tangent surface does not
intersect the tangent face at all points.
Tangent face
Linear tangent Starting curve
ends-slope-arc
This option allows you to create a body that starts on the first edge string
selected and ends on the second edge string. Slope is determined at the start by
a selected control string. The section of the sheet is a circular arc.
Circular arc
End edge
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
circular tangent
This option lets you create a circular section surface that is tangent to a face. To
create this surface select its tangent face, starting string, and spine string, and
then define the surface radius.
You have two choices for the orientation of the surface to the tangent face: You
can create the surface in either the fillet arc or the cover arc direction. The
following illustration shows the differences between these choices. You may be
prompted to select a supporting face if the tangent surface does not intersect
the tangent face at all points.
Tangent face
Circular tangent surface

(fillet arc)
Circular tangent surface
(cover arc)
two-points-radius
This option creates a body with circular sections of a specified radius. The body
is created in a counterĆclockwise direction from the first selected string to the
second selected string, with respect to the spine direction. The radius must be
at least half the distance between the starting and ending edges of each section.
End edge
Note that the radius must be greater than

½ the chord distance
Radius ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
Start edge ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-23
Transitions
point-radius-angle-arc
This option lets you create a body with circular sections by defining the starting
point on a selected edge, a tangent face, the body's curvature radius, and the
angle that the body spans. The angle may vary from -180 to 0 degrees, or from
0 to 180 degrees, but must not pass through zero. The radius must be greater
than zero. The default position of the surface is in the direction of the face
normal, or you can flip the surface to the opposite side of the tangent face.
Tangent face Start edge
Radius
Face normal
Angle
three-points-arc
This option allows you to create a body by selecting a starting edge string, an
interior string, an end edge string, and a spine string. The section of the sheet is
a circular arc.
Circular arc
Start edge
Note that the circular arc may not
span more than 180 degrees
Interior string
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ End edge
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
circle
Use this option to create full circular section surfaces. To create a circular
section surface, select a guide string, an optional orientation string, and a spine
string. Then supply the radius. See the following illustration.
Circular section surface

Guide Curve
Cross section of
circular section feature
Radius
Orientation of circular section

feature (optional)
ends-slope-cubic
This option creates an SĆshaped body with sections that form a smooth cubic
blend between two selected edge strings. Slope is defined at the start and end
by two independent slope control strings.
Start edge
Start slope control
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
End slope control End edge ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-25
Transitions
ends-slopes-rho
This option allows you to create a body that starts on the first edge string
selected and ends on the second edge string. Slope is defined at the start and
end by two independent slope control strings.
Start slope control A

Start edge
B
rho = BC
AC
End edge
End slope control
four-points-slope
passes through two interior strings, and ends on the fourth string. You also
select a slope control string which defines the starting slope.

First interior
Note that in all following slope
illustrations, the sense of the vector Second interior
between an edge and its slope control
is not important.
This... and This... End edge
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Both give the same results
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
five-points
This option allows you to create a body using five existing strings as control
strings. The body will start on the first string selected, pass through three
selected interior control strings, and end on the fifth string selected. You are
also prompted to select a spine string. The five control strings must all be
different, but the spine string can be a previously selected control string.
Start edge First interior

Second interior
Third interior
End edge
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-27
Transitions
Activity 5-2: Five-points and fillet-shoulder
In this activity you will create section sheets that represent an airfoil shape.
NOTE In all cases, use the dashed yellow line as the spine string.
See the following illustration:
Spine
Step 2 Create a five-points Section feature using the five pink

lines.
NOTE Verify that Create Apex Curve option is toggled off.
Upper section feature
Step 3 Create another five-points Section feature using the five

green lines.
Lower section feature
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Step 4 Create two fillet-shoulder Section features at the leading

and trailing edges.
NOTE Use the white lines as the shoulder string for each
feature.
NOTE Be sure to use the dashed yellow line as the spine string.
Leading and trailing edge

section features added
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-29
Transitions
Activity 5-3: Fillet Section Between Two Sheet Bodies
In this activity you will to create a fillet between the two surfaces.
Step 2 Create a fillet-shoulder section feature between the two

sheet bodies. Use the faces, edges, and curves as shown.
First face
Create a fillet shoulder

in this corner
Spine
Shoulder String on second face
String
Second face
NOTE The resulting section feature is shorter than the other

sheets. This is because the spine is too short.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Use Edit → Curve → Arc Length... to change the length of
ÏÏÏ
the line used as a spine. Make the length 12.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Your results should match the following illustration.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-31
Transitions
Editing the Parameters of a Section Feature
The method you used to create the section feature controls which buttons
appear on the Edit Section Feature dialog. Options displayed depend on the
creation method used to create the feature.
Illustrated below are two possible Edit Section Feature dialogs; one for
ends-slopes-shoulder and one for 5 points.
When you edit a Section Feature body, you can:

Change the tolerance of any section feature.
Replace Control Strings in the body.
Change the Section Type and Tolerances.
Change Rho Data (rho method and value) if
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
you created the body with rho data.
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Activity 5-4: Variable Rho Fillet Section
In this activity you will create a variable rho fillet section sheet, then create a
spline and replace the spine with the new spline.
Step 2 Create a variable fillet-rho section feature between the

two sheet bodies. Use the faces, edges, and curves as
shown.
Use the edge of one of the sheets as shown as the spine. Be
sure to select it at the left end.
Choose General as the Rho Definition method.
Choose Linear as the Rho Law option.
Use .6 as the Start Value.
Use .25 as the End Value.
First face
Create a fillet in
this corner
Spine
ÏÏÏ
Second face
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-33
Transitions
NOTE The resulting feature does not completely extend to the

edges of the parent sheets. This is due to the fact that the
edge that was used as a spine is not perpendicular to the
side edges of the parent sheets.
Resulting feature
is too short
Step 3 Create a spline that is perpendicular to the edges at the

ends of the sheets. This spline will then be used as the
spine for the fillet-rho feature.
Choose Perpendicular to Planes.
Choose Plane Subfunction.
Choose Three Points.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Use the three points on the left side as shown to define the
first plane.
Points to define second plane
First point
Third point
Points to define first plane Second point
First point
Third point
(also Start Point)
Second point
Use the Third point as the Start Point for the spline.
Choose Plane Subfunction again.
Choose Three Points again.
Use the three points on the right side as shown to define the
second plane.
Choose Accept Default Direction.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-35
Transitions
Step 4 Edit the fillet-rho feature and replace the old spine with
the newly created spline.
Select the fillet-rho section feature.
Choose Replace Spine String.
Select the newly created spline as the new spine. Be sure to

select it on the left end since the spine controls the starting
and ending points for the variable rho.
Choose OK until the part updates. Your part should now

match the following illustration.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Section Feature Options (Part 4)
ends-apex-hilite
This option allows you to create a body with sections that start on the first
string selected and end on the second string. The shape of the new body will be
tangent to a body that the system defines from two selected highlight strings.
The slope at each end is defined by a selected apex string.
Start edge Apex
Hilite End
Hilite Start
End edge
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-37
Transitions
ends-slopes-hilite
This option allows you to create a body with sections that start on the first edge
string selected and end on the second edge string. Slope is defined at the start
and end by two independent slope control strings. The shape of the new body
will be tangent to a body that the system defines from two selected highlight
strings.
Start slope control
Start edge
Hilite end
Hilite start
End edge
End slope control
fillet-hilite
This option allows you to create a body with sections that form a smooth blend
between two strings which lie respectively upon two bodies. The shape of the
new body will be tangent to a body that the system defines from two selected
highlight strings.
First face
String on
first face
Second face
Hilite start
Hilite end
ÏÏÏ
String on
second face
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Activity 5-5: Hilite Methods
Design criteria: A body is needed which is tangent to the two yellow sheets, but
it must clear the green pipe by .5 inches.
Step 2 Shade the model to see all bodies.
Step 3 Create a fillet-hilite section feature using the faces,

edges, and curves as shown.
NOTE Be sure to select all 5 entities in each hilite string.
First face
Hilite start
Hilite end
Spine string
Second face
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-39
Transitions
Your finished part should now match the following illustration.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Bridge
You can use Bridge to create a BĆsurface sheet body that joins two trimmed or
untrimmed faces. You can specify either tangent or curvature continuity
between the bridge and defining faces. Optional side faces or strings (up to two,
in any combination) can be used to control the shape of the bridge sheet body.
Procedure
The general procedure to create

a bridge surface is:
Choose the continuity type
(tangent or curvature).
Select the primary faces.
(Optional): Select one or two
side faces and/or side strings
to control the sides of the
bridge surface.
Choose Apply.
(Optional): If you have not
selected side faces or side
strings, use the Drag option
to control the shape of the
bridge surface.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-41
Transitions
Selection of Primary and Side Faces

You should select each face near the edge along which you wish the new Bridge
to be created, and near the end of the edge that determines the correct
direction of the Bridge face. The order of selection is not important. The system
highlights the face and displays an arrowhead along the selected edge to
indicate the direction of the Bridge face along that edge.
The Selection Steps on the Bridge dialog are Primary Faces, Side Faces, First
Side String, and Second Side String.
You use the Primary Faces option to select two primary faces. This is a
required step, and the default option when you first choose the Bridge icon.
Bridge
Two Primary Faces
Side Faces lets you select one or two side faces.
Before After
Primary Faces
Bridge
Side Face
Side Face
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ First Side String and Second Side String let you select curves and
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
edges.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Before After
Two Primary Faces
Bridge
Side String
Continuity Type
The Continuity Type specifies tangent or curvature continuity between the

selected faces and the bridge face.
Before
Iso View
Two Primary Faces
Front View
After
Using Tangent Continuity
Using Curvature Continuity
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-43
Transitions
Using Bridge with a Trimmed Face
If you are extending from the trimmed edge of the face and you want side
control, you must specify two side faces or strings.
Drag and Reset
If you have not selected faces or strings to control the sides of the bridge
feature, you can use the Drag option to dynamically edit its shape.
When you choose the Drag button and press MB1 near one of the feature's
edges, a series of cone head vectors appears on that edge. Then you can either
hold MB1 down and drag the cursor, or just click MB1, to change the shape of
the body.
NOTE The Drag option is only available on Bridge features created

without side faces.
Editing the Parameters of a Bridge Feature
To edit a Bridge feature, use Edit → Feature → Parameters or the Model

Navigator.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Activity 5-6: Tangent Continuous Bridge - 1 Side Surface
In this activity you will create a tangent continuous Bridge using the near
surface as a guide.
Step 1 Open the part mff_bridge_3.
Step 2 Create a Tangent continuous Bridge between the two

Primary faces and control the shape with the one Side
Face as shown.
Primary Face
Before
Side Face
Primary Face
After
Step 3 Analyze the deviation.

ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-45
Transitions
Activity 5-7: Create Bottle Transition
In this activity you will create different Bridge features to bridge the gap
between the two faces of the bottle. You will also experiment with editing of
both the Bridge feature and the shape control entities.
Step 1 Open the part mff_bridge_4.
Step 2 Make layer 82 the work layer and make layer 51 invisible.
Step 3 Create a Curvature continuous Bridge without side

control.
Before
After
Step 4 Check all Edge to Face deviations.
Step 5 Optionally, experiment with the Drag option.
TIP If you choose the Drag button and press MB1 near one of
the feature's edges, a series of cone head vectors appears
on that edge.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ You can drag, or just click, to change the shape of the
5
ÏÏÏ
body.
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Step 6 After you are finished, Delete the Bridge feature.
Step 7 Make layer 51 selectable.
Step 8 Try to create a Curvature continuous Bridge using the two

Bridge Curves as Side strings.
NOTE You will get a message stating that Constraint surface

not consistent with curve mesh."
Why do you think the surface creation failed?
Step 9 Edit the two Bridge Curves and change the Continuity
Method to Curvature.
Step 10 Again try to create a Curvature continuous Bridge using

the two Bridge Curves as Side strings.
Why do you think this method worked when the first method
failed?
Step 11 Edit the Bridge Curves again and use the Shape Control
functionality to change their shapes.
Set Preferences Modeling, Dynamic Update

Continuous and Immediate Children All.
Notice how the Bridge feature updates to match the new shape
of the Bridge Curves.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-47
Transitions
Soft Blend
Soft Blends are a type of Face Blend.
Soft Blends have non-circular cross-sections that are tangent continuous or

curvature continuous to two face sets.
The function and options are very similar to the Face Blend feature with the
following exceptions:
The Soft Blend requires a tangency

string on both faces. The string
may include curves or edges but
may not be a mix of both.
Soft Blends allow the user to
control the smoothness of the
transition by either matching
tangency or matching curvature.
Match Curvature allows
cross-sectional control by Rho or
Skew values.
Soft Blends require a Spine String.
Procedure for Creating Soft Blends:
Select the first face set and reverse

the normal, if necessary.
Select the second face set and
reverse the normal, if necessary.
Select the first tangency string.
Select the second tangency string.
Select the Attachment Method.
Choose Match Tangents or Match
Curvature.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Select the Spine String.
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Activity 5-8: Blend Strut to Hull and Pickup
In this activity you will create Soft Blends that match the curvature of their
adjacent faces.
Step 1 Open the part mff_soft_blend_1.
Hull
À
Spine
Strut
Pickup
Step 2 Create a curvature continuous Soft Blend between the

hull and the strut.
Choose Insert → Feature Operation → Soft Blend...
Select the face on the underneath side of the hull for the
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ

First Set of faces. À
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-49
Transitions
Choose Reverse Normal to specify that the center of the

blend is outside the part.
Select the Second Set icon.
Hull
Â ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Ä
Intersection
curve 1
Intersection Ã Spine
curve 2
Strut
Pickup
Select the face of the strut as the Second Set of faces. Á
Choose Reverse Normal.
Select the First Tangency Curve icon.
Select the green spline that lies on the underneath hull

surface as the First Tangency Curve. Â
Select the Second Tangency Curve icon.
Select the green spline that lies on the strut face as the
Second Tangency Curve. Ã
Set Smoothness to Match Curvature.

ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
5 Choose Define Spine String and select the orange circle as
ÏÏÏ

the spine string. Ä
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Set Rho to .5 Constant.
Set Skew to .5 Constant.
Choose Apply.
Soft Blend
NOTE Notice that the hull and the strut are now part of the
same solid body. This occurred since the Attachment
Method was set to Trim & Attach All.
Step 3 Make all layers invisible, then make 2, 3, 45, 53, and 54
Selectable. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-51
Transitions
Step 4 Create a Soft Blend between the strut and the pickup.
Use the green intersection spline as the First Tangency

Curve.
Use the green projected spline as the Second Tangency

Curve
Use the orange circle as the spine.
Use the same settings as on the first blend.
Hull
Strut
Intersection curve
Spine
Projected curve
Pickup
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Soft Blend
Suppose that, due to various design iterations and analysis, the shape generated
by the defaults is not acceptable. You will now perform various edits to change
the blend to a more streamlined, aerodynamic shape.
Step 5 Edit the underneath hull face Offset and change the value
from 3 to 2.5. The feature is OFFSET(14).
Notice how the Soft Blend updates to match the new tangency
string intersection curve.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-53
Transitions
Step 6 Edit both Soft Blends, between the hull and the strut and
between the strut and the pickup.
Change Rho from .5 Constant to Law Controlled, Values

along Spine-Linear.
Use Point Constructor to apply the values shown in the

following illustration to the 4 quadrant points of the spine
circle.
.4 Rho at this
quadrant point
.75 Rho at this
quadrant point
.6 Rho at these two

quadrant points
.6 Rho at these two

quadrant points .4 Rho at this
quadrant point
.75 Rho at this

quadrant point
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Step 7 If you wish, interrogate the model to see how it is

constructed and then try some other edits.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-55
Transitions
Activity 5-9: Blend Airfoil Cavity
In this activity you will create a spine and then create a soft blend at the trailing
edge of the cavity.
Step 1 Open the part mff_soft_blend_2.
Step 2 Create a spline to be used as a spine for a soft blend.
Choose Perpendicular to Planes.
Choose Plane Subfunction.
Choose Three Points.
Use the three points at the bottom as shown to define the

first plane.
Points to define second plane
First point
Second point
Third point
Third point
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ First point
(also Start Point)
Second point
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Points to define first plane
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Use the Third point as the Start Point for the spline.
Choose Plane Subfunction again.
Choose Three Points again.
Use the three points at the top as shown to define the second
plane.
Choose Accept Default Direction.
Step 3 Create a Soft Blend using the two intersection curves as

the tangency strings and the spline you just created as the
spine.
Choose Insert → Feature Operation → Soft Blend.
Select the First Set face as shown. If necessary, reverse the

normal so that the vector is pointing toward the center of the
cavity.
Select the Second Set face as shown. If necessary, reverse the

normal so that the vector is pointing toward the center of the
cavity.
First Set face

(inside face of cavity)
Second Set face

(inside face of cavity)
Second Tangency Curve
Spine
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
First Tangency Curve
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-57
Transitions
Select the First Tangency Curve as shown.
Select the Second Tangency Curve as shown.
Select the Spine as shown.
Set the Smoothness to Match Curvature.
Set the Attachment Method to Trim and Attach All.
Set the Rho to .32 Constant.
Set the Skew to .5 Constant.
Choose Apply to create the blend.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
N-Sided Surface
N-Sided Surface allows you to build a surface with any number of curves that
form a simple closed loop. You may assign continuity with outside faces. Shape
Control options let you move the center point and change sharpness at the
center point, while maintaining continuity constraints.
You can use this feature to:

Remove holes in surfaces that do not lend themselves to curve mesh.
Fill the interior of a surface without removing trim.
Replace localized problem regions in an existing surface.
Build buttons, insets or dimples with a fixed or projected profile on a
given surface.
Build a smooth sheet between surfaces without having to untrim or
change edges of outside surfaces.
Trimmed Single Sheet Multiple Triangular Patches
Any
Curve
Edge
Face
Sketch
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-59
Transitions
Procedures
Trimmed Single Sheet

Select profile curves or edges. The profile must form a simple closed
loop. The function works best on round, smooth, almost 2D loops.
Optionally, select faces for the tangency constraint.
Optionally, select a spine curve or
vector direction for the U/V
orientation of the N-sided sheet.
If you do not specify the tangency
constraint, the Shape Control dialog
will appear. You can further adjust À
the shape of the new sheet.
Multiple Triangular Patches

Á
Select profile curves or edges. The
profile must form a simple closed
loop.
Optionally, select faces for tangency
or curvature constraints. Â
The Shape Control dialog will
appear.
Shape Control Ã
Match Continuity: G0, touching; G1, tangent;

G2, curvature. À
Change the center point Position or Tilt. Á, Ä

Â, Ã
Make the shape around the center sharper or

flatter. Ä Å
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Change the U/V flow direction of triangular
faces from the boundary: Perpendicular, Iso
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
U/V Lines, Adjacent Edges. Å
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Activity 5-10: N-Sided as Sheet Repair Tool
In this activity, you will use N-Sided Surface to repair a poorly defined area on
a sheet body.
Step 1 Open the part mff_n-sided_1.
Please notice that one face of the sheet body has a defect in the
vicinity of a green circle.
The circle was constructed as the first step of a repair process.
You will complete the repair.
Step 2 Project the circle on to the adjacent face.

Choose Insert Curve Operation Project...
Select the green circle.
Choose Along Vector as the Direction Method.
Choose ZC, and OK in the Vector Constructor.
Choose the Faces/Planes icon.
Select the face adjacent to the arc, and OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-61
Transitions
Make layer 41 Invisible when the projection is complete.
Step 3 Create an N-sided sheet.

Choose Insert Free Form Feature N-Sided Surface...
If necessary, choose Trimmed Single Sheet.
Select the projected curve as a Boundary Curve.
Choose Boundary Faces.
Select the face of the sheet body upon which you projected
the arc.
Verify that Trim to Boundary is toggled ON.
Choose OK until the sheet is created.
Step 4 Use Patch Body to apply the new sheet to the sheet body.
Choose Insert Feature Operation Patch...
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Toggle Create Hole Patch and Confirm Upon Apply to ON.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Á
À
Select the large sheet body as Target Body . . . À
Select the new N-Sided Surface as the Tool Sheet . . . Á
It is often difficult to determine which direction is appropriate

for the removal direction required by Patch. The N-sided sheet
meets the criteria for a hole patch:
The edges lie completely on the surface being patched.
The boundary of the tool sheet defines a hole.
The system can fill the hole with the new sheet.
Create Hole Patch deactivates the Reverse Removal Direction
button.
Choose Apply.
If the patch looks good, choose OK in the Confirm Upon

Apply dialog.
Step 5 Shade the model to examine the patch.

The patch looks reasonably good shaded. In fact, it is perfectly
acceptable for a great many applications.
For a styling application where reflections are highly critical, it
would be necessary to rebuild the sheet.
You will learn about face analysis methods in the next lesson.
Step 6 Close all parts. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-63
Transitions
Activity 5-11: N-Sided Shape Control
In this activity you will use N-Sided Surface to create a tip for a hook. This
demonstrates that the Shape Control capability of N-sided is an effective tool
for creating a nicely contoured face where no contour existed previously.
Step 1 Open the part mff_n-sided_2.
Step 2 Create a tip for the hook.
Choose Insert Free Form Feature N-Sided Surface...
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
À
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Multiple Triangular Patches. À
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Zoom in on and select the closed loop of edges shown. Á
Choose Boundary Faces. Â
Select the outer contoured face of the hook. Ã
Make certain Merge Faces if Possible is ON. Ä
Choose Apply.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-65
Transitions
A tentative sheet is created, and the Shape Control dialog

appears.
À
Set Match Continuity to
G1. À
Á
Set Center Control to
Position. Á
Set Flow Direction on

Outside Wall to
Iso U/V Line.
Â - near bottom
Ã
Move the Y slider to
approximately 54.
(53 to 55) Ã
Ä Move the Z slider to

approximately 70.
(69 to 71) Ä
Å Choose OK. Å
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Transitions
Cancel from the N-Sided Surface dialog.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
5-67
Transitions
SUMMARY Transition functions create a blend" from one

face or set of faces to another.
We focused on transitions that meet our

non-analytical" criterion for Free Form
Features.
When planning a transition it is important to

remember to keep the model as simple as
possible. If an edge blend will do, use it. Add
more complex transitions as necessary to meet
design intent.
In this lesson you:

Learned to identify the input required for
various section sheets, and created several
types of Section features.
Used Bridge Surfaces with various shape and
continuity controls.
Learned that Soft Blends may be used where
curvature continuity is a design criterion.
Learned when and how to use N-Sided
Surface.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
Face Analysis ÏÏÏ

Lesson 6
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
PURPOSE In this lesson you will learn to use face analysis tools
to assess surface quality.
Use a combination of methods to verify draft.

Perform Radius and Slope Analysis.
Use diagnostic tools Examine Geometry and
Information B-Surface.
Activity Page
6-1 Analyzing Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-2 Face Analysis - Radius and Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6-3 Face Analysis - Surface Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6-4 Examine Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-1
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ Face Analysis

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Under Analysis → Face, Radius, Reflection, Slope, and Distance allow you to
select faces for the display of temporary color analysis. These displays can be
useful for detecting inflections or variations in face curvature as well as for
obtaining approximate numerical data such as minimum radius, slope relative to
a vector, or distance from a plane.
Radius allows you to check the curvature properties of the faces.
Reflection allows you to map lines or an image onto the faces to check the
reflective characteristics of the faces.
Slope allows you to analyze the angles of the face relative to a specified vector.
Distance allows you to analyze the distance of the face from a specified plane.
Display Type (for Radius, Slope, and Distance)
This option allows you to select the type of display to use.
Fringe displays the surface using a shaded, color-coded plot.
26.421
45.663
168.07
-100.000
-38.536
-23.867
-17.286
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
Hedgehog displays colorĆcoded spines on face grid points.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
26.421
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
45.663
168.07
-100.000
-38.536
-23.867
-17.286
The spines shown are normal to the surface.

Use the Spike Length field to specify the length of the
color-coded spines, using the current Unigraphics units of
measure (e.g., inches).
ContourĂLines displays curves of constant value of the selected analysis
variable.
26.421
45.663
168.07
-100.000
-38.536
-23.867
-17.286
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-3
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ NOTE After completing a face analysis task the display mode
ÏÏÏ can be changed by using MB3 → Display Mode.
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ Resolution
The Resolution option lets you set the tolerance for the face analysis display,
enabling you to adjust the quality and performance of the face analysis display.
You can choose from the following options: Coarse, Standard, Fine, Extra Fine,
Ultra Fine, and Customize.
NOTE For more information on Resolution, please see the

Unigraphics Online Documentation.
Face Selection
Once you have selected faces for analysis, they remain selected, even after you
exit from the analysis dialog.
If necessary, use the Re-highlight Faces button to identify which faces are
selected.
You can use the Reverse Normal option to reverse the normal vectors of any
face. This option reverses the normal for analysis purposes only. It should not
be confused with the Reverse Normal feature (Edit → Free Form Feature).
Usage Notes for Face Analysis
Face analysis results can be used qualitatively and quantitatively.
When making qualitative decisions, designers should decide which

analysis type best suits their purpose for checking the aesthetic
characteristics of the faces.
For quantitative analysis, types such as Minimum radius, Slope, or
Distance can be used to determine the physical characteristics of the
faces.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
Radius
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Radii on selected faces are displayed with color coding. ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Gaussian
Maximum
Minimum
Mean
Normal
Sectional
U
V
Fringe
Hedgehog
Contour Lines
Coarse
Standard
Fine
Extra Fine
Ultra Fine
Customize...
Show Facet
Edges
Re–highlight
Faces
Reverse Face
Normals
Specify Interior
Position
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-5
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ Radius Type

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Gaussian radius for each checkpoint is indicated by colorĆcoded output
according to the Gaussian Radius of curvature for the face at that point.
Maximum and Minimum radius analyzes the maximum and minimum radius of
curvature at each point on the face.
Mean radius analyzes the average of the maximum and minimum curvature at
each point on the face.
Normal radius displays the radius based on a normal section plane, defined by
the surface normal and the reference vector at each analysis point. If the vector
is parallel to the surface normal, the normal curvature at that point is set to 0.
Sectional radius displays the radius based on a section plane parallel to the
reference plane. You can select a plane, datum plane, or solid face (surface type
is plane) as the reference.
U radius is the radius in the U direction.
V radius is the radius in the V direction.
Sectioning Plane
Consider a particular point P on a face. Let N be the face normal vector at P.

Any plane containing the point P and the vector N will intersect the face in
some curve through P. This plane is called the sectioning plane." As the
sectioning plane rotates about N, a family of intersection curves will be
produced as shown below. These curves can be used to analyze the curvature of
the face at the point P. This is done internally and no actual curves are output.
N
Sectioning
Plane
Intersection
Curves
Point P
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
Reflection
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
This method allows you to analyze the reflective characteristics of faces.
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
You may reflect Line Images À, Scene Images Á, or a User Specified Tiff
Image Â.
À Â
Á
Ã
Å
Ä
When Line Images is active, you have three further choices: Black Lines Ã,
Black and White Lines Ä, and Colored Lines Å.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-7
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
There are currently twelve Scene Images:
Simulated Horizon Photo Horizon Spherical Room Spherical Light

Tubes Room
Daytime Horizon Magenta Sunset Spherical Horizon Cylindrical Room
Monochrome Smooth Gray Sharp Gray Scale Spherical Tubes
Horizon Scale
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
À ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Á
Â
Ä Ã
Æ
Å
Ç
È
Other options on the dialog include:
À Face Reflectivity slide control

Á Movement Direction Icons: Horizontal, Vertical, Rotate
Â Move Image slide control.
Movement corresponds to the selected movement direction icon.
Ã Image Size: Honor Image Size, Reduce Scale
Ä Display Resolution:
Coarse, Standard, Fine, Extra Fine, Ultra Fine, Customize...
Å Show Facet Edges.
Æ Re-highlight Faces
Ç Specify Interior Position
È Reverse Face Normals
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-9
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ Slope
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Slope allows you to analyze the angle of faces relative to a specified vector.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
Distance
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Distance allows you to analyze the distance between faces and a specified
plane. You must specify a plane first, and then this dialog will appear:
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-11
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ Draft
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Draft is a slope property of faces. Faces with draft have at least a small positive
angle with respect to a draw direction." Cast, molded, and many other
products require draft to permit easy and damage free removal of a tool, or the
product itself, from a forming medium such as a metal or sand mold.
Á
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ À ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÂÎÎÎÎÎ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
À No Draft, product or mold may sustain damage
Á Positive Draft, unmolding proceeds well
Â Negative Draft, unmolding is impossible
Analyzing Draft
There are two primary methods, isocline curves and slope analysis, that you may
use alone or together to check draft on faces of a body.
These methods will reveal the natural parting contours of the part. Frequently,
natural contours will not match a parting plane or sheet that you have decided
upon for tooling reasons. Draft analysis will reveal the extent of discrepancies.
It is up to you, the tooling designer, to find an acceptable balance between
model changes and complexity of tooling.
If you are fortunate enough to own MoldWizard, Shape Studio Analysis, or the
Manufacturing module, you have access to additional tools.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
Draft Analysis by Isoclines

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
To analyze draft by isoclines, create a Family of Isocline curves: ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Use the draw direction as the Isocline direction.
If the draw direction may change, associate it to a datum, face, or
edge.
Include the zero degree Isocline by setting three values to the
minimum acceptable draft:
Start Angle
End Angle
Step
TIP To find only the natural parting, create a Single Isocline at Angle 0.0.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-13
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ Draft Analysis by Face Slope

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Face Analysis is a very powerful tool to discover areas of negative draft. This is
especially true when you use isocline curves to refine the analysis in locations
where fringe shading indicates a possible problem.
Enable Maintain Fixed

Data Range . . À
Set the range values to À
± the minimum
acceptable draft . Á
Set the Middle value to Á Á
zero . Â
Use the draw direction
as the Reference Â
Vector . . . . Ã
Display resolution
should be as fine as
you can tolerate for Ã
display generation time . .
Ä
Best results usually
occur with Color Ä
Legend Control set to
Sharp Å
Using 7 colors give the
finest approximation of
local slope . . . Æ Å
Æ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
Activity 6-1: Analyzing Draft ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
In this activity you will use Slope Analysis and isocline curves to:
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Determine approximate draft exists on faces.
Find face regions that do not have minimum draft.
Examine shading and isocline contours near a surface defect.
Determine the natural parting for a roughly tubular cast part.
Compare natural partings to an arbitrary parting sheet.
Step 1 Open the part mff_draft_analysis.
The first of three objects to analyze is illustrated.
Step 2 Perform slope analysis on the sheet body.

Choose Analysis Face Slope...
À
Á
Verify that Display Type is Fringe, and Maintain Fixed Data

Range is OFF.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-15
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Â
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ Choose Reference Vector.
Specify ZC+ as the direction reference.
Drag a rectangle to select all faces in the sheet body.
Specify Extra Fine as the Display Resolution.
Choose Reset Data Range.
Å Æ
Set Blend as the Color Legend Control.
Accept 7 as the Number of Colors.
Choose Apply.
Shading will reveal an approximate range of values that the side

walls of part might have. The range of values is at this stage
might be too large to be useful.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
È É
Toggle Maintain Fixed Data Range to ON.

Enter Values:
Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . -5.0 . È
Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 . É
The system will calculate the middle value.

Choose Apply.
Decrease the maximum by ones until only one color is left.
After all differences in color disappear, increase the

maximum by one and read the range of values for the color
that now reappears.
It should become apparent that the part has more than 5°
minimum draft, but less than 6°.
Change Color Legend Control to Sharp.
Set the range between +5.0 and +6.0 degrees, and Apply.
It should now be possible to read the minimum draft for local

areas in decimal fractions of 5°. Very few applications require
more accuracy than this, but if necessary, you could further
narrow the analysis range.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-17
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ Step 3 Examine a similar part that has defects.

ÏÏÏ The Face Analysis - Slope dialog should still be open.
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ Change Color Legend Control to Blend.
Make layer 81 Invisible, and layer 82 Selectable.
Drag a rectangle to select all of the faces, and Apply.

Examine the part.
Try the settings shown below:
A small indentation can be seen from a Front orientation. The

color pattern is typical of dents. The lower part of a dent will
have colors usually seen on higher or top faces. The upper part
of a dent will have colors seen where draft is very small, or
possibly negative.
An area of negative draft can be seen from a Back orientation.

As you narrow the range of displayed draft values, you would
watch for, and take corrective action on any area with less than
the minimum draft recommended by your tooling engineer. You
would almost certainly reject a part with negative draft; a
possible exception would be with a rubbery product material of
very high flexibility.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
Step 4 Examine a roughly tubular part.

ÏÏÏ
The Face Analysis - Slope dialog should still be open. ÏÏÏ
If necessary, change Color Legend Control to Blend.
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Make layer 82 Invisible, and layer 2 Selectable.
Orient the view to Trimetric.
Drag a rectangle to select all of the faces, and Apply.

This part has the full range of slope values, from -90 to 90.
Suppose the tooling engineer requests minimum draft of 5°.
Since slope values pass through zero, the minimum draft is
currently zero. It is of great interest to learn exactly where the
zero value is located, and in what regions draft is less than 5°.
Change the settings as shown above, and Apply.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-19
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
A narrow band of color appears denoting where the faces have

between -5° and +5° draft.
It will be useful to create a permanent record of this range, that
may be viewed in wire frame mode.
Choose Application Modeling.
Choose Insert Curve Operation Extract...
Choose Isocline Curves.
In the Vector Constructor, choose ZC, and OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
The Isocline Angles(s) dialog will appear:

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Choose Family . . À
Type:
Start Angle . . . . . . . . . . -5
End Angle . . . . . . . . . . 5
Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Choose OK.
Select all three rounded faces, and OK.

Curves that appear will approximately follow the color bands.
Make layer 3 Selectable.
Change the Display Mode to Partially Shaded.

The sheet is a proposed parting location.
Use rotation to compare the Isocline Curves to the position
of the sheet.
Do you anticipate molding problems if the proposed parting is
used?
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-21
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ Activity 6-2: Face Analysis - Radius and Slope

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Step 1 Open mff_analyze_radius_1.
Top face
ZC
YC
XC
Isocline curves
Step 2 Use a Sectional radius analysis to check the radii of the

face relative to the ZC-XC plane.
Choose Analysis → Face → Radius...
Set the Radius Type to Sectional.
Choose the Reference Plane button.
Choose the Principal Plane button.
Choose ZC-XC Plane.
Set the Display Resolution to Extra Fine.
Select the top, curved face.
Choose Apply and then compare the radius values indicated

by the color coding with the circles that were used to create
the feature.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
Step 3 Use a V radius analysis to check the radii of the face

ÏÏÏ
perpendicular to the section strings.
ÏÏÏ
Choose Analysis → Face → Radius. ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Set the Radius Type to V.
NOTE Notice that you do not need to select the face. It is still
selected from the previous analysis.
Choose Apply.
Notice the color where the radius values switch from negative to
positive.
Step 4 Use a Slope analysis to determine the areas on the face

which are less than 10 degrees relative to the ZC axis.
Choose Analysis → Face → Slope.
Choose the ZC Axis icon.
Choose OK.
Verify that the Maintain À

Fixed Data Range
option is ON. À
Slide the Range Scale

Factor slider all the way
to the left. Á Â
Enter 10 in the Middle
text field and press Á
Enter. Â
Areas of the face which have slope less than 10 degrees are one
color, and those at greater than 10 degrees are a different color.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-23
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ Activity 6-3: Face Analysis - Surface Quality

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Step 1 Open mff_analyze_radius_2.
Step 2 Use a Normal Radius analysis to compare the faces of the

two halves.
Two solids were created from a smoothed and an unsmoothed
spline.
Select Analysis → Face → Radius, and change the settings as

shown on the next page.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Choose Reference Vector and select YC Axis, then OK.
Select the curved face of each solid.
Choose Apply.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-25
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ Change the Middle of the Data Range to -100, and press
ÏÏÏ Enter.
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Slide the Range Scale Factor control all the way to the left.
Which is the smoothed solid? (The lower half.)

Can you detect irregularities that cannot be seen in
reflection analysis?
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
Deviation ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Deviation analysis creates exact mathematical output, such as a listing of
distance and angle variations between selected objects.
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Edge to Face
Analysis → Deviation allows you to perform Edge to Face design checks.
This option allows you to check the correlation of boundaries between two
adjacent or tangent faces, or the boundary of one face to the interior of
another.
If you want to a full listing, choose All Deviations.
The checkpoints are visible in all views.
The Deviation Checking Error Summary listing displays the number of points
checked, distance tolerance, number over dist. tolerance, average distance
error, maximum distance error, angle tolerance (degrees), number over angle
tolerance, average angle error, and maximum angle error.
Surface 1 Edge to surface boundary
+ Surface 2
+ + ++
+
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-27
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ Curve to Face

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Analysis → Deviation allows you to perform Curve to Face design checks.
This option allows you to verify by Point/Slope Continuity check that a curve,
which appears to be located on a face, is actually on the face. After selecting
the curve and face, you must specify the number of check points and tolerances
you want for distance and angle error checking.
If you want to enable or disable a full listing, choose the Full Listing toggle. For
more information, please refer to Help → Documentation.
+
++ +
+
+
+
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
Diagnostic Tools ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
Unigraphics provides tools to help you to track down the cause when a surface
will not hollow, offset, or provide success when used as input to a modeling
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
operation.
Information B-Surface
Information → B-Surface displays the degrees, number of patches, and the

control polygons and patch boundaries of B-surfaces.
Patch boundaries are shown with different fonts to indicate the levels of
continuity:
solid for C2
dashed for C1
dotted for C0
Examine Geometry
Examine Geometry analyzes a solid body, face, or edge for conditions of

interest. These conditions can range from the detection of corrupt data
structures to warnings concerning the geometric form of faces and edges. The
system highlights these conditions. You must correct them yourself.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-29
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ Objects Checks

ÏÏÏ Tiny Searches for all tiny bodies, faces, edges, or curves in the
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ Misaligned
selected bodies or geometry.
Checks all of the selected geometry that is close to being
orthogonal with respect to the WCS, but is not exactly
aligned with it.
Bodies Checks
Data Structures Checks each selected body for data structure problems,
such as corruption.
Consistency Checks each selected body for inconsistencies.
Face-Face Checks each selected body for face-to-face
Intersections intersections, and that all faces of the selected body meet
each other at their edges and nowhere else.
Sheet Boundaries Searches for all of the boundaries (or gaps) in the selected
bodies.
Faces Checks
Smoothness Checks the b-surfaces (of faces that have them) to make
sure the surfaces are smooth along their patch boundaries.
Self-intersection Checks for faces that self-intersect.
Spikes/Cuts Searches the selected faces for possible spikes or cuts.
Edges Checks
Smoothness Searches for all edges whose adjoining faces do not join
smoothly.
Tolerances Checks the tolerance of all the selected edges against the
distance tolerance.
Once you have selected geometry, the system runs the chosen tests. When
testing is complete, results are displayed in the Information window.
Along with the Information window, the Highlight Results dialog also displays:
The Highlight Results dialog lets you highlight objects found to have possible
problems in the graphics window. Only those tests that you chose and which
detected problems are enabled on this dialog.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
Activity 6-4: Examine Geometry ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Step 1 Open the part mff_examine_geom and start the Modeling
application.
The part was saved with Random Color Display enabled.
Step 2 Use Examine Geometry to detect problems, if any.
Choose Analysis Examine Geometry...
Choose Set All Checks.
Choose OK.
In the Class Selection dialog choose Select All.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-31
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ The body and all of its faces and edges are selected.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
Data will scroll in the Information window.

After a moment, the Highlight Results dialog will appear:
Examine the information pertaining to Consistency and Self

Intersection.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
...
Consistency
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Self-intersecting geometry detected
Please replace incorrect geometry
-------------------------------------------------------
...
-------------------------------------------------------
Face Self-intersection
Self-intersecting geometry detected

Please replace incorrect geometry
...
Some tests were not run. The system optimizes performance by

skipping tests which would only find errors on geometry that
was already reported to have problems.
Toggle ON all enabled options in Highlight Results:
Choose OK.
Examine the display, and then Refresh.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-33
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ Toggle Smoothness OFF and again choose OK.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Smoothness will be enabled for any location where an edge at a
6 vertex has a greater angle than the modeling tolerance. Thus the
ÏÏÏ symbol displayed at certain blend vertices reflects that the
adjacent edge meets the vertex at 90°.
There is no tangency problem with the blend edges; however, if
you were not certain of this, you would perform a deviation
check!
The display now highlights only a single face with Consistency
and Self Intersection problems:
Choose Cancel.
The part is constructed with analytic faces.
In order to briefly demonstrate the usage of Information
B-Surface, we extracted an associative copy of the problem
face as a general b-surface.
Make layer 81 the Work Layer, and layer 1 Invisible.
Fit the view.
Step 3 Get information about a B-surface.

Choose Information B-Surface...
EDS Unigraphics NX
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK to accept the default options.
The pole structure and continuity of the patches are graphically

displayed.
Often, the pole structure will immediately reveal a problem. In
this case, the structure may be too complex to glean useful data.
Eight dashed lines indicate a series of nine C1 patches along the
U direction.
Typically of faces extracted as a b-surface, the sheet body is an
approximation. It did not inherit the consistency problems of its
parent.
How would you verify the above statement?
Make layer 1 the Work Layer, and layer 81 Invisible.
Step 4 Alter the model to correct the face problems.
Edit Parameters for BLEND(5).
Change the radius to 0.25 and update the model.
Once again use Examine Geometry on the body.
Now, only Smoothness will be enabled.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
6-35
Face Analysis
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
6
ÏÏÏ SUMMARY Seldom is any one method of analysis suitable
to find all problems. You have practiced a
variety of methods.
During this class, and your later work, please
continue to evaluate sheets by various means.
Only with practice will you develop a feel" for
choosing the best" analysis options for given
data and engineering requirements.
In this lesson you:

Used Analysis → Face → Slope and Isocline
curves to analyze draft on molded and cast
parts. You found a minimum draft angle,
discovered draft defects, and compared the
natural parting of a part to a proposed
parting sheet.
Performed Radius Analysis to interpret face
curvature.
Used Examine Geometry to isolate problem
faces and gain insight into the nature of
defects.
Used Information → B-Surface to quickly
examine pole structure and continuity.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Working with Sheets

Lesson 7
PURPOSE In this lesson, you will use functions that depend on

existing sheets.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to: ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Create Extension sheets. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Use Enlarge to create larger or smaller associative
copies of a sheet.
Offset Sheets.
Sew sheets or solids together.
Trim Sheets.
Match Edges
Construct Sheets with Draft
Construct smoothly contiguous parting strings

Activity Page
7-1 Creating Tangential Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-2 Angled Extension for Fuselage Recess . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-3 Law Extension Associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-4 Enlarge Sheet - Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7-5 Enlarge Sheet - Natural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7-6 Fuselage Recess Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7-7 Variable Offset Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7-8 Sew Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7-9 Trim Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7-10 Change Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7-11 Force a Spline to a Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7-12 Ruled and Extension Draft Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
7-13 Match Partings with Section - Linear . . . . . . . . . 7-81
7-14 Parting Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-1
Working with Sheets
Extensions
This option allows you to create extension sheets from an existing sheet or face.
Trimmed edges will not allow an Extension sheet to be made. The system
approximates extensions to within a distance tolerance under Preferences "
Modeling.
There are four types of extension sheets:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Tangential
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ

Normal
Angled
Circular
Normal
extension
Tangential
extensions
Angled
extension Law Controlled
extension
Circular extension
A fifth type of extension, Law Extension, has its own toolbar icon and a
separate entry in the Free Form menu.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Base curve
Extension vector
Base face
ÏÏÏ
*
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Rail curve
Extension sheet
Swept generator curves (rulings)
Extension Procedures in Common
Extension creation options share some basic steps:
Select an existing face as the base face. This is the face from which the
extension body will be extended.
Select an existing object such as a base curve, an edge, or in the case of
a corner extension, a corner. This specifies the intersection of the base
sheet face with the extension body.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-3
Working with Sheets
Tangential Extension Sheets
This option creates a body that is tangent to a face, edge, or corner. The
extension can be of a Fixed Length or a Percentage of the base. Tangential
extensions can only be built on original un-trimmed edges.
A tangential extension is created from an edge or a corner of an existing base

face, as a means of enlarging the base face.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Base face
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Tangential Edge Extension sheets
Tangential Corner Extension sheet
Fixed Length
This option allows you to create a tangential extension body of a specified

length along an edge of an existing sheet face.
Procedure
To create a tangential extension of a fixed length, you must:
Select the face.

Select the face edge.
Enter the desired length.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Selecting an Edge
To create a tangential edge extension, the selected edge must be an original

edge of the face, not one that was generated by a subsequent trimming
operation.
To extend a trimmed sheet, either:
Change the trimming boundary
or ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Create angled extension sheets with an angle of 0° or 180°. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Fixed Length method
Specify a length (positive or negative) for the new extension. A negative value
for the length creates an extension in the opposite direction of the displayed
vector.
Base face
U Sheet edge
Tangential edge extension sheet created in

positive direction of displayed direction vector
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-5
Working with Sheets
Percentage method
This option allows you to create either an Edge Extension or Corner Extension
at a specified percentage. The percentage expresses the approximate length of
the extension as a fraction of the length of the base face.
In some cases, it is very difficult to determine exactly how long the extension
body will be using the Percentage option.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
You should only use this option when:
ÏÏÏ
the precise length of the extension is not important.
ÏÏÏ or
if you need to create a corner extension whose edges are aligned with
adjacent edge extensions.
Procedure
To create a tangential extension of a percentage, you must:
Choose Edge, or Corner Extension.

Select the base face.
Select the edge or corner.
Enter the percentage value(s) and choose OK.
Sheet Corner
To create a corner extension, the two edges meeting at the corner must be the
original edges of the base face, not ones that were generated by subsequent
trimming operations. To extend a trimmed sheet, change the trimming
boundary.
Corner extensions are incompatible with fixed length edge extensions. They will
not blend smoothly.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Percentage Value
If you choose the Corner Extension option, the system displays two direction
vectors indicating the U and V directions of the sheet. You can then specify an
extension percentage in each direction. The percentages are approximations of
the lengths of the extension in the two directions.
Base face
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Edge extension created using
percentage value of 20
Tangential edge extension sheet created
using a percentage value of 30 U V
Corner extension created using same percentage

values as edge extensions U=30, V=20 Selected corner of base face
Normal
This option creates an extension normal to a face along an existing curve lying
on the face.
Direction vector indicates direction Normal extension sheet

of positive extension
Base face
Base curve lying on face
If you enter a negative extension length, the system creates the extension in the
direction opposite the displayed vector.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-7
Working with Sheets
Angled Extension Sheets
This option allows you to create an extension body at a specified angle to an

existing face along a curve lying on the face.
After you select the base face and base curve, the system displays two direction
vectors to establish a frame of reference for measuring the angle. One vector is
in the tangent plane of the face, normal to the base curve, while the other is
normal to the face, as shown below. Angular values can vary from 0-360.
Negative values for length and angle may also be used.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Direction vectors establish a frame
of reference for measuring angle
of sheet
90
Angled extension sheet
created at 45
Base curve lying on sheet
Base sheet
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Circular Extension Sheets
This option lets you create a circular extension from the edge of a smooth
surface. The extension follows the radius of curvature along the selected edge.
You can specify either a Fixed Length or a Percentage value for the length of
the circular extension.
Procedure
To create a circular extension: ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
7
Select the base face. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select the face edge.
Enter the desired length or the percentage value(s).
To create a circular edge extension, the selected base curve must be a

nonĆtrimmed edge of the face (an Iso-Parametric edge). The extended surface
edge cannot be longer than the full circle length of any area where the radius is
determined by the original surface edge curvature.
Face edge
Base face
Circular edge extension created in positive

direction of displayed vector
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-9
Working with Sheets
Activity 7-1: Creating Tangential Extensions
In this activity you will create extension sheet bodies.
Step 1 Open the part mff_ext_1.
Step 2 Create the first Tangential extension from the top edge of
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Sheet 1.
Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Extension
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Choose Tangential as the extension type.
Choose Fixed Length.
Select Sheet 1 as the face to extend.
Sheet 1
Sheet 2
NOTE When you select edges to extend, make sure the cursor is
nearer to the edge you want than any other edge. A
position near the middle of the edge is often best.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Indicate near the top edge of Sheet 1 to specify the edge you
wish to extend.
NOTE There is no selection ball. The system is looking for an

indication near the edge you wish to extend. You must
indicate within the boundaries of the face.
Set the Length to 200.
Choose OK. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Create the second Tangential extension from the top edge
of Sheet 2.
Choose Back.
Select Sheet 2 as the next face you wish to extend.
Indicate near the top edge of Sheet 2.
Choose OK to accept the Length of 200.
Choose Cancel.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-11
Working with Sheets
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 4 Analyze one of the newly created extension sheets to
determine what type of face was created.
TIP Choose Information → Object, Type, Face, select the

face of one of the extension sheets, and choose OK.
Step 5 Edit the U and V Grid Count of the two extension sheets
to 0 (zero).
TIP Choose Edit → Object Display, select the two

extension sheets, choose OK, set the U and V Grid
Count to 0, and choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Activity 7-2: Angled Extension for Fuselage Recess
In this activity you will create an extension sheet body at an angle to the face of
another sheet body. Later you will complete the model by using an offset face
and face blends to create a recessed, tapered pocket sheet body. You will then
thicken this sheet body to create a solid body.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Step 2 Join the projected curves using Polynomial, Associative ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Output, and Blank the Input Curves.
Step 3 Make layer 82 the work layer.
Step 4 Create an Extension sheet at an angle to the sheet body

that originates from the newly joined curve on the face.
The extension should extend below the sheet body and should
be angled in from the base curve so that end of the extension is
smaller than the start.
Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Extension
Choose Angled as the extension type.
Select the face of the sheet body as the face to extend.
Select the joined curve on the face.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-13
Working with Sheets
If your direction vectors look like the illustration below,

enter a Length of 1 and an Angle of 45. If your direction
vectors are different, enter the proper numbers to create the
desired extension sheet. If you need help, ask your
instructor.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
90
Extension extends
below the sheet and
gets smaller
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Law Extension
Law extensions are used to create linear extensions that can be calculated from
either a vector or the base face.
For example, in die design or mold design, draft direction plays an important
role while creation of the parting surfaces. With the Law Controlled Extension
you can use laws to control both the length and angle of the extension.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Selection Steps
Curve String
Base Face
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Vector
Spine String
Any
Curve
Edge
Face
Sketch
Constant
Linear
Cubic In Editing Mode,
General Confirm Upon Apply
is replaced by edit
windows for the
Constant tolerances that were
Linear in effect when the
Cubic extension was
General created.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-15
Working with Sheets
Procedure
To create a law controlled extension:
Select a base curve or edge string.

Choose a direction reference method:
Vector - Temporary, or Vector Constructor
Face Selection
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Optionally, select a spine string.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose a law option for specifying the length, and enter the desired
values.
Choose a law option for specifying the angle, and enter the desired
values.
If you select a face or collection of faces to specify the direction reference, the
base curve should lie on the faces.
For more information about the law subfunction, refer to Appendix B.
Two direction vectors will display that establish a frame of reference for
measuring the angle. One vector is in the tangent plane of the face, normal to
the base curve, while the other is normal to the face, as shown below.
Direction vectors establish a frame of

reference for measuring angle of sheet Law Extension created at variable
90 length and angle
Base curve lying on sheet

Base sheet
The length can be zero at either end. Negative values are acceptable for both
length and angle.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Activity 7-3: Law Extension Associativity
In this activity you will create a law extension relative to a datum axis which
represents the draw direction of a die.
Step 1 Open the part mff_law_ext_draft.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Vector
Curve String
4 edges total
Step 2 Create a Law Extension using the Curve String shown

above.
Select all four edges indicated.
Select the Vector Reference Method. Use the datum axis as

your vector reference.
Use the following law values:
Type:
Length Law Constant, Value . . . . . . . . . 50.0
Angle Law Constant, Value . . . . . . . . . . -15
Do not use a spine string.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-17
Working with Sheets
Step 3 Edit the tip angle of the die.

In metal stamping, designers frequently develop contours that
will develop unacceptable" draft material if tapered from the
vertical direction" of design orientation. Die tipping is the art of
optimizing a draw direction to minimize or eliminate unwanted
effects of adding draft.
The following edit crudely simulates die tipping. We assume that
draft material at the left (as illustrated below) is unacceptable.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Using Tools Expression... change
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
die_tip_angle from 0 to 10, and OK.
The Law Extension sheet

maintains a constant angle
with its associative angle
reference, the datum axis in
this case.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Enlarge Sheet
This option allows you to create a parametric enlargement of a sheet body. Two
types of enlargement are possible:
Linear
Natural
ÏÏÏ
Enlargements
ÏÏÏ
built from this
face 7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Linear enlargement
Natural enlargement
Linear
Tangentially extends the edges of the parent face. With this option, you can only
increase the size of the sheet, you cannot decrease it.
Natural
Extends the edges of the parent face based on its natural curvature. You can
increase or decrease the size of the sheet.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-19
Working with Sheets
All
When All is enabled, drag any slider or enter a value in any one of the text
fields and all U-V extents will change uniformly.
Procedure
To create an enlarged sheet you must:

Select a face.
ÏÏÏ
Choose the desired enlargement type.
ÏÏÏ
7 Enter a value in the appropriate text box or drag the slider bar. If you
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
wish to enlarge all edges uniformly, toggle the All option on.
When you are satisfied, choose OK.
If you have made changes and wish to return to the original state, choose Reset.
Self Intersecting Sheets
Care should be taken not to enlarge a sheet to the extent that it doubles back or
touches itself. You can visually check the bodies for these conditions or check
for Self-intersecting faces in the Examine Geometry dialog under Analysis.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Activity 7-4: Enlarge Sheet - Linear
In this activity you will create an enlarged sheet which is extended linearly. You
will then use this sheet to trim the block. You will simplify the linked body of
the housing and then subtract it from the block to create a cavity.
Step 1 Open the part mff_enlarge_1.
Step 2 Create a linearly enlarged sheet from the top face of the ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
housing.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Insert → Free Form → Enlarge.
Select the top face of the housing as shown.
Face to enlarge
NOTE Notice that resultant enlarged sheet will be untrimmed.

This is desired since you will be using it to trim off the top
of the block.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-21
Working with Sheets
Set Type to Linear.
Toggle on the All option.
Enter 30 in one of the text boxes and hit Enter.
Choose OK.
Step 3 Trim the block with the enlarged sheet.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7 Choose Insert → Feature Operation → Trim.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Select the block as the target body.
Choose OK.
Select the enlarged sheet. (The vector should be pointing in

the +ZC direction)
Choose OK.
NOTE If the vector is not pointing in the +ZC direction, you will
need to choose Reverse Default Vector instead of OK.
Your result should match the following illustration.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Step 4 Simplify the linked body of the housing to remove the

interior detail.
Make layer 1 the work layer, layer 15 selectable, and all other
layers invisible.
Choose Insert → Feature Operation → Simplify.
Select the outside face of the housing as shown as the

Retained Face.
Choose the Boundary Faces icon.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Select the 2 boundary faces as shown.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Boundary face
Boundary face
(outside face of housing)
(top face of housing)
Retained face
Choose Apply.
Choose Cancel.
Step 5 Subtract the simplified housing from the block to create a

cavity in the block.
Choose Insert → Feature Operation → Subtract.
Select the block as the Target Solid.
Select the simplified housing as the Tool Solid.
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-23
Working with Sheets
Step 6 Edit the parent body of the housing and notice how the
block updates as well since it is linked to the housing
part.
Choose Assemblies → Context Control → Set Work Part.
Choose fff_enlarge_1_comp from the list.
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Choose Tools → Expression.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Change the value of hgt from .75 to 1.
Choose OK.
Step 7 Close the parts.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Activity 7-5: Enlarge Sheet - Natural
In this activity you will create a naturally enlarged sheet which you will then use
to produce intersection curves with other faces.
Step 1 Open the part mff_enlarge_2.
Step 2 Enlarge the yellow offset sheet so that it is large enough to ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
intersect with the side walls of the cavity to produce
intersection curves. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Enlarge.
Select the yellow sheet body to enlarge
Enlarge this sheet
Set Type to Natural.
Ensure that the All option is toggled off.
Drag each of the sliders individually until the enlarged sheet

extends completely outside the airfoil shape.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-25
Working with Sheets
TIP If you wish to enter values rather than drag the sliders,
the following will work:
U-min . . . . . 100
U-max . . . . 100
V-min . . . . . 25
V-max . . . . . 15
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Step 3 Intersect the enlarged sheet with the walls of the cavity.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Make layer 52 the work layer.
Select the enlarged sheet as the First Set.
Choose the Second Set icon and select the 2 inside walls, the
walls of the cavity.
Cavity walls (inside)

(Second Set)
Enlarged sheet
(First Set)
Verify that Associative Output is toggled ON and choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Offset Sheet Bodies
This option allows you to create a constant or variable Offset sheet body from an
existing face at a specified distance normal to the face. A variable offset sheet
body requires four offset distances from four points on the sheet surface.
The system creates the offset sheet by projecting (offsetting) points along all
the normals of a selected face at the specified distance and/or points.
When you select the base face from which to offset, a normal direction vector
will display.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Constant Offset
Vector specifies direction Offset sheet created at a

of positive offset distance of 1.0
Base face
Variable Offset
Base face
Offset sheet This corner has a smaller offset

distance than the other three corners.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-27
Working with Sheets
If you choose to offset an offset sheet, the result will be an offset of the original
base face, not of the offset sheet you selected as the base (see the following
illustration). Even though the second offset sheet was created at a distance of
1.0 from the first offset sheet, the system actually interprets its base sheet to be
the original base sheet, and calculates its offset distance to be 2.0.
ÏÏÏ
Second offset sheet is created at a
distance of 2.0 from the base face.
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ First offset sheet is created at a distance of
1.0. This sheet was selected as the base
sheet for second offset.
Original base face
Distance Tolerance
When you create the offset sheet, the system must generate edge curves. You
can control how accurately the edge lies within the sheet by changing the
distance tolerance located under Preferences → Modeling.
The smaller the tolerance value, the less the edge curves will deviate from the
sheet. The system will not accept negative values.
Associative Offsets
An offset sheet is associated with the base sheet. You can perform geometry
edits on the base and the edits will be reflected in the offset sheet.
Transforming and Deleting Base Sheets
If you delete a base sheet, the system does not delete the offset sheet but the
offset sheet will become unparameterized. If you transform the base sheet, the
offset sheet will update to a new position to maintain associativity.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Variable Offset
The system lets you define a variable offset distance.
Choose Variable Offset.

The Cue line asks you to indicate a point on the base surface.
Use either the Point Constructor dialog or cursor location to define an
appropriate point.
Four points are required to define a variable offset.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7

Enter a Distance Value for each point defined.
For each subsequent point, the system retains the offset distance value
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
of the previous point.
When you select and define the fourth point and Distance Value, the
system creates the offset surface.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-29
Working with Sheets
Activity 7-6: Fuselage Recess Offset
In this activity you will create an Offset sheet which represents an inset from a
fuselage surface. In a later lesson you will use face blends to blend and trim the
3 sheets together and then thicken them into a solid.
Step 1 Open the part mff_offset_1.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7 Step 2 Offset the existing sheet body .5 inches to the inside.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Offset, and select the
fuselage body.
Fuselage body
Angled extension
Direction vector
Enter .5 as the Distance.
NOTE If your direction vector is not pointing down, you will

need to use a negative distance value.
Choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Offset sheet body
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Step 3 Save and Close your part.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-31
Working with Sheets
Activity 7-7: Variable Offset Sheet
In this activity you will create a variable offset sheet.
Step 1 Open the part mff_offset_2.
Step 2 Create a Offset Surface feature using Variable.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Offset each corner of the four sided sheet using a different
distance value for each corner. (Positive or negative offset
ÏÏÏ
values can be used, but not mixed.)
ÏÏÏ Step 3 Create a single Ruled sheet body to close the sides.
One possible solution
Step 4 Edit the variable Offset feature and change some of the
Offset Distance values (Edit Feature Parameters).
Step 5 Edit the variable Offset feature again and change the
location of some of the offset values (U, V parameters).
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Sew
The Insert → Feature Operation → Sew option allows you to create a single
sheet, or a sewn solid, by sewing two or more sheets together, or create a single
solid body by sewing two or more solid bodies together.
Sewing Sheets
If sheets are sewn together so that they completely enclose a volume and the
Modeling Preference Body Type is set to Solid, a sewn solid is created. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
If the sheets being sewn have gaps or openings, or if the Modeling Preferences
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Body Type is set to Sheet, the system creates a single sheet body.
Note: Though normally not advisable, it is possible to create a completely closed

sheet body.
The sew feature can be deleted and/or modified through Edit → Feature →
Parameters or by using the Model Navigator.
Target sheet
Tool sheets
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-33
Working with Sheets
Procedure
Choose Sheet as the Sew Input Type

Select the Target sheet
Select the Tool sheet(s) to be sewn to the target
Define the Sew Tolerance
Choose OK
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Sewing Solids
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ You can sew two solid bodies together only if they share one or more coincident
faces. The system deletes the common face(s) and sews the solid bodies into
one solid body. The system will convert the separate solids into one solid body.
Target faces Tool faces
Procedure
Choose Solid as the Sew Input Type.

Select the Target face(s) that will be removed by the sew operation.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Select the Tool face(s) on the tool solid that are coincident with the
target solid's selected face(s).
If a selected body is part of an instance array, decide if you want to
Sew All Instances.
Define the Sew Tolerance.
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
4 faces to be selected for
sewing - 2 tool, 2 target
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-35
Working with Sheets
Activity 7-8: Sew Sheets
In this activity you will sew two sheet bodies together.
Step 1 Open the part mff_sew_1.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
If necessary, use the Model Navigator to identify the upper

sheet body, the lower offset sheet, and the ruled sheet
between them.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Step 2 Analyze the deviation between adjacent edges of the faces.
When the Cue prompts you to Select face 1 and close edge,
select the upper sheet near any edge, and then select the
ruled sheet near the same adjacent edge.
List only the Maximum distance. The angle is known to be

large; there is no point in looking at the angle deviation.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-37
Working with Sheets
Step 3 Sew the three sheet bodies together.

Choose Insert → Feature Operation → Sew.
Verify that the Sew Input Type is set to Sheet.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select the upper sheet body when the cue prompts you to
select the target sheet.
Select the Ruled and Offset (lower) sheet bodies when the
cue prompts you to select the tool sheets to sew.
Choose OK.
Verify that a solid body was created.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Trim Sheet
This option allows you to trim sheet bodies by projecting boundaries onto the
target sheet.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Procedure
Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Trim Sheet.
Select the Target Body.
Choose the next icon. MB2 will also advance the icons.
Set the Filter and the Projection Along options to the desired settings.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-39
Working with Sheets
Any
Faces
Filter may be set to Any, Faces, Datum Planes
Datum Planes, Curves, or Edges. Curves
Edges
Face Normals
Datum Axis
Projection Along may be ZC–Axis
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
set to any of the following: YC–Axis
XC–Axis
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Vector Subfunction
The Projection vector should be set to point from the boundary

items toward the target sheet.
Pick one or more boundaries.
You may pick multiple objects with a rectangle or polygon.
Each boundary will be projected onto the sheet as you work.
Enabling Confirm Upon Apply will give the following menu upon
choosing Apply:
In this and all dialogs where it appears, Confirm Upon Apply

gives you an opportunity to evaluate results without losing your
selections and choices of options. Choose Back from the
confirmation dialog to return to the Trim dialog.
Accepting Result or choosing OK will result in a Associative Trimmed
Sheet.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Choose Kept or Discarded Regions.

Kept regions must be contiguous.
Single
bounding
entity Base sheet
Discarded
Region ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Intersection curves:
formed as a result of the
projection.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-41
Working with Sheets
The figure below shows an example of creating a triangular hole

in the base sheet. As bounding entities 1-3 are selected, the
system displays a curve, which represents the projection of the
bounding object onto the target sheet.
Bounding edge #2
Bounding edge #3
Bounding edge #1
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Kept Region
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Target sheet
These curves form the intersection

produced by the projection of the
bounding edges onto the target sheet.
Projected curves must form a closed loop, or extend to or

beyond the edges of the base sheet, as shown above and below.
Selected curves
Target sheet
to be projected
along a vector
ZC
YC
XC
Intersection curves: form
Specified vector the trim pattern and show
(-ZC axis) the location of the trim.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Regions will be Kept: select any part of the target you wish to keep.
Regions will be Discarded: select parts of the target you wish to throw
away.
Choose the method that will require the least number of
selections as shown below.
Kept Discarded
+
+ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
+
+
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
+
+ +
+ Selected part of sheet.

Result Intersection curve.
To produce this result, choose to keep

six parts of the target body or choose to
discard one part of the target body.
Using the Discarded method would

require the least number of selections.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-43
Working with Sheets
Activity 7-9: Trim Sheet
In this activity you will create a sheet body and then trim the sheet to create
holes.
Step 1 Open the part mff_trim_sheet_1.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Trim two holes in the sheet body with the two curve loops.
Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Trimmed Sheet.
Select the sheet body as the Target Body.
Choose the Trim Boundary icon.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Select the two curve loops.
Set Regions will be to Kept.
Choose the Region icon.
Select on the sheet somewhere outside the two trim

boundaries and choose OK.
Step 3 Shade the model to see the trimmed holes. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-45
Working with Sheets
Change Edge
Change Edge is a powerful tool for editing unparameterized sheets, such as you
might encounter in translated part files. Matching one edge to another edge is
often necessary to create a well behaved sheet body.
If you select a parameterized feature for Change Edge Unigraphics will issue this
warning before proceeding:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The Change Edge option allows you to modify an edge of a body in four ways:
Edge Only
Edge and Normals
Edge and Cross Tangents Normal
Edge Curvature
Cross
Curvature
Tangents
Check Deviation can be enabled for
any of the above four options.
Edge Only
Allows you to modify an edge using one of the following options:
Match To Curve
Match To Edge
Match To Surface
Match To Plane
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Edge and Normals
This allows you to match a selected edge and/or the normals to various entities.
You can use the following option to modify the edge and normals:
Match To Edge
Match To Surface
Match To Plane
Edge and Cross Tangents

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
This allows you to match a selected edge and its cross tangents to various
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
entities. Edge cross tangents are the tangents of the isoparametric curves where
they meet the edge.
Isoparametric curves
Edge
Edge cross tangents
You can use the following options to modify the edge and cross tangents:
Aim At Point
Match To Vector
Match To Edge
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-47
Working with Sheets
Edge Curvature
This allows you to match a selected edge and its curvatures to another surface
and its curvatures at a specified edge. This is useful if continuation of curvature
is required from surface to surface. This option allows you to select only a
surface and an edge to which to match the edge that is being changed. This
method is a higher degree of matching than Edge and Cross Tangents.
Master and Subject

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7 Subject refers to the body's edge you are going to change. Master refers to the
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
object to which you wish to change the subject.
If the master is longer than the subject, the system deforms the edge to only a
portion of the master.
Edge to be changed Original edge
Subject
Master
Edge to be matched
BEFORE AFTER
If you desire this effect: ...rather than this effect:
subject subject
master master
...you should adjust the corners of the subject sheet

by moving point or pole BEFORE changing its edge
The master may not be shorter than the subject.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Activity 7-10: Change Edge
In this activity you will match the edges of half of a bottle to the center plane,
so that after mirroring the model the two halves will join smoothly.
Subsequently, you will use the same part to practice matching edges to create
curvature continuity.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 1 Open the part mff_match_edge_1 and start the modeling

application.
Step 2 Match the edges of the sheet body to be perpendicular to

the ZC-XC plane.
TIP Before using Change Edge, you can easily verify that a
sheet is not parametric. Make certain that the Global
Selection mask is set to features. Hold the cursor over the
sheet until it pre-highlights. Watch the Status Line for
Unparameterized_Feature."
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-49
Working with Sheets
Choose Edit Free Form Feature Change Edge...
Edit the original sheet.
Select one of the two Edges on the parting plane" to edit.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ This edge...
... and this edge
Choose Edge_Cross Tangents.
Choose Match to Vector.
When the Vector Constructor appears, make layer 61

Selectable.
Select the Datum Plane, then OK in the Vector Constructor.
The edit is performed immediately.
Repeat the above actions for the other edge.
Cancel from the Change Edge dialog.
Step 3 Mirror the sheet and check the Edge to Edge deviation.
Use Insert Feature Operation Instance Mirror Body

to mirror the sheet through the datum plane.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Use Analysis Deviation Edge to Edge to see how well

the halves match.
Let us suppose that you need to establish curvature continuity

between any two unparameterized sheets.
Step 4 Make layer 83 the Work Layer, and layers 61 and 82

Invisible.
Step 5 Use Analysis Deviation Edge to Edge to see how well

the halves match. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
The edges are currently up to almost ½Ămm apart and at up to a ÏÏÏ
5° angle. ÏÏÏ
Step 6 Use Change Edge Edge_Curvature to match both
edges of the yellow sheet to the other sheet.
Watch the Cue Line, and follow the prompts.
Change the edges of this

sheet to match the adjacent
edges with curvature
continuity.
Step 7 Once again check the Edge to Edge deviation.

The deviation check reveals that the edges are tangent and
touching.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-51
Working with Sheets
How would you check for curvature continuity?
Step 8 Display curvature combs for the edges at the upper and
lower openings.
Verify that Select General Objects is active.
Select the two edges at the upper opening and two more at
the lower opening. Watch the Status Line!
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Toggle Combs ON.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
A temporary Analysis display of combs, peaks, or inflections may
be applied to edges!
Are the faces symmetric, or only curvature continuous? How
can you tell?
You could also have created section curves at any points of

interest, and displayed combs for the sectioning curves.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Activity 7-11: Force a Spline to a Plane
In this activity, you will force a 3-dimensional spline on the plane of the WCS
by editing its poles.
The key to this exercise is Point Set, an Insert → Curve function with which
many people are unfamiliar.
Step 1 Open the part mff_make_planar and start the modeling

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
application. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Examine the defect.

The part has a modeling flaw that is most apparent in a Front
view orientation.
One of the sheets has significant deviation from the plane of the
other sheets.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-53
Working with Sheets
Step 3 Examine the structure of the problem sheet.

You want to see what kind of sheet it is, for example, Through
Curve Mesh, Ruled, Through Curves, or Swept.
You also want to see the curves used to build it.
Set the Selection mask to Features.
Hold the cursor over the problem face until the quick pick
cursor appears:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Use the quick pick tool to select Swept (2).
The swept sheet is the object of your interest. Trimmed (8) will
not lead you to the underlying curves.
Locate Swept (2) in the Model Navigator.
The feature will be highlighted because it is currently selected.
Using the MB3 menu, choose Show/Hide Show Parents.
Adjust the view to examine the curvature combs of the

parent splines.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
TIP Show makes the layer for the parents Selectable, and
Unblanks the curves if necessary.
Hide only Blanks the parents.
Before your Show action, layers 42 and 43 were Invisible

and all curves in those layers were Blanked.
When it is not practical to place all parent curves in

individual layers by sheet, Blanking all curves makes it
easy to use Show and Hide to display selected curves as
needed.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
The sheet was built from two splines, one of which is clearly
non-planar.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Obtain information about the longer, non-planar spline,
shown below:
What is the degree? How many poles does it have? How many
segments?
In most cases you would construct a new spline and Replace
String in the sheet; however, this spline can be salvaged by
making it planar.
You can make a spline planar by moving all poles to one plane.
Enable Poles display for the long spline.

Hint: Select General Objects.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-55
Working with Sheets
Step 4 Create points at the current pole locations.
Choose Insert Curve Point Set...
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Spline Poles.
Select the long spline.
Six points will appear immediately.
Cancel the dialog.
These points are not associative. Moving them will not affect the
spline.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Step 5 Project the points to the plane of the WCS.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Â ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
À
Choose Move as the Copy Method . . À
For the Curves/Points selection step . . . Á

set the Filter to Point . . . . Â
Drag a rectangle to select all six points.
The status should read 6 objects selected."
In the Faces/Planes selection step . . Ã

Choose Plane Subfunction . . . Ä
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-57
Working with Sheets
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Plane of WCS . . Å
Choose OK.
Orient the view to Front to visually verify that the points

were in fact moved to the XC-YC plane.
Step 6 Move the spline poles to their corresponding points on

the WCS.
Some of the poles appear to coincide with points on the WCS
plane. Can you verify this?
Use Information Spline to output a Complete listing for

the spline.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
It is clear from the listing that although some points are very
close to it, none of the six points lies exactly at ZC 0.0.
Select the spline.
Choose Edit Pole.
Verify options:
Edit Method . . . . Move Pole
Move Pole By . . . . Destination Point
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select a pole.
Change the selection mask in Point Constructor to Existing

Point.
Indicate the point corresponding to the pole you selected.
Continue to select poles and indicate points until all six poles
have been moved.
Work will proceed quickly because the Existing Point mask

setting remains in effect.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-59
Working with Sheets
Choose OK until the spline and part update.
Examine the result.
The spline updates, as does the child sheet, and the entire sheet
body.
Use Information Spline to verify that the spline has

indeed become planar.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Information on spline # 1
Closure Status Open

Degree 5
Number of Poles 6
Number of Segments 1
Rational Status Polynomial
Defining Data None
Pole Number 1
Weight = 1.00000000000
Coordinates XC = -1.89308948931 X = -1.89308948931

YC = 0.64508093504 Y= 0.64508093504
ZC = 0.00000000000 Z= 0.00000000000
Pole Number 2
Weight = 1.00000000000
Coordinates XC = 39.68282809936 X = 39.68282809936

YC = -13.83014895729 Y = -13.83014895729
ZC = 0.00000000000 Z = 0.00000000000
Pole Number 3
Weight = 1.00000000000
What other method can you use to verify that the spline is
planar?
Hint: WCS
Step 7 Close all parts.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Constructing Draft
Construction Methods
Taper methods are adequate to create draft on planar and cylindrical faces.
Free form designs often require either:
construction of free form draft sheets, which are then sewn to existing
sheets or applied to bodies with Patch Body or Trim Body.
or
carefully constructed (or reconstructed) free form faces with ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
acceptable draft.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Draft Section Strings
The following are suggestions and hints. They do not preclude other
approaches.
Strings for draft faces should be as smooth as possible; no more
complex than necessary.
Isoclines sometimes have small gaps or angles where they cross
adjacent face edges. When these curves are extruded or projected at
an angle, small errors may be exaggerated until sheets have too much
gap or overlap to be useful.
Use Analysis Distance and Analysis Angle to check continuity.
Check continuity of adjacent faces.
If faces are tangent, repair" isoclines by various editing
methods . . À
If faces are not tangent, isoclines are not and should not
be tangent. Use a draft sheet construction method that
creates an edge between adjacent drafted sheets.
180° 180°
À
175.7° 180°
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-61
Working with Sheets
Examine section strings looking along the line of draw" or draft

vector." If strings cross or overlap, sheets built from them will have
regions of negative draft.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Draft Sheets to Match a Predetermined Parting String
Parting mismatch occurs when the draft height on one side of the parting
surface is greater than the height on the other side. If the same draft angle is
used on both sides, drafted faces do not match at the parting . . . À
À Á
In many industries it is preferable to adjust the draft angle on the shallow

side" to make material at the parting match at a single common edge . . Á
Reasons for this include:
Aesthetic - areas of mismatch make a part appear unfinished or

poorly designed.
Metallurgical - sharp edges at parting mismatches tend to chill" or
lose heat quickly and harden. This will cause tool damage during
subsequent machining.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Activity 7-12: Ruled and Extension Draft Sheets
The design intent is to provide material for a bolt hole, thus, the overhanging
nature of the boss in this model is not essential to the design intent.
Considerable tooling cost will be incurred if the part is produced as designed. It

was decided to fill the overhanging volume with drafted material. This
operation is sometimes called loading."
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Step 1 Open the part mff_draft1 and start the modeling
application.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
You will construct
No draft in
this load" material
this area
Step 2 Create Isocline curves on the boss and blend faces.
NOTE Do not confuse Isoparametric Curves with Isocline

Curves. Both appear on the same menu.
Choose Insert → Curve Operation → Extract...

or
Choose Extract Curve from the Curve toolbar:
In the Vector Constructor, choose Face Normal.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-63
Working with Sheets
ÏÏÏ
Select the planar face illustrated above.
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK to exit the Vector Constructor.
In the Isocline Angle(s) dialog make sure Single is selected,

Angle is 10 (the default), and the Associate option is
enabled.
NOTE The following step is critical! Be sure not to miss it.
Set the Tolerance to 0.0001.
Choose OK.
In the graphics window select and confirm the cylindrical

face of the boss and the blend face, and then choose OK.
Select these 2 faces for

Extract Isocline Curves
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Step 3 Project the Isocline curve on the blend face to the planar
face beneath the boss.
Choose Insert → Curve Operation → Project...

or
Choose Project from the Curves toolbar:
In the graphics window select the isocline curve on the blend

face:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Project this curve
In the Project Curve dialog change the Direction Method to

Angle to Vector.
Choose Face Normal.
Select the same planar face as earlier:
Choose Cycle Vector Direction.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-65
Working with Sheets
The vector should point along negative ZC.

Choose OK to exit the Vector Constructor.
Type 10 in the Angle parameter entry box (do not press

enter).
Choose the Faces/Planes selection step.
In the graphics window once again select and confirm the

planar face under the boss.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Check to be sure the Copy Method is set to Associate.
Choose Apply.
Step 4 Create a ruled face adjacent to the blend.

We will use two different face construction methods for
demonstration purposes.
Make 82 the Work Layer (category SHEETS)
Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Ruled...
From the selection menu choose the mask Curve.
TIP Curves that belong to the same feature, such as sketch

curves or the 3 isocline curves you recently created, will
ALL be selected for certain operations. Masking for
Curve is the way to select just the curve(s) you want from
a multiple curve feature.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Select the Isocline curve over the blend face, near the right
hand end. Refer to figure below.
Choose OK once to end Curve selection, and OK again to
end Section String #1 selection.
Select and confirm the projected curve at the same end as

you selected the Isocline curve then choose OK to end
Section String #2 selection.
These two single curve strings for

the ruled face. Watch Alignment.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
In the Ruled feature parameters dialog, verify that the

Alignment Method is Parameter.
Change the Tolerance to 0.
À
Á
Â
Choose OK.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-67
Working with Sheets
Step 5 Create extension faces at the sides of the boss.

Isocline curves and free form extension at angle used together
are a powerful tool to build draft faces in many situations.
Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Extension...
Choose Angled.
Select and confirm the cylindrical face of the boss.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Select this face
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select one of the two linear isocline curves on the cylindrical

boss face.
A pair of cone head vectors appears showing how the angle
value will be oriented. We want the extension to go downward,
or at 180 degrees by the vectors indicated. A distance of 2 will
be enough.
Enter parameter values Length 2 and Angle 180.
Choose OK.
Select the other linear isocline from the opposite side of the
boss.
Choose OK to reuse the same parameters.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Step 6 Sew the free form faces into a single sheet.
Choose Insert → Feature Operation → Sew...

or
Choose Sew from the Feature Operation toolbar:
Select and confirm the larger sheet adjacent to the blend as

the target sheet.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Target sheet
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
Tool sheets
Select the two rectangular sheets at the sides of the boss as

tool sheets.
Verify or change the Sew Tolerance to .001
Choose Apply.
Step 7 Trim the sewn sheet.

Associative datum planes are provided for trimming, because
the surface normals of the body present a problem.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-69
Working with Sheets
It is necessary to reverse normals to get the trim you need. When

you select a datum for a trim operation you have the option to
reverse normals. If you use faces from the body, you will not get
the option.
Make layer 61 Visible.
Choose Insert → Feature Operation → Trim...

or
Choose Trim Body from the Feature Operation toolbar:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Select and confirm the orange sewn sheet then choose OK to
end target body selection.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Select either datum.
Choose Reverse Default Direction.
Again select and confirm the orange sewn sheet then choose
OK to end target body selection.
Choose the other datum plane.
Choose Reverse Default Direction.
Cancel from the Trim Body Selection dialog.
Refresh the display (F5).
Completed sheet
body
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Step 8 Patch the green body with your new sheet.

Choose Insert → Feature Operation → Patch...

or
Choose Patch Body from the Feature Operation toolbar:
Select the green solid body as the target body to patch.
Select the orange sheet body as the tool sheet to patch.
Choose Reverse Removal Direction. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
7
You want the Removal Direction" to be such that the removed
faces are enclosed" by the tool sheet. If you accept the default
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
the removed faces will be all those NOT enclosed by the sheet.
Choose Apply.
Cancel the dialog.
Optionally, apply a .25 edge blend to all edges adjacent to

the boss and the acute angle edge of the block.
Optionally, if you wish, shade the part, and do a slope

analysis.
Determine the feature type of the blend where you created

the isocline.
Hint: Use Select Features, select the blend, and then look at
the status, or check the Model Navigator to see what is
highlighted.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-71
Working with Sheets
What is the Smoothness of the blend?

Hint: Use Edit Parameters
Step 9 Close the part when you have finished examining it.
The curvature continuous soft blend in mff_draft1 has a gentle
transition which yields nicely behaved isoclines. This discussion
would be incomplete if we did not discuss less accommodating
geometry.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Step 10 Open part mff_draft2 and if necessary, enter the modeling
ÏÏÏ
application.
ÏÏÏ Step 11 Verify what type of blend exists in this part.
Step 12 Repeat Step 2 to create 10° Isoclines on the cylindrical

face of the boss and on the blend face.
This time, do NOT change the Tolerance from the default

value 0.001.
Á
À
Step 13 Verify the angles and distances between isocline segments

where the curve crosses two edges, as shown above.
Use Analysis Angle...
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Using Analysis Distance... use the Point Constructor to

assure that you measure between adjacent End Points,
What do you suppose will be the effect of the gaps and angles
you measured when you project the curves at 10° onto the
planar face below?
Step 14 Create a curve projection of the isocline curves to the

planar face.
Use the same procedure as in Step 3, except, take all three
isocline curve segments.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Remember to Reverse Direction when you select the planar
face as a vector reference for Angle to Vector. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 15 Attempt to use the project curve as a section string for a
Ruled surface.
Choose Insert Free Form Feature Ruled...
Select the projected curve near one end, as illustrated:
Choose OK.
You should see a warning message:
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-73
Working with Sheets
The gaps open up because of the effect of the project angle

upon the existing small gaps and angles that the isocline exhibits
where it crosses tangent edges.
We need to edit curve end points to remove the gaps and edit
slopes to match angles.
Step 16 Attempt to edit the isocline on the blend face as a spline.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7 Select the isocline curve on the blend face.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ The following dialog appears. Only characteristics of the
isocline function may be modified from this dialog:
Currently it is not possible to edit the Isocline curve as a spline.

We need to covert the curve to an ordinary spline by removing
parameters. This will sacrifice associativity, but it makes it
possible to perform the edits we need.
Step 17 Remove parameters from the Isocline curve feature.
Choose Edit Feature Remove Parameters...
Select the isocline curve on the blend face.
Choose OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
A warning appears:
Choose OK to acknowledge the warning.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Step 18 Edit the end points of the spline on the blend face to ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
match the end points of the adjacent lines in position and
slope.
Select the spline curve on the blend face.
From the Edit Spline dialog, choose Edit Point.
Verify that the Edit Point Method is Move Point, and that
Move Point By is set to Destination Point.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-75
Working with Sheets
Zoom in and carefully select an end point of the spline.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
In the Point Constructor, specify End Point:
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Carefully select the near end of the line adjacent to the

spline point you selected.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Repeat the procedure to move the other end point of the

spline to the end point of the adjacent line.
This closes the gap at the upper curve string; however, we still
need to match angles. If we do not, a gap will still exist between
curves projected at an angle. Furthermore, any ruled surface
will have either a tiny radius or an internal edge at the curve to
curve junction, depending on the Tolerance setting for the sheet.
Choose OK to exit from the Move Point dialog.
TIP End Points and End Poles lie in the same position. In
some cases it would make little difference which edit you
choose, Edit Point or Edit Pole; however, if one method
clearly affects the shape of the spline less than the other
method, based on trial and error, then you should chose
the edit that changes the shape the least.
In the example part, Edit Point and Edit Pole adjust the spline within the same distance error
but Edit poles causes more than double the angle deviation.
In the Edit Spline dialog, choose Change Slope.
Carefully choose an end point of the spline.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-77
Working with Sheets
In the Change Slope dialog, specify Slope of Curve.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Choose OK to proceed.
Select the line adjacent to the end point you specified.
Repeat the Edit Slope procedure for the opposite end point
of the spline.
Hint: you will have to specify Slope of Curve again.
Choose OK to exit from the Edit Slope dialog.
Choose OK again to exit from the Edit Spline dialog.
Choose OK a third time to exit from the Edit Curve

Parameters dialog.
Step 19 Verify that the gaps are eliminated and that the angles
are now 180°.
Step 20 Create a Ruled sheet between the two curve strings.
Choose Insert Free Form Feature Ruled...
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Once again select the projected string near one end.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Choose OK to finish section string 1 selection. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The projected curves retained their associativity to the spline
and lines. They updated correctly when the spline was edited;
however, the spline is no longer an isocline feature. It will not
update if the part is edited.
To begin section string 2 selection, carefully select a line near

the end away from the spline.
Continue by selecting the spline and the other line.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-79
Working with Sheets
Choose OK to end selection of section string 2.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Verify that the alignment vectors match.
Choose OK until a Ruled sheet is created with the default

parameters.
Step 21 Use Patch Body to apply the ruled sheet to the solid body.
Although you edited the spline, the edits did not cause it to
move more than the modeling tolerance from the blend face.
How do you know this? If the spline had moved away from the
blend face, Patch Body could not succeed.
Step 22 Close all parts without saving.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Activity 7-13: Match Partings with Section - Linear
In this activity you will:
create a sheet to define a matched parting.

examine the Shape Studio Analyze Draft tool.
Step 1 Open the part mff_match_parting and start the modeling

application.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Check the body for draft.
Ensure that the Display Mode is Shaded.
Choose Analysis Draft...
The Draft Analysis dialog displays almost immediately, and

initial results are displayed.
The dialog displays four color zones:
Two regions with more than the specified draft angles,
one on each side (+ / -) of the natural parting.
Two regions with less than specified draft angles, also one
on each side of the natural parting.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-81
Working with Sheets
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7 Â À
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Á
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Change Facet Quality to Extra Fine . . . À

Toggle ON Show Isocline in three places . . . Á
Slide the Translucency of the + side to about 50% . . Â
Examine the body from both sides.
Hint: Orient View Left and Right.
Observe the parting isoclines that clearly define areas of small
and negative draft . . Ä (figure below)
The side of the body above the yellow parting sheet already has
adequate draft. You determine this by the absence of a 5 degree ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
isocline in that area.
The yellow sheet represents draft for faces on the - side of the
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
parting. If we do not change the area of the + side adjacent to
the sheet:
the part will unmold easily
but...
the parting will be mismatched"
You need a sheet that passes from the upper edge of the yellow
sheet, to points lying tangent to the green body.
Step 3 Construct a face tangent to the upper body that shares a

common edge with the upper side of a draft sheet.
Make layer 81 Invisible and layer 82 Selectable.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-83
Working with Sheets
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ The yellow sheet was constructed by the same projected isocline
method that you practiced in activity 7-12.
Your goal is to use the upper (Z+) edge of the sheet as a start
curve for a section linear-tangent.
Choose Insert Free Form Feature Section...
Choose the linear-tangent icon.
The cue reads Select set of tangent faces."
Select all three faces of the tubular body, then OK.
The cue reads Select start."
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Select the upper (Z+ side) edge of the yellow sheet, at the
right end (away from the WCS) as shown:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK to end start string selection.
The prompt reads Select spine."
Select the same edge, at the same location as shown above.
There are two possible sheets, one above the edge, and one
below it in the same volume as the existing sheet.
When there are two solutions, the direction of the spine
determines which sheet will be created.
TIP The direction is determined by a right hand rule.

Point your right thumb in the direction of the spine.
The direction of your fingers extending from your palm is
the direction in which the sheet will extend from the start
curve.
Choose OK to end spine string selection.

The prompt reads Specify additional parameters."
Choose OK to complete the operation.
Step 4 Create end caps" between the two sheet bodies.

Zoom in on one end of the body.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-85
Working with Sheets
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
À
Create a Ruled sheet using the two linear end edges as

shown above. Use default parameters.
Choose Create as the Boolean option.
Repeat the Ruled procedure at the other end of the part.
Step 5 Sew all sheets.

You will apply the sheets to the body using Patch Body, just as
you did in activity 7-12. Before you can patch, you must sew all
of the yellow sheets.
Choose Insert Feature Operation Sew...
Select one of the larger yellow sheets as the target.
Select the remaining large sheet and the two small end
caps" as tool sheets.
Step 6 Apply the contour defined by the yellow sheet body to the
green solid body.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Select the green body as target.
Select the yellow sheet as the tool.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Verify that the Removal Direction vector points inwards,

towards the face areas that you want to replace.
Toggle Confirm Upon Apply to ON.
Choose Apply.
The status should read Patching created a solid body."
If the body is comprised of the entire volume of the tubular

body and patch sheet, choose OK.
If only the roughly triangular volume of the patch sheet

remained, you would choose Back, and Reverse Removal
Direction.
Step 7 Convert the ends of the body to a single face.

The patch operation leaves small triangular faces adjacent to
the larger end faces of the body.
If everything went as intended, these faces are coplanar (within
tolerance) with the end faces.
The presence of small faces like these is often enough to defeat
a hollow operation.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-87
Working with Sheets
Choose Edit Face...
In the Edit Face dialog, choose the Join Face icon:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose On Same Surface."
Select the solid body.
If the Join operation succeeds it will return you to the selection

dialog, otherwise, there will be a warning message.
Step 8 Hollow the body.
Choose Insert Feature Operation Hollow...
Select the two end faces as faces to pierce.
Enter 6 as the Default Thickness:
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Choose Apply.
Step 9 Open the part mff_match_parting_solution.

This similar part demonstrates the ultimate goal of the work.
Analysis display is enabled on the exterior tube faces. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Observe the characteristic matched stripes, but not tangent" of
analysis bands across the tangent boundary between the
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
contoured face and ruled faces . . . . À
If the boundary had been curvature continuous, the stripes
would flow smoothly across the boundary.
Also observe the characteristic unmatched stripes" display
where non-tangent ruled faces meet at the parting . . . Á
À
Á
You will learn more about the construction of this part in a

following activity.
Step 10 Close all parts.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-89
Working with Sheets
Partings
There are free form applications for constructing parting strings that are worthy
of consideration in this lesson. A complete discussion of draft and partings is
worthy of an entire class.
The are two main types of partings:
natural partings
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
arbitrary partings
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
In activity 7-13 you developed an arbitrary free form parting. The natural
parting of the manifold tube À does not coincide with the natural parting of two
flanges Á. It was convenient to manufacture the part by defining an arbitrary
parting that flows between the center planes of the two flanges.
À
Á
A natural parting must be used in many cases, particularly in highly technical

products where design contours may not be changed for manufacturing
considerations such as draft.
A natural parting can be very simple to construct.
Start with the isocline string generated using the desired draw vector
and angle zero degrees.
If the isocline string is smooth and contiguous enough to be usable,
use it to sweep a parting sheet.
If the isocline is poorly defined, sacrifice associativity and create a
smooth fit curve within an acceptable tolerance zone.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Parting String Construction
You may need to create a matched parting that
adds the least amount of material and weight to your model.

maintains a minimum draft requirement.
The XC- side of the manifold with which you worked in activity 7-13 is an
example of a case where a constructed curve string is needed. The natural
parting passes across the arbitrary parting in two places.
When drafted edges cross at an angle, it is rarely practical to create an ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
7
associative parting. A smooth curve is required, which must:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
follow the natural draft edges as closely as possible.
maintain the minimum draft everywhere.
flow smoothly, so as not to create edges or seams in the part.
lie within a fairly tight tolerance of the parting sheet .
To create the required curve, you can:
create isoclines on both sides of the parting, using the minimum draft.
project all isoclines to the parting sheet.
Identify the outermost segments of the projected curves.
Trim away segments and delete curves that lie inside the outermost
string; for example, the segments marked with X in the illustration.
Construct a smooth curve to approximate the outer string."
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Project the smooth curve to the parting.
If minor defects appear in the string after projection, correct them.
Alternative: try extruding a smoothed outer string" perpendicular to
the parting sheet. Intersect the new sheet with the parting sheet to
create a parting string.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-91
Working with Sheets
Activity 7-14: Parting Strings
In this activity you will:
use curve editing methods to construct a smooth parting string.

use the parting string to construct matched draft sheets.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Step 1 Open the part mff_parting_string and start the modeling
application.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
À Â
Á À
To simplify your task, linear end segments of the parting string

have already been completed . . À
Isoclines representing the natural draft for both plus and minus
5° draft are shown as dashed curves . . . Á
Compare the path of the isoclines to the arbitrary parting sheet,
illustrated above looking directly at the edge of the sheet . . Â
Step 2 Project the upper isocline in both directions to the

parting sheet.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Change the Copy Method to Copy.
The is no point in maintaining feature history. Your final curve

string will not be associative.
Select the upper contoured isocline curve . . . À
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK, or choose the Faces/Planes icon.
Select the contoured face of the parting sheet . . . Á
TIP From a left view orientation, you need to rotate the view
slightly to make the sheet selectable.
You might also wish to change Hidden Edges to Visible.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-93
Working with Sheets
Choose Angle to Vector as the Direction Method.
In the Vector Constructor, choose ZC, the OK.

Type:
Angle . . . . . . . -5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Toggle Confirm Upon Apply to ON.
TIP It is not easy to predict whether curves projected at an

angle to a vector will lie inwards, close to or inside the
face, or outwards, outside the face. Confirm Upon Apply
makes it easy to go back and change the sign (±) of the
Angle.
Choose Apply.
When the Confirm Upon Apply dialog appears, verify in any

manner convenient that the angle -5 is correct.
Hint: The projected curves should lie outside the isocline
when seen on a top view orientation. You will have to zoom
in very close to see where the curves lie.
Repeat the procedure with the same isocline, and same face
of the parting sheet. This time, in the Vector Constructor,
choose Cycle Vector Direction to use -ZC.
In Confirm Upon Apply verify that the new curve lies end to
end with the two curves from the previous projection.
Step 3 Project the lower isocline in both directions to the parting

sheet.
The Project Curve dialog should still be displayed.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Choose Preferences Object...
Set Spline as the Type.
Change Color to 42, Pure Yellow.
Choose Apply in Object Preferences before you Cancel to

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ

return to the Project Curves dialog.
Repeat the procedure from Step 2, using the lower isocline,

ÏÏÏ
the same sheet, and the same Angle -5.
Tip: This time, a single projection along ZC is all that is
needed. The curve lies entirely below the sheet.
In Confirm Upon Apply verify that the new curve lies end to
end with the two orange lines that were supplied.
Confirm the correct curves, and then Cancel from Project

Curves.
Orient the view to Top.
It should be clear that a portion of the blue projection from the

upper spline À lies outside the yellow curve Á. This is the
region where the isoclines on the upper half of the part are
farthest away from the parting.
Á
À
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-95
Working with Sheets
Step 4 Remove unneeded curves and trim curves to contiguous

string.
Make layers 2 and 81 Invisible.
Delete the two short segments of the blue curve that lie
inside the yellow curve, at the locations shown:
À
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7 Á
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Trim the remaining blue curve to the yellow curve at each
end.
Hint: two separate trim operations will work best.
Trim out the center section of the yellow curve between the
ends of the blue curve:
The illustrations are exaggerated. The curves will appear

smoother, but you must take steps to assure a relatively smooth
result when the curves are approximated.
The curve order should be orange, yellow, blue, yellow, orange.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Step 5 Make the curves tangent.
Turn on comb display for the yellow and blue splines.
Use Edit Curve Parameters... to make the blue spline

tangent to the yellow ones at each end:
Use Change Slope.

Indicate a point at the end of the blue spline.
Choose Slope of Curve.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7

Choose OK.
Select the curve.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Step 6 Create fit points for a new spline.
Choose Insert Curve Point Set...
Choose Points on Curve.
Accept Equal Arc Length as the default Spacing Method.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-97
Working with Sheets
Type:
Number of Points . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Start Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
End Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Select the upper yellow spline at the end shown . . . . À
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Â
Á
Choose Apply.
Choose Select New Curve, and select the lower yellow spline
at the shown . . . Á
Verify that the parameters did not change.

Choose Apply.
Choose Select New Curve, and select the blue spline
anywhere . . . Â
Type:
Number of Points . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Start Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
End Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Choose Apply.
Cancel from Points On Curve.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Step 7 Move the outer end points to the ends of the orange lines.
Check the distances and adjust the white points as needed.

Hint: Edit Curve Parameters, use quick pick to select a
white existing point, indicate a new location.
Step 8 Fit a new smooth spline to the parting string.
Make 45 the Work Layer.
Move the trimmed splines to layer 50 (an unused layer). ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
7
Create a Fit spline. Use Chain from All. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Use By Segments as the Fit Method.
Type:
Curve Degree . . . . . . . 5
Segments . . . . . . . . . . 5
Choose Assign End Slopes.
Use Slope of Curve, and use the orange lines at each end.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-99
Working with Sheets
Choose OK.
What is the error?
Results may vary from illustration.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose Back.
Type:
Curve Degree . . . . . . . 5
Segments . . . . . . . . . . 10
Choose OK.
What is the error now?
Results may vary from illustration.
We were arbitrarily looking for an average error less than the

modeling tolerance, 0.0254, and a maximum error double the
modeling tolerance within two decimal places.
Remedies for difficult fitting problems include:
reduce the percentage of the curves upon which you
create fitting points.
reduce the number of fitting points.
increase the tolerance that you will accept.
Choose OK.
Move the points to layer 50.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Step 9 Smooth the new spline.
Turn on the curvature comb of the new yellow fit spline.
Select the new fit spline.
Choose Smooth.
Toggle Match End Slopes to ON.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Á
Choose Approximate.
The Smooth button will become available.

Accept the default Threshold.
Since Source Curve is set to Original, the Threshold will

maintain the spine within 0.254 of the original curve. This is
close enough for casting work.
Ã Â
Choose Smooth.
Continue the smoothing process by selecting individual

points where the comb shows radical changes.
Hint: 5 or 6 selections will be enough.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-101
Working with Sheets
Choose Back after Smoothing, then OK in the Edit Spline

dialog.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Before Smoothing After Smoothing
The spline is now almost ready for the intended use.
Step 10 Project the spline to the parting sheet.
Make layer 81 Selectable.
Choose Move as the Copy Method.
Set Along Face Normals as the Direction Method.
Select the smoothed spine as the curve to project, the

contoured sheet as the sheet, and then OK.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Turn on curvature combs of the spline and one edge of the

parting sheet.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The center section of the spline looks quite good now that it has
been projected onto a smooth surface. A lot of curvature
fluctuation typical of a three dimensional construction was
removed.
The combs at the two ends of the spline may have a readily
apparent variation in curvature, especially compared to the
sheet edges.
The projection operation destroyed the tangency you created
and preserved. You might wonder why this occurred. A possible
answer will become apparent later.
Your efforts were not wasted. It was necessary to make the
curves tangent to minimize deviation you will introduce with a
slope assignment.
A final slope adjustment is needed. Section linear-tangent
function will refuse to accept a string that is not G1 continuous.
Edit the projected spline to make both end points coincident

with and tangent to their adjacent orange line.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-103
Working with Sheets
How does the comb compare to the sheet edge now?
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
If you had to move an end point, the comb may show
irregularities; however, it is good enough for this exercise.
Step 11 Construct a draft patch sheet.
Make layer 2 Selectable and layer 81 Invisible.
Make 82 the Work Layer.
Construct one section linear-tangent sheet starting from

each end of the parting string. Use the curves as the start
string and spine for each sheet.
TIP When you need to pick a curve string that is coincident

with an edge, use the Curve mask in the selection dialog.
Can you apply the right hand rule to predict the result?
One sheet will go upwards and the other downwards.
Make layers 44 and 45 Invisible.
Construct Ruled end caps."
Sew the four sheets.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Step 12 Attempt to patch.
Select the target body and tool sheet.
Make certain that the removal direction vector points inward

toward the body.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
A warning message will probably appear:
Patch Body requires tool edges to lie on the target body with a
high degree of precision.
The failure to patch gives you an opportunity to hone your
diagnostic skills.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-105
Working with Sheets
Step 13 Investigate.
Use Analysis Deviation Edge to Face.
Compare the two constructed edges of the section sheets.

Remember that the system created a row of points to
approximate these sheets. If a discrepancy has occurred, this
is a likely place to find it.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Use the default settings, and choose All deviations.

Maximum deviations occur near the ends of the s-shaped
edges. Some of you may have already noticed that the
underlying surface has a slight ripple in this area.
In this project, it is not necessary to correct the swept body. We
can correct the patching problem by tightening the Tolerance of
the section sheets. More points will be generated, thus the
sheets will more closely follow the slight ripples.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Working with Sheets
Step 14 Change tolerance on the section sheets.
In the Model Navigator, double click on the first of two

SECTION_SURF features near the end of the tree.
Hint: The model contains an earlier section feature. Verify
that a face which you constructed is highlighted.
In the feature dialog, change the Tolerance to 0.01, and then

choose OK.
À ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Á ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Repeat the procedure for the last SECTION_SURF in the
tree.
Verify the results using Analysis Deviation.
Step 15 Patch the body.
Repeat the patch body operation.
Step 16 Join faces.
Use the join face function from the previous activity.
NOTE The body can be hollowed. A hollow does not serve the
product requirements.
Good practices include:

Construct the core as a separate body with its own
parting.
Create the core with a smooth parting to minimize
turbulence.
Use sideways sliding devices in tooling to change the draw
direction of problem regions.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
7-107
Working with Sheets
SUMMARY In this lesson you used several sheet functions

that depend on existing sheets as input, yet do
not fall into the category of transitions.
In this lesson you:

Created Tangential and Angled Extension
sheets.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
7
Learned a new application of law functions,
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
the Law Extension.
Used Enlarge in Linear mode to create a
parting sheet and in Natural mode to
develop curves needed for transition sheets.
Used the Free From Offset Sheet to create
associative constant and variable offset
sheets that will update with their parent.
Explored the strengths and limitations of the
Sew function.
Practiced associative sheet trim using the
Free Form Trim Sheet function.
Used Change Edge on unparameterized
sheets to create a sheet that will mirror into
a smooth body.
Used Change Edge on unparameterized
sheets to create curvature continuity.
Use curve editing to make spline planar, and
thus move the edge of a parameterized sheet
to the plane of the WCS.
Constructed free form sheets with a
specified minimum draft.
Constructed a smoothly contiguous parting
string on an arbitrary parting sheet.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sheets and Solids
Sheets and Solids

Lesson 8
PURPOSE In this lesson you will use functions that work with
sheets to create or modify solid bodies.
Thicken sheets.
Use Sheets to Solid Assistant.
ÏÏÏ
This lesson contains the following activities: ÏÏÏ
Activity Page
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
8-1 Thicken Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-2 Sheets to Solid Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
8-1
Sheets and Solids
Thicken
This option allows you to offset or thicken sheet bodies to create a solid body.
The system applies the offset in a direction normal to the face(s) of the sheet
body.
Solid Body
Sheet Body
Before After
You can use Edit Feature → Parameters or Tools → Expression to edit the
offset parameters for a Thicken Sheet body.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ You can use Information → Feature to list the expression names and offset
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
values for any Thicken Sheet body.
Select Input Sheet Body
This option allows you to select a sheet body to thicken. Once you have selected
a sheet body, the system displays a vector normal to the sheet body to indicate
the normal direction.
You can then specify a First Offset and/or Second Offset value. The system
creates the thickened body in the direction of the vector. Offset values can be
either positive or negative values.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sheets and Solids
The following illustration shows some possible offset combinations.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
normal
direction original sheet body
first offset = 0.1 0.0
or
second offset = 0.0 0.1
normal
direction
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ original sheet body
first offset = –.1
second offset = 0.0
or
0.0
–.1
normal
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
first offset = 0.1 –.1
or
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
second offset = –.1 0.1
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
normal
first offset = 0.1 0.2
or
second offset = 0.2 0.1
normal
direction
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ original sheet body
first offset = –.1 –.2
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
or
second offset = –.2 –.1
Select Target Solid Body

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
The system requires that there is a solid body in the current work part to use
Select Target Solid Body.
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
8-3
Sheets and Solids
Activity 8-1: Thicken Sheet
Step 1 Open the part mff_thicken_1.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Create a solid body by thickening the sewn sheet body.
Choose Insert → Form Feature → Thicken Sheet.
The Thicken Sheet dialog

displays.
Boolean Action options

are grayed out because
no solids exist in this
part.
Only one sheet is presĆ

ent.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sheets and Solids
You could provide First and Second Offset values, but for now,
you will use the default values.
Select the sheet body.
Choose OK.

ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
8-5
Sheets and Solids
Sheet to Solid Assistant

Sheet to Solid Assistant produces solids from sets of unsewn sheet bodies, by
automating the processes of sew and thicken.
Sheet to Solid Assistant can detect and correct many geometric conditions that
would result in thickening failures.
If the input data turns out to be invalid,

problem geometry is highlighted so you can
edit or replace it.
If the input data is valid, but the system

cannot produce a solid, analysis and
remedy options are made available.
Retrim Boundaries
Translated data frequently is found with
trimming data that is not of a form that
Parasolid finds easy to model. This remedy
ÏÏÏ may correct some of these problems
ÏÏÏ without making any changes to the position
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
of the underlying geometry.
Smooth Degeneracies
This remedy works on degeneracies found
by the Show Bad Degeneracies option, and
makes them smooth.
Refit Surfaces
This remedy reduces the amount of data
used to represent the surface, without
affecting the positional data, resulting in a
smaller, faster, and more reliable model.
Allow Extruded Boundaries

This remedy attempts to duplicate the approach of working from an extruded
solid, and using Hollow rather than Thicken Sheet as the way of producing a
thin-walled solid. This option can be used only when a suitable extrusion
direction can be determined.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sheets and Solids
Activity 8-2: Sheets to Solid Assistant
In this activity you will combine thicken and sew operations into a single step.
Step 1 Open the part mff_s2sa_1 and start the modeling

application.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Create a solid body from the three sheet bodies in the
part.
If necessary, activate the Model Navigation Tool.
The part currently contains two ruled sheets and a through

curves sheet, shown in The Model Navigator window.
Choose Insert Form Feature Sheets to Solid Assistant...
or select the Sheets to Solid Assistant icon:
Select a target sheet.
NOTE A direction vector will appear on the target sheet. This

vector establishes the positive direction for offsets. It will
most likely point downwards.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
8-7
Sheets and Solids
Select the other two sheets as tool sheets.
Change the First Offset to 0.25.
Choose OK.
Step 3 Edit the thickness of the sheet.

How many features are in the part now?
The Sheets to Solid Assistant creates Sew and Thicken Sheet
Features, shown in the Model Navigator. To edit the thickness,
you need to edit the Thicken Sheet feature.
Right click over the Thicken Sheet icon in the Model

Navigator, and choose Edit Parameters...
Change the thickness to .125 and update the model.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8 Step 4 Close the part.
ÏÏÏ This concludes activity 8-2.
EDS Unigraphics NX
Sheets and Solids
SUMMARY Unigraphics solid models can easily be

associated to Free Form sheets. Throughout
the class you have learned that a good
foundation of well defined and properly
trimmed curves can be used as the framework
for associative, well behaved sheets bodies. In
this lesson you completed the process by
demonstrating thickening and trim, the two key
methods that transfer sheet data to solid data.
In this lesson you:

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Used the Thicken Sheets function.
Used Sheets to Solid Assistant to combine
sew and thicken into one easy step. ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
Trimmed a solid with a sheet, and then
observed how the solid is associated both to
the trim operation direction, and to the
shape of the sheet.
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Student Manual
8-9
Sheets and Solids
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
8
ÏÏÏ
EDS Unigraphics NX
Divide Curve and Stretch

ÉÉÉ
Appendix A
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
This appendix describes some of the various methods by which to edit curves.
The following topics are covered.
Divide
Stretch
This appendix contains no activities.
Divide and Stretch can be found under Edit→Curve.
EDS Mechanical Free Form A-1

All Rights Reserved Student Manual
ÉÉÉ Divide
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
This option divides a curve into a series of like segments (i.e., lineĆtoĆline;
arcĆtoĆarc). The defining points for splines will be deleted.
There are five different methods for segmenting a curve:
Equal Segments
Segments by Bounding Objects
Input Arc Length Segments
At Knotpoints
At Corners
Equal Segments
This option uses the length of a curve or a specific curve parameter to divide a
curve into equal segments.
There are two parameters used to define how a curve is segmented: Equal
Parameter and Equal Arc Length.
Equal Parameter segments the selected curve equally, based on the parameter
characteristics of the curve.
The following illustration shows an example of segmenting an ellipse using the

Equal Parameter method.
METHOD = Equal Parameter
Curve NO. OF SEGMENTS = 4
Ellipse
Center
NOTE: Plus Signs indicate start and end

points of Segments and are not displayed by
Unigraphics
BEFORE AFTER
A-2 Mechanical Free Form EDS

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Equal Arc Length segments the curve into separate curves of equal length.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
Number of Segments allows you to specify the number of separate curves into
which the original curve will be divided. ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
BEFORE P3 AFTER
L5
P2
L4
P1
L1 L3
Number of Segments = 4
L2
NOTE: Plus signs indicate start and end points of arc
segments and are not displayed by Unigraphics
Segments By Bounding Objects
This option divides a curve into segments using bounding objects.
Usually, when you select a bounding object the system prompts you to indicate
an approximate intersection point between the bounding object and the curve
to be segmented. If the two curves selected do not intersect, a message displays:
Intersection Point Not On Curve
Selecting Bounding Objects.... Curve is segmented....

Approximate
intersection point
Bounding object 1 Bounding object 1
Segment 1
Selected curve
Segment 3 Segment 2
Bounding
object 2 Bounding
Approximate object 2
intersection point

ÉÉÉ At Knotpoints
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
This option uses selected knot points to segment a spline. A knot point is the
end point of a spline segment.
ÉÉÉ Knot points may be selected by using one of three methods:
By Number
By Screen Position
All Knotpoints
Input Arc Length Segments
This option divides a curve based on the arc length defined for each segment.
Arc Length is a mathematical term which refers to any Unigraphics curve.
Select the curve near the end where you want the system to begin segmenting
the curve. Beginning at the end selected, the system measures along the curve
the length entered, and creates a segment. From the end of the segment, the
system again measures the length and creates the next segment. This process is
repeated until the system reaches the other end of the curve.
The system will display the number of full segments created; based on the total
length of the curve and the length input for each segment. The length of any
remaining portion of the curve is displayed as a partial segment. You may
accept the number of segments and partial segment calculated by the system, or
you may enter in a different value for the number of segments.
C1
Partial
Complete segments
Arc selected here
Total arc length = 5 No. Segment = 2

Partial = 1.0
BEFORE AFTER
You cannot use a value which is equal to or greater than the arc length of the
curve to be segmented. If you attempt to do so, an error message displays.
Arc Length Greater Than Or Equal To The Total Arc Length

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
At Corners
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
This option divides a spline at corners. A corner is a knotpoint where there is
bend in the spline. In other words, when one spline segment end direction is ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
not the same as the start direction of the next segment. To divide a curve at
corners, you first select the spline. The system displays asterisks at all of the
corners and displays the same dialog menu as Selecting Knotpoints.
You select corner points in the same manner as Selecting Knotpoints.
Spline 2
Corner 1
Spline 4
Spline 1 Spline 3
Corner 2
BEFORE AFTER

ÉÉÉ Stretch
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Use this option to move curves, while simultaneously stretching or shrinking
selected lines. You can move most curves, but you can only stretch and shrink
lines.
Object to move
using Stretch
Object to extend
using Stretch
BEFORE AFTER
Procedure
Choose Edit→Curve→Stretch. The Stretch dialog displays.
Select the geometry you wish to stretch.
Choose the method from the Stretch dialog that you wish to use, either
Delta or Point to Point.
To use the Delta method, enter delta XC, YC and ZC values.
The system will move or stretch the geometry by these delta
values.
To use the Point to Point method, choose the Point to Point
button. The Point Constructor dialog then displays, from
which you can define the reference and destination points.
The Stretch dialog will update the delta XC, YC and ZC
values.
Zero length lines are deleted.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
When you select a line for stretching, the system adheres to the following
conventions: ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
Lines that are single selected are moved if the selection point is near
the midpoint of the line. Otherwise, the line endpoint nearest the
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
selection point is moved.
Lines selected with the rectangle method have the end within the
rectangle moved, if the rectangle contains one of the lines endpoints.
Otherwise, the line is moved.
If a line to be stretched is contiguous to a fillet, the tangency of the
fillet to the line may be lost.
Lines stretched to a zero length are deleted if the stretch operation is
accepted.
Associated geometry is adjusted when Update is chosen or when you
leave the Stretch dialog.
Selecting objects using a rectangle - define the rectangle by indicating

two diagonal corners. The rectangle must encompass the objects you
want to translate, as well as the endpoints of lines you want to stretch. If
only a part of an object (except a line) is within the rectangle, the object
will not be selected.
Part
Rectangle
(Direction of stretch)
BEFORE AFTER
When selecting geometry using the Rectangle class selection method, be sure
that any objects you wish to move are completely enclosed by the rectangle.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
A
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Using the Law Subfunction

Appendix B
This appendix offers some additional ideas for using curves by law and
expressions to create them.
ÉÉÉ
This appendix contains the following activities:
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
Activity Page
B-1 Creating a Law Curve Using a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . B-21
ÉÉÉ
B-2 Law Curve Relative to Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . B-23
EDS Mechanical Free Form B-1

Law Curve
A law curve is useful when you have equation-based input and want
parametric control over the spline that you are creating. (Sketches give
parametric control of splines but are limited to 2D splines.)
A law must be chosen for each of the X, Y, and Z components.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ
You may use a combination of the Law Subfunction options. For example, an X
component may be a linear law, a Y component may be an equation law, and
the Z component may be a constant law.
You can define both two and threeĆdimensional law splines. For example, a
twoĆdimensional law spline requires that one plane has a constant value.
Possibly such a spline would have a Z component defined by a constant law with
a value equal to zero.
NOTE If you edit a law spline using Edit→Transform, Scale or

Point Fit, the system removes creation parameters.
You can use Information→Object to display nonĆparametric or feature

information about a law spline.
B-2 Mechanical Free Form EDS

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Procedure:
Using the Law Subfunction, choose and define a law option for each of
the X, Y, and Z components.
(Optional) Control the orientation of the spline by doing one of the
following:
Define an orientation and/or base point.
OR
ÉÉÉ

Specify a reference coordinate system.
Choose OK or Apply to create the curve.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ
Controlling the Orientation of Law Curves
There are two ways you can control the orientation of a law curve.
Orientation and Base Point
Specify a local ZĆaxis and point, similar to using the ZĆAxis, XĆpoint option of
the Coordinate System Subfunction.
If you do not define an orientation, the system uses the WCS. If you do not
define a base point, the system uses XC=0, YC=0, and ZC=0 as a default base
point.
Reference Coordinate System
Specify a coordinate system using three datum planes or two datum planes and
a datum axis. If you change the datum planes and/or axes the spline changes
accordingly.
The datum planes and axes for the reference coordinate system must be created
before you create the spline.

Law Subfunctions
The Law Subfunction is an option in several Freeform Modeling operations.

Here are a few examples of the ways you can use this subfunction in the
Modeling application:
To control the radius of a Helix

To control the shape of a spline
ÉÉÉ To control the cross section of a Face Blend
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
To define an Angular Law or Area Law for a Swept Free Form feature
ÉÉÉ BEFORE Base Line
Law Curve
Direction Vector
AFTER
Base Point
You can describe a function value according to numeric, equation, or graphical

laws. Although the most commonly used functions are constant, linear, or cubic,
a function may be an existing curve or an equation (entered by an expression)
as well.
How a function value is used is determined by the application which uses the
law (i.e., for a helix, the value of the law at any point is the helical radius).
Depending on the geometry you are creating, you may need to specify one, two,
or three laws.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Numeric Laws
Constant lets you define a constant value along the entire law function. You are
prompted for only one law value (the constant).
Linear lets you define a linear rate of change from a start point to an endpoint.
Cubic lets you define a cubic rate of change from a start point to an endpoint.
Values Along Spine - Linear and Values Along Spine - Cubic allow you to use ÉÉÉ
two or more points along a spine to define either a linear or cubic law function.
After selecting a spine curve, you can indicate multiple points along the spine.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
You are prompted to enter a value at each point. ÉÉÉ
+ +
+ +
0 1
Linear
+ + 0 1 0 1
+ + Linear Cubic
0 1 Linear and Cubic
Cubic
Values Along Spline Linear and Cubic
By Equation
By Equation lets you define a law using an expression and a parameter

expression variable." All variables must be previously defined using
Tools→Expression, and the expression must use the parameter expression
variable.
For example, consider the following expression function and parameter

expression variable:
Parameter expression variable: t=0

Expression function: Y=1.0+(sin(720*t)*0.5)
When the expression function is evaluated, the parameter expression variable

(which is t" by default) is used by the system. Its range varies from zero to one
to describe the parameter space of the function. The initial value that you
establish for this variable is irrelevant.

Graphic Laws
By Law Curve lets you select a string of contiguous curves to define a law
function. After you select the curves, you are asked to select a base line. This
line defines a vector direction for the law function's orientation. A directional
vector is displayed to indicate the base line direction; you can change this
direction by choosing Reverse the Direction.
If no base line is defined, the default base line direction is the absolute X axis.
ÉÉÉ You must also construct the law curve on the XY plane, where the function
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
value is the Y function value of the curve.
ÉÉÉ Y A law curve is used to define the function value

The Y value represents the value of the
function as it changes from 0 to 1 along an X
value
X
0 1
Rules for Using By Law
When you use By Law, you must specify all three components
(X, Y, and Z.)
A law curve can be created either relative to the X-Axis of the
absolute coordinate system, or relative to a base line.
If you are using a curve in the plane of other than work XĆY plane, you
must define a base line.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Parametric Equations
The curves and surfaces used in CAD/CAM are often described with
parametric equations. In the case of 2D curves, these parametric equations
would have the form:
x = x(t) ; y = y(t)
In the case of 3D curves, they would have the form:
ÉÉÉ
x = x(t) ; y = y(t) ; z = z(t)
It is often useful to write these parametric equations in vector form: ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
B
P = P(t)
ÉÉÉ
where P= (x, y, z),
rather than writing each component separately.
The coordinates x, y, and z (or, equivalently, the position vector P) are

expressed as functions of some independent variable t called the parameter of
the curve. To describe some bounded segment of the curve, we often limit the
value of t to some interval [t, t ], called the parameter interval.
It is often helpful to try to understand the geometric meaning of the parameter

t. With simple curves like straight lines and circles, t may be related to arc
length. It is best to think of it as time. For example, as a point moves along a
curve, the vector P(t) gives its position at time t.ą
t=t
P(t)
t=t
If a curve can be described by parametric equations that involve only

polynomials, it is called a parametric polynomial curve. Often, these are
referred to as polynomial curves.

Examples of Law Curves
Shown are two splines. The X component of the dashed curve is a cubic law
from 0 to 1. The X component of the solid spline is a linear law from 0 to 1. The
Y and Z component are the same for both splines. The Z components are
constant laws with a value of 0 (this results in a planar curve in the XCĆYC
plane) and the Y components are equation laws.
YC
ÉÉÉ X: linear law from 0 to 1

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
Y: equation law,
Y=cos(720*t)
ÉÉÉ Z: constant law equal to 0

X: cubic law from 0 to 1
Y: equation law,
Y=cos(720*t)
Z: constant law equal to 0
ZC XC
0 1
Shown is an example of a simple parabola. The XĂcomponent is a linear law

from 0 to 1. The Z component is a constant law with a value of 0 (this results in
a planar curve in the XCĆYC plane) and the Y component is an equation law.
YC
X: linear law from 0 to 1
Y: equation law,
Y=(2*t-1)^2
Z: constant law equal to 0
ZC XC
0 1

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
To specify a reference coordinate system, follow the procedure illustrated.
Step 1: Step 2:
Define the 1st datum plane. It Define the 2nd datum plane. It
defines the XĆY placement plane defines the local XĆaxis by its
and local ZĆaxis (which can be intersection with the 1st plane
flipped)
X
ÉÉÉ
Y
X
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ
Y
Step 3:
Define the 3rd datum plane OR a datum
axis
If you define a datum axis: If you define a datum plane:
The intersection of Plane 1 and the The intersection of the three
datum axis defines the location of the planes defines the location of
local coordinate system the local coordinate system
ZC
YC XC
ZC
+ YC XC
If you delete any datum plane or axis that defines a local coordinate system for
a spline, the spline is deleted.

Circle
X is a By Equation law where xt=r*cos(s). Y is a By Equation law where

yt=r*sin(s). Z is a Constant law where the Law Value=0. Constant `r' is used to
control the radius. The linear equation: s=(1-t)*a+t*b is used to control the
limits (the start and end angles) of the curve. Constant à' is the lower limit.
Constant `b' is the upper limit. (Although it appears as a circle/arc, it is not; it is
a spline so the system will not find an arc center for this type of object.)
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
t=1
r = 0.5
ÉÉÉ a=0
b = 360
s = (1 – t) * a + t * b
X law
Equation:
xt = r * cos(s)
Y law r = .5
Equation: r = .75
yt = r * sin(s) r=1
Z law r = 1.25
Constant:
Z=0

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Ellipse
The ellipse uses similar laws as the circle. The only difference between the
equations are the radii, r1" and r2" (major and minor axes). A circle's major
and minor axes would be equal, whereas, an ellipse's would not be.
X is a By Equation law where xt=r1*cos(s). Y is a By Equation law where

yt=r2*sin(s). Z is a Constant law where the Law Value=0. The variables r1"
and r2" are the minor and major axes, respectively.
ÉÉÉ
An Ellipse, the UG object, uses the center of the entire ellipse as the angular
start and end orientation. An elliptical spline, such as created here, considers the
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
foci, in its definition. The foci are the two points located symmetrically on the
major axis where the sum of the distances between any point on the elliptical ÉÉÉ
curve and both of the foci are always equal. Therefore, since the center of the
ellipse is not used, the elliptical spline start and end angles must be controlled
and defined differently than with the UG object.
The linear equation: s=(1-t)*a+t*b is used to control the limits (the start and
end angles) of the curve. The variable à' is the lower limit. The variable `b' is
the upper limit. But both 'a' and 'b' use conditional statements to define
relative starting and ending angles.
X law
Foci
Equation: (variable)
xt = r1 * cos(s)
Y law
Y
r2=7
Equation:
Expressions r2=5
yt = r2 * sin(s) Start Angle
t=1 Z law r2=3
r1 = 10
Constant: r2=1
r2 = 1
Z=0 X
s = (1-t) * a + t * b
start = 0
end = 360
End Angle
a = deg(atan(2 * tan(start))) + a_angle
b = deg(atan(2 * tan(end))) + b_angle Center of elĆ
lipse
a_angle = if (start >= 90 && start <=270) (180) else (if (start >270) (360) else (0))
b_angle = if (end>= 90 && end <=270) (180) else (if (end >270) (360) else (0))

Cosine Wave
X is a Linear law with Start Value=0 and End Value=1. Y is a By Equation law
where yt=a*cos(720*t). Z is a Constant law where the Law Value=0. Constant
à' is used to control an amplitude of a curve.
Y
a = 1.0
t=1 a = .75
ÉÉÉ a = 0.25
ÉÉÉ
a = .5
ÉÉÉ
X law a = .25
B Linear:
ÉÉÉ 0 =< X =< 1
Y law
X
Equation:
yt = a * cos(720 * t)
Z law
Constant:
Z=0

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Involute of a Circle
The limits are defined by equation: s=(1-t) * a +t * b. à' defines the lower
limit and is equal to zero. `b' defines the upper limit and is equal to 360. X is a
By Equation law where xt=r*cos(s)+r*rad(s)*sin(s). Y is a By Equation law
where yt=r*sin(s) - r*rad(s)*cos(s). Z is a Constant law where the Law
Value=0. Constant `r' is used to control the radius. `rad' is the builtĆin radians
conversion function. `rad' or `deg' must be used with any variables which are
specified outside of the UG builtĆin trigonometric functions such as Sin or Cos.
ÉÉÉ
t=1
r=1
Y
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ
a=0
b = 360
s = (1–t) * a + t * b
X law X
Equation:
xt = r * cos(s) + r * rad(s) * sin(s)
Y law
Equation:
yt = r * sin(s) - r * rad(s) * cos(s)
Z law
Constant:
Z=0

Simple Parabola
X is a By Equation law where xt=t - 0.5. Y is a By Equation law where yt=a *

xt^2. Z is a Constant law where the Law Value=0. Constant à' is used to
control an amplitude of a curve.
t=1 a=3
a = 0.5 Y
ÉÉÉ
X law
ÉÉÉ
Equation:
ÉÉÉ
B xt = t - 0.5 a=1
ÉÉÉ Y law
Equation:
a = 0.5
X
yt = a * xt ^ 2
Z law
Constant:
Z=0

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Helix
A Helix is a spline with an approximate helical shape, the accuracy of which is
controlled by the Distance Tolerance.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ
Number of Turns, Pitch and Radius values become expressions and can be
changed through Tools→Expression as well as Edit→Feature→Parameters.
You can choose either a WCS or a userĆdefined helix orientation and location
(ZĆdirection, XĆpoint, and base point).
You can use Information→Object or Information→Spline to display spline

information about a helix.
Number of Turns
Use Number of Turns to define the number of helical turns in the spline. The
number of turns must be greater than zero. A value less than one is acceptable
(e.g., Number of Turns equal to .5 results in half of a helical turn).
Pitch
The Pitch is the distance between successive turns along the helical axis. The
Pitch must be equal to or greater than zero.

Radius Method
Radius Method allows you to specify how the radius is defined. You can either
define a radius by Use Law or Enter Radius.
Use Law allows you to control the radius changes of the helix using a law
function. When you choose this option, the system graysĆout the radius field box
and displays the Law Subfunction dialog.
ÉÉÉ Enter Radius (the default) allows you to enter the radius value. This value is
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
constant throughout the helix.
ÉÉÉ Turn Direction
Turn Direction controls the direction of the turns. A Right Hand helix starts at
the base point and curls to the right (counterclockwise). Conversely, a Left
Hand helix starts at the base point and curls to the left (clockwise).
Using a pitch of 0 (zero) and a linear law to define the radii, you can create a
2D spiral helix.
Start point is
along XC axis
ZC ZC
YC
YC
XC XC
LeftĆHand Orientation RightĆHand Orientation

Pitch = 0 Pitch = 0
Defining Orientation
Define Orientation allows you to use the ZĆAxis, XĆPoint option of the
Coordinate System Subfunction to define the helix orientation. The system allows
you to define a base point using the Point Constructor dialog or by indicating a
cursor location.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
If you do not define an orientation, the system uses the WCS.
If you do not define a base point, the system uses XC=0, YC=0, and ZC=0 as
the default base point.
End value
ÉÉÉ
No. of Turns=2
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ
Pitch
Start value
Tolerance
The Distance Tolerance option from the Modeling Preferences dialog controls
the deviation between the spline and a trueĆtheoretical helix. As the tolerance
decreases, the number of control vertices needed to describe the spline
increases.
This table illustrates an example of the affect the distance tolerance may have
on a helical spline.
Modeling Tolerance Number of Poles

.10 10
.01 18
.0001 43

Uniform Helix
The helix uses the same X and Y laws as the circle in the previous example.
However, if you define the Z law as `t', and increase the angle (or number of
turns), you can create a helix.
X is a By Equation law where xt=r*cos(n*s). Y is a By Equation law where

yt=r*sin(n*s). Z is a By Equation law where zt=t. The number of helical turns
is `n'. Constant `r' is used to control the radius. The linear equation:
ÉÉÉ s=(1-t)*a+t*b is used to control the limits (the start and end angles) of the
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
curve. Constant à' is the lower limit. Constant `b' is the upper limit.
ÉÉÉ t=1
r=1
n=3
a=0
b = 360
s = (1 – t) * a + t * b
X law
Equation:
xt = r * cos(n * s) Z
Y law Y
Equation: X
yt = r * sin(n * s)
Z law
Equation:
zt = t

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Elliptical Helix
The helical ellipse uses similar laws as the ellipse. However, if you define the Z
law as `t' and introduce `n' to control the number of turns, you can create an
elliptical helix.
X is a By Equation law where xt=r1*cos(n*s). Y is a By Equation law where

yt=r2*sin(n*s). Z is a By Equation law: zt=t. The number of helical turns is
defined by `n'. Constant `r1' is used to control the major radius. Constant `r2' is
used to control the minor radius. The linear equation: s=(1-t)*a+t*b is used
ÉÉÉ
to control the limits (the start and end angles) of the curve. Constant à' is the
lower limit. Constant `b' is the upper limit. ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
t=1
ÉÉÉ
r1 = 2
r2 = 1
n=5
a=0
b = 360
s = (1-t) * a + t * b
X law
Equation:
xt = r1 * cos(n * s)
Y law Z
Y
Equation:
yt = r2 * sin(n * s) X
Z law
Equation:
Z=t

Catenary Curve
A catenary curve describes the form assumed by a perfect flexible inextensible

chain of uniform density hanging from two supports. The general form of
equation for a catenary curve is: yt=a*cosh(xt/a).
X is a By Equation law where xt=t-0.5. Y is a By Equation law where

yt=a*(cosh(xt/a)). Z is a Constant law where the Law Value=0. Constant à' is
used to control an amplitude of a curve.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
Y
a=2
ÉÉÉ
t=1
a = 0.5
X law
Equation:
a=1
xt = t - 0.5
Y law a = 0.5
Equation:
yt = a * (cosh(xt / a)) X
Z law
Constant:
Z=0

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Activity B-1: Creating a Law Curve Using a Sketch
The example below shows a spline created using the Law Curve option, where
the X and Y components consist of equations that create a circle and the Z
component is determined by a law curve, which consists of a line and a spline. A
simple sketch was used to define the law curve, which creates a smooth
transition in Z as the equations create the circular shape in X and Y.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ
Sketch Spline
Step 1 Open the part mff_spline_2.
Step 2 Create the expressions which will be needed to create the

law curve.
Choose Tools→Expression.
In the middle of the Edit Expressions dialog is an expressions editor field that
you will use to create the expressions needed to create the law curve.
Remember to hit Enter after typing in each each expression.
The required expressions must be created before you create the spline. The t"
variable is an internal system variable that is required with By Equation laws. It
varies from 0 to 1, which defines the parameter space of the function.

Create the following expressions:

t=1 for the parameter variable
a=0 for the start angle
b=360 for the end angle
s=(1-t)*a+t*b for the calculation of start and end
points
r=3 for the radius
xt=r*cos(s) for the X component
yt=r*sin(s) for the Y component
ÉÉÉ Choose OK in the Edit Expressions dialog.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B Step 3 Create the Law Curve.
ÉÉÉ Make layer 21 Selectable.
Choose Insert→Curve→Law Curve.
Use By Equation to define the X law.
NOTE Note that the CUE line is prompting for a parameter

expression to define X. A default value of t" is in the
selection field. Because an expression already exists
defining a value for t" it is only necessary to select OK.
For the function expression accept the previously defined
expression xt.
Use By Equation to define the Y law, again accept t" for the
parameter expression and yt for the function expression.
When the cue prompts you for the Z law, choose By Law
Curve.
Select the sketch and choose OK. Then select the base line
(the gray phantom reference line).
Both arrows should be oriented as shown. Reverse the direction
if necessary.
This concludes activity B-1.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Activity B-2: Law Curve Relative to Datum Planes
Step 1 Open the part mff_spline_law.
Step 2 Create a law curve spline.
Use the expressions t, xt, t, and yt (the expressions are

ÉÉÉ
already created for you), and the blue spline for the Z law.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
Use Specify Csys Ref, and select as follows: ÉÉÉ
You will be prompted to select three datum planes or two datum
planes and one datum axis. If you select three datum planes,
they are used as follows:
The first will be used as the X-Y" placement plane for
the spline. The normal direction will be the Z axis for the
spline.
The second plane will be used to orient the X axis for the
spline.
The third plane will be used to locate the origin. The
origin will be where the three planes intersect.
If you select two datum planes and an axis, they will be used as
follows:
The first two selections will be for datum planes, and they
will be used the same as the first two above. The normal
direction for the first plane will be the initial Z axis for
the spline. The Axis will define the ultimate direction.
The datum axis selected will determine the final direction
of the Z axis for the spline, and the origin (where the axis
intersects the placement (first) plane).

Placement plane
Horizontal reference
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ
Step 3 Create another law curve. This will be used for
orientation control later. Use the same laws and specifics
as the first, except for the Z law. For Z, use a Constant of
2.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Step 4 Create a Sketch using the datum plane selected as the

horizontal reference (for the law curves) as the placement
face. Use the law curve placement face as the horizontal
reference. Create the sketch curves and constraints as
below:
15 degrees
ÉÉÉ
15 degrees ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B
ÉÉÉ
.75
.12 R
Locate the sketch as shown below:
0.00

Step 5 Change the displayed view to Trimetric.
Step 6 Create a Swept Freeform feature. Use the first law curve
as guide string one. Do not pick any other guides. Use the
sketch as the only section string. Use Parameter
Alignment, Tolerance of 0, Another Curve for orientation
control (select the second law curve you created),
Constant scale of 1. Do not use a spine, and create the
feature.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
B Step 7 Manually subtract (InsertFeature
ÉÉÉ OperationSubtract) the swept feature from the block.
Step 8 Edit the angle of the law curve placement datum plane.
Notice that the law curves and the feature move with it.
This concludes activity B-2.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Inputting Points from a File

Appendix C
This appendix contains information from on line documentation about

inputting points from a file. In case of discrepancy, the on line documentation
should be taken as correct.
This section contains the following optional activity:
Activity Page
C-1 Using Points from a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ
EDS Mechanical Free Form C-1

Points from Files
For many Modeling functions, you can input point data by specifying a file
name.
When you choose the Points From File option, the Point File dialog is
displayed.
The Point File dialog is a standard file selection dialog, with two options that
allow you to specify the format of the input points (see the illustration below).
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ Use this button if the points
Use this button if the
points are in absolute
are relative to the WCS coordinates
When you use a point file, an object attribute named POINT_FILE is attached
to the new object. For splines, this attribute is attached to the curve. For free
form features, it is attached to the body. This attribute is for information only -
no other association between the point file and the part file is maintained.
When an object is edited using a point file, the POINT_FILE attribute is

updated with the latest file name. If no POINT_FILE attribute exists, a new
one is created.
C-2 Mechanical Free Form EDS

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
File Types and Formats
There are three types of point files:
A series of points
A series of points with slope and curvature
Rows of points
The rest of this section explains how to format these files. The documentation
for the individual object creation options which use this dialog will tell you
which type of point file to use.
Generic Rules
Regardless of the type of file, there are several general rules:
Point data is formatted with one point per line.

ÉÉÉ

This line consists of the XYZ coordinates, separated by either tabs ÉÉÉ
C
or blanks. Some functions accept additional data, which follows
the coordinate information on the same line.
ÉÉÉ
All input files are simple text files.
Blank lines are ignored.
A pound sign (#) can be used to mark the start of a comment.
The pound sign can be put anywhere on the line. When the pound
sign is encountered, the rest of the line is ignored.
Once the maximum number of values has been read from a line, the
rest of the line is ignored.
The maximum line length is 132 characters. If a line has more than 132
characters, it is truncated.

Series of Points
This type of file is used for functions that accept a simple list of points. These
functions include:
Insert→Free Form Feature→From Point Cloud

Insert→Curve→Spline→By Poles
Insert→Curve→Spline→Fit
Edit→Curve→Parameters→Edit Pole
Each point is described with its XYZ coordinates on a single line, separated by
tabs or blanks, as shown below.
This is a Series of Points" file containing 5 points to

define a curve
1.0 0.0 0.0

2.0 1.0 0.0
3.0 2.0 0.0
ÉÉÉ
4.0 1.0 0.0
5.0 0.0 0.0
ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ The XYZ coordinates of the points
Series of Points with Slope and Curvature
This type of file is used for functions that accept a series of points with optional
slope and/or radius of curvature values for each point. These functions include:
Insert→Curve→Spline→Through Points
Edit→Curve→Parameters→Edit Point
Each point is described with its XYZ coordinates on a single line followed by
optional slope and radius of curvature values on the same line. All values are
separated by tabs or blanks.
If there are three values after the XYZ coordinates of a point, the values are
assumed to be the slope vector. If one value is given after the XYZ coordinates,
it is assumed to be the radius of curvature. If there are four values, they are
assumed to be the slope vector followed by the radius of curvature, in that
order. See the following illustration for an example of this type of file.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
This is a Series of Points with Slope and Curvature" file containing

5 points to define a curve
Slope
1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0

2.0 1.0 0.0
3.0 2.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.5
4.0 1.0 0.0
5.0 0.0 0.0 2.5
The XYZ
coordinates of Radius of
the points curvature
The 1st point defines a slope

The 2nd and 4th points define only the XYZ coordinates
The 3rd point defines slope and radius of curvature
The last point defines radius of curvature
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
C
Rows of Points
ÉÉÉ
This type of file is used for functions that accept rows of points. These
functions include:
Insert→Free Form Feature→Through Points

Insert→Free Form Feature→From Poles
Edit→Free Form Feature→Move Defining Point
Edit→Free Form Feature→Move Pole
Each row of points begins with the keyword ROW. Anything after the word
ROW is ignored. This line is followed by the XYZ coordinates of each point in
that row, separated by tabs or blanks. See the following illustration for an
example of this type of file.

This is a Rows of Points" file containing 3 rows of

points to define a surface
ROW 1
1.0 0.0 0.0
2.0 1.0 0.0 The XYZ coordinates
3.0 0.0 0.0 of the points
ROW 2 Row number

1.0 0.0 1.0
1.5 2.0 1.0
2.5 2.0 1.0
3.0 0.0 1.0
ROW 3
1.0 0.0 2.0
2.0 1.0 2.0
3.0 0.0 2.0
The first and last row have three points
each; the second row has four points
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ Error Messages
If a line contains data that cannot be converted into a numeric value, the
following error message is displayed:
File contains bad point data on line xx
If a line has the wrong number of values for defining a point, the following
error message is displayed:
Wrong number of values to define point on line xx

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Activity C-1: Using Points from a File
This activity gives you an opportunity to use the option Points From File to
modify a model.
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ
Step 1 Open the part mff_bottle_pt_file.
Step 2 Examine the smoothness of the body.
Step 3 Edit the spline and replace the current points with points
from the file mff_spline_data_new.dat, which is located in
the parts directory. (Hint: EditCurveParameters,
choose the spline, Edit Point, Points From File.)
Notice that the part is rebuilt with the new point data.
Everything that was associated with the original spline is now
associated with the new spline.
Step 4 Once again, examine the smoothness of the body.
This concludes activity C-1.

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
C
ÉÉÉ

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Splines Perpendicular to Planes

Appendix D
This appendix contains one activity:
Activity Page
D-1 Creating a Spline Perpendicular to Planes . . . . . . D-4
Splines Created Using Perpendicular to Planes
The Perpendicular to Planes option allows you to create a spline that passes
through and is perpendicular to a series of planes. The maximum number of
planes allowed is 100.
This option is useful whenever you need a spline that is perpendicular to a

series of planes, for example, as a spine curve.
This creates a spline starting at a location on the first plane which will be
perpendicular to all selected planes. The location is specified using the Point
Constructor dialog, and the planes are created using existing planes or those
defined by the Plane Subfunction menu. The resulting spline can be either 2D
or 3D, depending on the orientation of the selected planes.
To use this option, determine or define the planes to which the spline will be
perpendicular, then determine a location on the first plane where you want the
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
spline to start. ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
Below, a spline was created with the Perpendicular to Planes option. (Many
methods can be used to create the planes in a set.)
EDS Mechanical Free Form D-1

Plane Subfunction (3-points)

+
Existing Plane
+
Existing Plane + +
+
Plane Subfunction (CSYS)
+
Existing Plane
NOTE The spline segments are linear between parallel planes,

and circular conics between nonĆparallel planes. The
center of each circular segment is the intersection of its
bounding planes.
Below the radius of one circular segment is determined.
ÏÏÏ
Circular segment
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ Radius
Linear segment
Plane
To create a Perpendicular to Planes spline:
Select the starting plane.

Define the start point of the spline.
D-2 Mechanical Free Form EDS

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Select the next plane. If it is not parallel to the starting plane, a dialog
asks you to choose the curve's direction. (A conehead vector shows the
default direction.)
Select the remaining planes.
Reselecting the starting plane as the last plane in the set will not necessarily
create a closed spline. Because planes are infinite, the spline is created only to
the nearest intersection with the selected plane.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
EDS Mechanical Free Form D-3

Activity D-1: Creating a Spline Perpendicular to Planes
Step 1 Open the part mff_spline_planes.
Step 2 Create a spline perpendicular to planes. Use 0, 0, 0 as the

start location and pick the planes from right to left.
Step 3 Create a Through Curve Mesh feature using the yellow

ellipses as Primary strings, and the yellow splines as
Cross strings. Use the spline you created as the spine
string.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
D
ÏÏÏ
Step 4 Use EditObject Display to change the grid lines of the

sheet to 14x14. Notice that the grid lines are parallel to
the section planes.
D-4 Mechanical Free Form EDS

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Optional Activities
Appendix E
PURPOSE Activities in this appendix will meet specific needs of

groups or individuals, as determined by your
instructor.
This section contains the following activities:
Activity Page
E-1 Add Points, Move Points, Change Slopes . . . . . . E-5
E-2 Move Multiple Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
E-3 Spline Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
E-4 Extract Geometry (Curve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
E-5 Join Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-22
E-6 Extract Curve (Isocline Curve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-27
E-7 Wrap Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-34
E-8 Trim Curve (associative) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-36
E-9 Edge to Edge Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41
E-10 Drag Sheet Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43
E-11 Extension Sheet Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50
E-12 Creating Bodies from Wireframe Geometry . . . . E-54
E-13 Trim a Solid Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-55
E-14 Using a Point as a Primary String . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-61
E-15 Compare Primary Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-64
Projects
This section contains the following optional projects:
Project Page
ÏÏÏ
Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-70 ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-71
Changing the Design of a Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-72
Creating Sheets for a Fender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-73
EDS Mechanical Free Form E-1

Optional Activities
Editing Points on a Spline
If you edit a spline and choose

Edit Point, you are presented with
a dialog from which you can
choose to Move, Add, or Remove a
point, or use Points From File.
The other options become selectĆ
able when appropriate.
Prior to defining the edit parameĆ

ters and/or after each modificaĆ
tion is calculated and displayed,
the system displays an option to
Redisplay Data.
Move Point
You can move the displayed spline defining points in three ways:
Destination Point allows you to define a new point using the Point
Constructor.
Delta Offset allows you to enter delta offset values relative to the
WCS.
You can also drag the point from one location to another, regardless of
which Move Point By option is active.
When the Micro Positioning option is active, the point only moves by 1/10th of
the cursor movement when you are dragging.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
For the Move Point option, the selectable points are:
ÏÏÏ the defining points used to create the spline,

or
E-2 Mechanical Free Form EDS

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
points generated by the system if the curve does not have defining
points.
To move a defining point:
Select movement method (Destination Point or Delta Offset)

Select the point you wish to move.
Indicate the new position.
User specified slopes are maintained when a spline is edited using the Edit
Point option.
+ +
Moving a Point
Point on original spline
+ + +
+
+ +
+ BEFORE + Destination point AFTER
Add Point
The option allows you to add points to a spline. This will not change the degree
of the curve, but will change the number of segments.
To add points to a spline:
Select Add Point, and choose OK.

Indicate the new point using a Screen Position.
After you specify the location of the new point, the system displays the modified
spline.
A new spline point may be created either on the existing spline or not on the
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
existing spline.
ÏÏÏ
E
If a point is added which lies on the existing spline, the shape of the spline will
not change. ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
If a point is added that does not lie on the existing spline, the new spline will go
through the point specified.
If the defining points are Fit (least squares) points, the Fit (least squares)
algorithm is used to edit the curve.
Adding a Point
+ Add point +
+ +
+ + + +
+ +
+ + +
+
+ +
BEFORE AFTER
Remove Point
The option allows you to remove points from an existing spline. To remove a
point, you just select it.
Point to be removed + +
Removing a Point Point removed
+ +
+ ++ +
+ +
+ +
+ BEFORE + AFTER
Points From File
You can choose the Points From File button and identify a file, exactly as when
creating the spline originally. The points from the file are read in and replace
the original points. The original degree and closed status of the curve are
retained if possible. You must use a Series of Points with Slope and Curvature
ÏÏÏ type file. See Appendix C for more information.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Activity E-1: Add Points, Move Points, Change Slopes
In this activity you will add and move points and change the slope of a spline.
You will first change the display of the spline so that edits can be more easily
observed.
Step 1 Open the part mff_editspl_1 .
TIP The cyan spline was created using Through

Points, Multiple segment, with a degree of 3.
NOTE Look at the spline and the points. Notice the locations of
the aquamarine point and the two yellow points. You will
be using them in this activity. All points except the
aquamarine point were used to create the spline. No
slope control was used.
aquamarine
+
+ +
+ +
Yellow
+ Yellow
+
Step 2 Set the spline display options. Then perform a curvature

analysis on the spline.
Ensure that the Global Selection mask is General Objects:

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Select the cyan spline curve.
Toggle on two options: Poles and Combs.

Hint: Is the Analyze Shape toolbar visible? You may also use
Analysis Curve to change the display of a selected spline.
Choose Combs Options.
Enable Suggest Scale Factor.
Change the Density to ~80.
Choose OK.
The curvature comb is displayed as well as the control

polygon.
Shift-deselect the spline.
Step 3 Add Points to the Spline.

Now, you will add the aquamarine point to the spline and
perform a curvature analysis on the changed spline.
Choose Edit→Curve→Parameters.
Select the cyan spline curve and choose Edit Point.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Select the Add Point option and choose OK.
ÏÏÏ Choose the Existing Point icon in the Point Constructor

dialog.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Make sure Offset is set to None. Select the top center

aquamarine point. The point will be added and the spline
will be changed.
Select this
aquamarine
point to add
+ +
+
+ +
+ +
Cancel the dialog.
Step 4 Move a Point on a Spline.

Now you will move the yellow points, and analyze the curvature.
Select the cyan spline curve and choose Edit Point, (the
Move Point option should be toggled on).
Select the Delta Offset option.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
When the cue prompts you to select the point to move, select
the point second from the left on the spline, enter -.1 in the
DYC field.
DYC -0.1
Choose OK.
The display will update to show the edited spline in the system
color, and the original spline in its original color.
DYC -0.1
DYC -0.02
Move the third point, using a DYC offset of -.02.
Move the sixth point using a DYC offset of -.1.
Choose OK in the Edit Point dialog, but do not dismiss the

Edit Spline dialog. The spline will remain selected.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Choose Change Slope.
Select the left endpoint of the spline for slope assignment,

choose Slope of Curve, OK, and select the top end of the left
orange line.
+ + +
+ +
+ +
Point for slope Point for slope
assignment assignment
Change the slope of the right end of the spline to match the
slope of the right orange line.
Step 5 Check the tangency between the spline and the lines.
Hint: Choose Analysis→Angle and select pairs of adjacent curve
ends.
This concludes activity E-1.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Moving Multiple Points
Move Multiple Points allows you to move a portion of a curve without affecting
the rest of the curve. You select start and end points that define the portion of
the curve to be edited. You can then select one or two points to be moved. You
can use three methods to offset or displace a portion of the spline:
Distance Normal to Curve allows you to move the point at a specified

distance normal to the curve for both the start and end displacement
points. The system displays the normal vector and prompts you to
enter a distance. A negative value specifies a direction opposite that of
the displayed vector.
Vector and Distance allows you to move the point along a vector at a
specified distance.
Direction Point allows you to move the point using the Point
Constructor.
Points after displacement applied

Original curve Curve after points
are moved
Start and end displacement

points identifying segment
of curve to be moved
Start and end limit points identifying

segment of curve to be modified
To Move Multiple Points:
Select start and end limit points.

Select a start displacement point, choose a displacement method, and
follow the prompts.
Select an end displacement point (optional), choose a displacement
method and follow the prompts.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Activity E-2: Move Multiple Points
In this activity you will create a point set at the spline defining points, and then
move multiple points along the spline.
Step 2 Create a Point Set of Spline Defining Points.
Choose Insert→Curve→Point Set, Spline Defining Points.
Select the spline.
Step 3 Move Multiple Points.
Select the spline
Choose Move Multiple Points.
The Point Constructor displays, and the cue prompts you to

select the first limit point. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Choose the Existing Point icon, and select the two existing
outer end points of the spline as the limit points. ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Limit point Limit point
The cue prompts you to select the first displacement point.

Select only the middle point of the spline.
Displacement
point
The cue prompts you to choose the displacement method.

Choose Distance Normal to Curve. In the Distance input
window, type 0.3.
Choose OK.
Choose OK when prompted for the Second Displacement

Point, and the spline changes.
Cancel the dialog.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Step 4 Moving Multiple Points on Another Spline.
Make layer 42 the work layer.
Use the Move Multiple Points option for this spline.
Use the two existing points at the ends of the spline as the
two limiting points.
Use the second point from the left end for the first
displacement point and move it normal to the curve a
distance of .2.
Repeat the procedure for the second displacement point -

use the second to last point from the right end.
Cancel the dialogs and compare the differences.
First Second
Displacement Displacement
Point Point
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Graph Options
Graph and Graph Options...

control spreadsheet analysis
of the curvature of a selected
curve.
Point from the dialog option

Show Correlated Point
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Activity E-3: Spline Smoothing
Step 1 Open the part mff_smooth.
Step 2 Analyze the spline using Curve Analysis display to

examine its curvature.
With Selection set to General Objects, select the spline.
Toggle on the display of Combs.

Hint: Is the Analyze Shape toolbar visible? You may also use
Analysis Curve to change the display of a selected spline.
Choose Combs Options.
Enable Suggest Scale Factor.
Change the Density to ~100.
Choose OK.
The spline is still selected. Do not deselect it at this time.

ÏÏÏ
Choose Analysis Curve Graph Options... ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Toggle Show Correlated Point to ON. ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Selecting Show Correlated Point is equivalent to selecting

Apply. It takes a short time for the spreadsheet to start.
Click to the left or right of the Show Correlated Points slider.
The location of the marker on the curvature graph

corresponds to the location of the circle on the spline.
Sharper areas of the curvature graph correlate to the original
defining points of the spline.
The illustration is from a PC. Unix work stations using Xess
may differ in spreadsheet appearance and functions.
Marker
Tooltip text" as illustrated appears on
MS Excel, if you hold the cursor near
any point of the graph.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E Step 3 Close the part.
ÏÏÏ This concludes activity E-3.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Extract Geometry (Curve)
Solid edges or curves can be extracted as associative curves using Extracted

Geometry (Curves).
Curve
Procedure
To create an EXTRACTED_CURVE feature:
Choose Insert → Form Feature → Extract and select the Curve icon.
Select the curve or solid edge you wish to extract.
Optionally toggle on Blank Original.
Curves can be blanked, solid edges cannot.
Choose OK or Apply.
Extracting edges which are analytical in shape (linear, circular, or conical)

produces extracted curves which are lines, arcs, or other conics. Extracting
edges which are non-analytical produces extracted curves which are splines.
Extracting the edge of a face that is a B-surface will produce extracted curves
which are splines.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
NOTE Curve Operation Extract... Edge Curve generates an
explicit curve which is not associative.

Optional Activities
Activity E-4: Extract Geometry (Curve)
In this activity you will create associative, extracted curves.
Step 1 Open the part mff_extract_curve_1.
Step 2 Extract the edges of the top and bottom faces.
Turn on the Model Navigator (View→Model Navigator) and

take note of the features in the model.
Choose Insert→Form Feature→Extract.
Choose the Curve icon.
Select the edges of the top and bottom faces (16 total).
Top Face
Bottom
Face
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ Notice the additional Extracted Curve features in the Model

Navigation Tool.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Step 3 Examine the extracted curves to determine their entity

type.
Blank the solid body.
Choose Information→Object, select some of the bottom face

curves, and choose OK.
NOTE The extracted curves from the bottom face are either
lines or arcs since the edges are analytical.
Choose Information→Object, select some of the top face

curves, and choose OK.
NOTE The extracted curves from the top face are splines since
the edges are non-analytical.
Step 4 Change the size of the corner blends and notice how the
extracted curves update.
Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters.
Select BLEND(1) and choose OK.
Change the blend radius from .5 to .1 and choose OK twice.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Join
This function joins together a chain of curves and/or edges to create a single
B-spline curve.
A cubic Polynomial spline approximates the original chain.
A General Spline exactly represents the original chain of curves.
Join can also be used to quickly generate a spline which represents an analytical
curve (i.e. a line or an arc).
Retain Retain
Blank Blank
Delete
ReĆ
place
If a closed loop of curves is selected and the starting and ending points of the
loop are not tangent continuous, the resulting spline is created "open."
If the closed loop is geometrically tangent continuous where the starting and
ending points meet, the final spline is also tangent continuous where the
starting and ending points join.
Join creates an exact representation of the string of curves you select if there
are no gaps greater than the system tolerance and there are no corners with
angles greater than the Modeling Preferences Angle Tolerance. If the gaps are
ÏÏÏ less than the system tolerance, Join approximates a curve between the gap. If
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
the curves have corners with angles less than the Modeling Preferences Angle
Tolerance, Join approximates a curve through the joint and removes the corner.
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Procedure
Choose Insert→Curve Operation→Join.

Select the curves or edges you wish to join.
Choose the desired Resulting Curve Type.
Polynomial - The approximation is controlled by settings on
the Modeling Preferences dialog:
Distance Tolerance
Angle Tolerance
Curve Fit Method option: Cubic or Quintic
General Spline - This exact representation of the input curves
will have a degree corresponding to the input.
Optionally toggle Associative Output on.
Choose the Input Curves option that you prefer:
For non-associative curves For associative curves
Retain Retain
Blank Blank
Delete
Replace
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Activity E-5: Join Curves
In this activity you will associatively join curves together into one single spline
and then create a Geometric Expression for the total length of the joined curve.
Step 1 Open the part mff_join_curves_1.
Step 2 Use Join to join the tube guide string into a single,
associative spline.
Make layer 1 invisible.
Choose Insert→Curve Operation→Join.
Select all of the Tube guide string curves. (Hint: Chain

Curves is the quickest way to select them)
Set the Resulting Curve Type to General Spline.
NOTE Using the General Spline option will more accurately

represent the true length of the guide string. In a case such as
this where the input curves are lines and arcs, the General
Spline option will produce a polynomial cubic spline with less
data than will the Polynomial Cubic option.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Tube feature
Tube guide
string
curves
Ensure that Associative is toggled on.
Ensure that the Input Curves option is set to Blank.
Choose OK.
Joined Curve
Step 3 Create a Geometric Expression for the length of the

joined curve and then compare it to the total combined
arc length of the individual guide string curves.
ÏÏÏ
Choose Tools→Expression.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Choose the Geometric Expression icon. ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Choose Length.
Select the joined spline.
Choose OK
Select the length expression that you just created and take
note of the value. (23.7980886703075)
NOTE To see the full value of an expression, use

Information→Expression.
Use Analysis→Arc Length to find the total arc length of the

lines and arcs which make up the original guide string.
(Remember, they were blanked when the joined curve was
created) (23.7980886703080)
Compare the two values.
Choose OK on the Edit Expressions dialog to save your

expressions.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Extract (Isocline Curves)
Isoclines are curves through points where face normals have equal angles from
a reference vector. You must specify a vector and select the face(s) on which the
curves will lie.
Procedure
Choose Insert→Curve Operation→Extract.

Select the desired vector.
Select the faces on which you wish to create the isocline curves.
Choose Single or Family.
ÏÏÏ
Enter the desired angle parameters.
Choose whether or not you wish the curves to be associative.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ

Choose OK.

Optional Activities
You can create isocline curves on any selected face.
Some uses for isocline curves are:
To split a surface.
To create an draft angle map" of a surface.
To help in construction of parting surfaces on a casting.
The degree of the resulting splines is controlled by the Curve Fit Method setting
in Preferences→Modeling. The options are Cubic (degree 3) or Quintic (degree
5).
The figure below illustrates isocline curves at 10 degree intervals, from 30° to
80°, with the +ZC axis as the reference axis.
Isocline curves
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Activity E-6: Extract Curve (Isocline Curve)
In this activity you will create associative isocline curves. These curves represent
the break on a surface at which the angle of the surface changes from less than
the isocline angle to greater than the isocline angle.
Step 1 Open the part mff_isocline_curves_1.
Step 2 Use Extract Curve, Isocline Curve to create curves which

represent the point at which a 10 degree tangent will lie
on the top face. Use the Associate option so that if the
face upon which the isocline curves lie changes, the
curves will automatically update.
Choose Insert→Curve Operation→Extract, Isocline Curves.
Choose Face Normal as the Vector option and select the

Bottom face to define a vector that points in the +ZC
direction and choose OK. (Use Cycle Vector Direction if
necessary)
Top
face
Projection
Vector
Bottom
face
Ensure that the Single option is selected.

ÏÏÏ
Set the Angle to 10. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Ensure that Associate is toggled on. ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Choose OK.
Select the Top face as shown.
Top
face
Bottom
face
Choose OK.
Choose Cancel.
Isocline curves
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Step 3 Edit the curves which define the Through Curves feature
and observe how the isocline curves update.
Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters.
Select THROUGH_CURVES(4) and choose OK.
Choose Edit Curve.
Ensure that the Edit Curve Parameters icon is selected,

select the large arc in the middle, and change the diameter
from 12 to 18.
Choose OK until the feature updates.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Wrap/Unwrap
This option allows you wrap curves from a plane onto a cylindrical or conical
face, or unwrap curves from a cylindrical or conical face onto a plane. The
resulting curves are degree 3 splines. Wrap/Unwrap is a feature and produces
curves which are associated to the input geometry.
Curves
Wrap Face
Wrap Plane Curves
Filters Filters
Wrap Plane Any Any
Face Curv
Datum e
Plane Edge
Face
Procedure
To Wrap curves from a plane to a face:

Choose Insert→Curve Operation→Wrap/Unwrap.
Choose the Wrap Face icon.
Select the cylindrical or conical face.
Choose the Wrap Plane icon.
Select the wrap plane.
Choose the Curves icon.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Select the curves you wish to wrap.
ÏÏÏ
E If the selected curves do not lie on the wrap plane, they are first
ÏÏÏ projected to the wrap plane, normal to the plane, and then wrapped
onto the wrap face.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Choose Wrap.
Enter a Cut Line Angle.
Choose OK or Apply.
To Unwrap curves from a face to a plane:

Choose Insert→Curve Operation→Wrap/Unwrap.
Choose the Wrap Face icon.
Select the cylindrical or conical face.
Choose the Wrap Plane icon.
Select the wrap plane.
Choose the Curves icon.
Select the curves you wish to unwrap.
If the selected curves do not lie on the wrap face, they are first
projected to the wrap face, normal to the face, and then unwrapped
onto the wrap plane.
You can also select the wrap face. Its unwrapped edges may be
desired or useful as a reference.
Choose Unwrap.
Enter a Cut Line Angle.
Choose OK or Apply.
The following figure illustrates the various entities associated with the
Wrap/Unwrap function.
Unwrapped cut
line
Unwrapped
cone
Cut top
Unwrapped
line
cone ÏÏÏ
Wrap face bottom
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Wrap plane
Tangent line
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Wrap Face
This is the cylindrical or conical face about which curves are wrapped or
unwrapped. You may select only cylindrical or conical faces. If you have a
cylindrical or conical face that is split by a groove or some other feature, you
may choose multiple faces for the Wrap Face. However, these faces, if
uninterrupted, must form a single cylindrical or conical face.
Wrap Plane
This is the plane which is tangent to the Wrap Face. For Wrap, the selected
curves that lie on this plane are wrapped onto the Wrap Face. Selected curves
that are not on this plane are first projected onto this plane, normal to the
plane and then wrapped onto the Wrap Face. For Unwrap, the selected curves
are unwrapped onto this plane. This may be a datum plane or a planar or
trimmed planar face. However, if a face is used, it is treated as a boundless
plane and the resulting unwrapped curves will extend as far as necessary,
regardless of the face boundaries.
Curves
You may select curves, edges, or faces. If you select faces, all the face edges will
be selected.
Tangent Line
This is the imaginary line that represents where the Wrap Plane and the Wrap
Face touch each other. This line is parallel with the cylinder or cone axis.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Cut Line
This is an imaginary line that represents the Tangent Line rotated around the
Wrap Face axis according to the Cut Line Angle value. The Cut Line Angle
value controls where the wrapped or unwrapped curves will be located relative
to the Tangent Line after the feature is created. If a closed curve on the Wrap
Face that completely encircles the face axis is being unwrapped, it will be split
at the Cut Line. The following illustration shows the results of different cut line
angles.
0 Degrees
90 Degrees
180 Degrees
270 Degrees
360 Degree
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Activity E-7: Wrap Curves
In this activity you will create associative wrapped curves around a cylinder to
produce the guide path for a cam follower slot. In activity 4-12, you sweep a
profile along the wrapped curve in an identical part.
Step 1 Open the part mff_wrap_curves_1.
Step 2 Use Wrap/Unwrap to wrap a 2D spline around a cylinder

and generate a 3D spline.
Choose Insert→Curve Operation→Wrap/Unwrap...
Select Face 1 as the Wrap Face.
Select Plane 1 as the Wrap Plane.
Select the 2D cam path as the curve to be wrapped.
Face 1
2D cam path
Plane 1
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ Ensure that the Wrap option is selected.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Choose OK.
Wrapped
curve
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Activity E-8: Trim Curve (associative)
This activity lets you practice trimming curves associatively. The contiguous,
closed shape will be used to generate a Swept feature which will be subtracted
from the airfoil to form a cavity.
Step 1 Open the part mff_trim_curve_1.
Step 2 Trim the offset curve with the two lines to form a special
cavity shape. Use Associative Output so that the trims
will update if the input geometry changes.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
NOTE Since the offset curve is two pieces, you will perform two
ÏÏÏ
trim operations
E
ÏÏÏ Choose Edit → Curve → Trim...

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Verify that Single Selection

is toggled ON. À
Set Method to find

Intersections to Shortest
3D Distance. Á
Ensure that Trim Á

Bounding Objects is
toggled ON. Â
Â
Ensure that Reuse Ã
Bounding Objects is
toggled OFF. Ã
Ä
Ensure that Associative
Output is toggled ON. Ä
Å
Set Input Curves to Blank.

Å
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Select the First Bounding Object as shown. À
Select the Second Bounding Object as shown. Á
Toggle Single Selection to OFF. Â
If single selection is ON, choosing a curve to trim will

immediately trim the curve with the default trim Option,
Inside. We want to change the Option to Outside.
Select the first part of the offset curve (the inside curve) to
trim in between the two bounding curves. Ã
Change the Trim Option in the changeable window to

Outside. Ä
First Bounding
Object
Second Bounding
Object
À
Á
Curve to
trim
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Choose Apply.
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
NOTE If the Cue Line states that you must select the desired
intersection point for the first and/or second boundary,
and more than one possible intersection is shown, select
the desired intersection point and Choose OK. If
necessary, choose the second desired intersection point
and choose OK.
Configuration of curves after the first trim is performed
Once again, select the First Bounding Object as shown.
Choose the icon for Second Bounding Object.
When Single Selection is OFF, the Selection Step does not

march automatically after one selection.
Once again, select the Second Bounding Object as shown.
Choose the icon for String to Trim.
Select the second part of the offset curve (the inside curve)
to trim in between the two bounding curves.
Be sure the Trim option in the changeable window is still set

to Outside. It may return to Inside by default!
ÏÏÏ
First Bounding Object Second Bounding Object
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Curve to trim ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Choose Apply.
NOTE Once again, if the Cue Line states that you must select
the desired intersection point for the first and/or second
boundary, and more than one possible intersection is
shown, select the desired intersection point and Choose
OK. If necessary, choose the second desired intersection
point and choose OK.
Configuration of curves after all trims are complete
Choose Cancel.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Activity E-9: Edge to Edge Deviation
In this activity you will analyze edge deviation between two sheet bodies.
Step 1 Open the part mff_edit_poles_1.
Step 2 Analyze the deviation between adjacent edges of the faces.
When the Cue prompts you to Select face 1 and close edge,
select the first sheet near an edge which is adjacent to the
other sheet as shown, then select the second sheet near the
same adjacent edge.
Second
First selection selection
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Ensure that Check Points is set to 50. ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Accept the default Distance Tolerance of .0254.
Accept the default Angle Tolerance of .5.
Choose OK.
Set Number of deviations to All deviations.
Choose OK.
The Information Window displays the deviation checking error summary.
Notice the value of the Maximum Distance Error, a little over 3.54Ămm.
Edge to Edge
Information Units Millimeters
Deviation Checking
Error Summary
Number of Points Checked = 50

Distance Tolerance = 0.02540000000
Number Over Distance Tolerance = 47
Minimum Distance Error = 0.00000000000
Maximum Distance Error = 3.54083341403
Average Distance Error = 1.40828829721
Angle Tolerance (Degree) = 0.50000000000
Number Over Angle Tolerance = 50
Minimum Angle Error = 15.42721905980
Maximum Angle Error = 24.54664396518
Average Angle Error = 18.73038901832
Checkpoint Data
XC YC ZC Dist. Err Angle Err
15.000005 -0.000000 219.849170 0.000000 19.839276
15.139820 -0.000000 217.872180 0.106081 18.933663
15.214846 -0.000000 214.908486 0.122401 18.888357
15.245290 -0.000000 211.095432 0.062934 18.922075
15.251359 -0.000000 206.570362 0.059206 18.956567
15.253262 -0.000000 201.470618 0.231402 18.981018
Close the Information Window.

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E Step 3 Keep the part open for activity E-10.
ÏÏÏ This concludes activity E-9.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Activity E-10: Drag Sheet Poles
Deviation Check is available when you edit poles of a spline or sheet. You have
already been introduced to the concepts of the deviation check tool. In this
activity, you may practice dynamic deviation monitoring as you edit a sheet
body.
Match it approximately
Edit this sheet to this sheet.
Step 1 If necessary, open the part mff_edit_poles_1 and start the

Modeling application.
Step 2 Drag poles on the left sheet until it more closely matches
the profile of the right sheet. ÏÏÏ
Choose Edit Free Form Feature Move Pole...
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Verify that you will Edit Original Sheet. À
Select the sheet on the left.
The pole structure of the sheet and Move Pole options are
displayed:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ Choose Deviation Check. Á

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
The Deviation Check dialog appears.
Select the Reference Curve icon:
Select the edge of the right side face, as illustrated:
Select this edge
Choose OK to end reference object selection.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Set the Deviation Check options as illustrated:
Enable:
Vectors
Markers
Numbers
Type:
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5
Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Choose Entire Row (constant v). Â
Select any point in a row where the deviation is large.
3.15799
V
This row might be a
good place to start.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
The OK button becomes available after you select a pole.
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Choose OK.
The Move Defining Pole dialog appears.
Experiment to try to match the edge of the sheet you are editing
to the edge you selected for deviation checking by dragging rows
of poles with constant V. Use this procedure:
Choose a row of points.
Select Along Defined Vector or Along Normal. À The
default defined vector, ZC direction, is sometimes useful
for this part.
Choose a micro positioning value. Á 0.01 is reasonable
with this part.
ÏÏÏ Drag the poles, while monitoring the deviation.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Choose OK whenever you need to return to the selection
dialog and pick another row of poles.
ÏÏÏ When you are finished, choose OK until the part updates.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
How close did you come?

In theory, given limitless time and patience, you might achieve
zero deviation, because the sheets have the same pole structure.
You could cheat" by displaying lines representing the pole
structure of the right hand sheet, in layer 42. You could try to
approximate the pole rows of the sheet you are editing to
appropriate line end points. You can not, however, snap" rows
of poles to existing end points.
The goal of this activity is only to practice using the deviation
check tool with Move Pole. Even if you achieved nearly zero
deviation, the sheets would still not be tangent.
Step 3 Make layer 181 Selectable.

The entity in layer 181 is a permanent deviation gauge created
using Shape Studio Analyze Shape functionality.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Activity E-11: Extension Sheet Applications
In this activity you will create Tangential, Circular, and Law Extension sheets
from an existing sheet body.
Step 2 Create a Tangential, Fixed Length extension from the

bottom edge of the Ruled sheet as shown. Extend it
50Ămm.
Base face
Base edge
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Extended Sheet
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Step 3 Create a Circular, Fixed Length extension from the same

Ruled sheet body but starting at the left edge of the sheet
as shown below. Extend it 50Ămm.
Base edge
Base face
Circular extension
Step 4 Create a Law Extension from the right edge of the Ruled
sheet.
Select the edge shown below as the Curve String, then

choose OK one time to advance to the Base Face selection
step.
Base Face
ÏÏÏ
Use this edge as the Curve String ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Select the Base Face shown above, then OK one time to
advance to the Spine String selection step. ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
NOTE Vectors display indicating the angular orientation, as

illustrated.
90
Choose Cubic as the Length Law option.
Set the Length Law parameters as shown:

Type:
Start Value . . . . . . . . . . 25.0
End Value . . . . . . . . . . 0.0
If necessary, choose Constant as the Angle Law option.
If necessary, set the Law Value to 0.
Enable Confirm Upon Apply.
Choose Apply.
The Confirm Upon Apply dialog appears:
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Verify that the Length Law start and end values are in the
correct order, with the extension appearing as shown below.
TIP Confirm Upon Apply allows you to verify results without

losing geometry selections.
You can examine output visually, or use the Analysis

tools provided in the dialog.
If necessary, you can choose Back to return to the

selection steps dialog and correct any geometry selection
or parameter within any step.
If you make frequent corrections, you should use

Confirm Upon Apply any time you see it.
Choose OK when the result is satisfactory, then Cancel from

the Law Extension dialog.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Activity E-12: Creating Bodies from Wireframe Geometry
This activity gives you an opportunity to use the options you have learned
throughout this class to create a solid body representing a boat hull from
nothing more than 3 sketches.
Step 1 Open the part mff_boatframe.
Step 2 Interrogate the model for objects, layers, sketches,

features, blanked objects, and curve analysis.
Step 3 Develop a strategy for creating the solid body using

whatever feature creation methods that will be effective.
Your design intent will determine what kind of
associativity and parametric control that is necessary.
Step 4 When you are finished and satisfied with the results, close
the part.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Activity E-13: Trim a Solid Body
In this activity you will trim a solid body using a sheet body. Then you will
change the sheet body and see that the associated solid body changes to match
the new sheet body.
Sheet for
trimming
operation
Target Body
Step 1 Open the part mff_trimbody_1. ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Step 2 Shade the part to see the different objects and their
locations.
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Step 3 Trim the solid body with the sheet body.
Choose Insert → Feature Operation → Trim.
Select the solid as the Target Body.
Choose OK.
Select the sheet body as the face with which to trim the solid.
Choose either Accept Default Direction or Reverse Default

Direction, whichever is needed to ensure that the direction
vector matches what is shown.
Trim
Body
Desired vector
Target
Body
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Step 4 Edit the trim feature and reverse the removal direction.
Select TRIM_BODY(8). (The front face of the trimmed

block)
Choose OK.
Choose Reverse Normal.
Choose OK. Your part should now match what is shown.
ÏÏÏ
Step 5 Edit the sheet body that was used to trim the solid body
and modify its shape by adding and removing strings. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Choose Edit → Feature → Parameters. ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Select THROUGH CURVES(7). (The sheet body)
Choose OK. (The following edit dialog will be displayed)
Choose Add String. When the cue prompts you to select the
string to be added after, select curve located at the top of the
sheet body.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Before After
Top curve
Add this pink spline

(Be sure to select it on
this end)
Remove this string
Choose After First String, select the pink replacement spline

curve.
Accept it, if necessary, and choose OK.
NOTE Remember to select the new curve on the same end as

the vector arrows on the original curves so that the sheet
doesn't twist.
Choose Remove String.
Select the bottom, blue curve to remove it from the sheet

body, and choose OK.
Choose OK until the model updates.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Activity E-14: Using a Point as a Primary String
In this activity you will create a Through Curve Mesh feature with a point as a
primary string. You will practice the proper picking sequence.
Step 1 Open the part mff_mesh_1.
Step 2 Set the Modeling Preferences for U and V grid counts

to 15.
Step 3 Create a curve mesh feature using the curves shown.
Choose Insert → Free Form Feature → Through Curve

Mesh.
A dialog displays options

for selecting section
strings.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Select the white curve as shown as the first primary string.
Choose OK.
Before selecting the second primary string, choose the Point

option from the selection string dialog.
This tells the system that you will be selecting a point as the
last primary string.
Select the endpoint as shown.
First primary string
End point is
Cross last primary
strings string
NOTE The Cue Line is prompting you to select cross string 1.

When a point is selected as any primary string other the
first, the system automatically steps you forward to the
select cross strings process.
Select each cross string, in sequence and at similar ends.

Confirm each string until all five cross strings have been
selected. Be sure to watch the Cue Line.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Since there is no
spine string or
boundary constraint
required, confirm
(OK) each dialog
until the sheet is
created.
The Through Curve Mesh feature is created as shown below. It is

displayed with the number of grid lines you specified (15 x 15) in the
Modeling Preferences dialog.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
This concludes activity E-14. ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Activity E-15: Compare Primary Sheets
In this activity you will first create a swept feature and analyze the body. Then
you will create another Swept feature, a Through Curves feature, and a
Through Curve Mesh feature, and compare each for shape and smoothness.
Step 1 Open the part mff_sweep_3 and start the modeling

application.
Step 2 Set any modeling and object preferences that you prefer.
(i.e. grid lines, color, etc.)
Step 3 Create a swept feature using two guide strings, 5 section

strings, and a spine.
Select the two guide strings and the 5 section strings as

shown. See the note on the next page for additional help.
Section String #1
Guide String 2
Section String #2
Guide String 1
Section String #3
Spine
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E Section String #4
ÏÏÏ Section String #5

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
NOTE Be careful when selecting the section strings. Each

section is comprised of several individual curves, some of
which are rather short.
Select the section strings in such a manner that the base

of the vector is at the end of the section string where the
section string intersects one of the guide curves.
Make sure that alignment direction vectors originate from

the same relative end point and point in the same
direction.
If you wish to use Chain Curves, you might consider

blanking the guide strings for ease of selection.
The desired vector orientation is shown below.
Set the Interpolation

ÏÏÏ
Method to Cubic.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Set the Alignment

Method to Parameter.
Set the Tolerance to

.001.
Choose Scale Laterally as

the Scaling Method.
Select the center vertical

line as the spine curve.
Choose Create.
Step 4 Analyze the solid body for shape and smoothness.
Analysis Face Reflections Colored Lines is useful.
Step 6 Create a Through Curves Feature using Parameter

Alignment.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Step 7 Analyze the solid body.
ÏÏÏ How does the Through Curves body differ from the Swept
body?

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Step 9 Create a bottle using a Through Curve Mesh feature.

Use the default dialog options and remember to select Cross
String 1 again as Cross String 3 so that the mesh will be
closed.
Use the white line as the spine.
Step 10 Analyze the solid body.

How does the Through Curve Mesh body differ from the other
methods you used?
Step 11 Make layers 51 through 55 selectable to see section plane

lines.
Step 12 Use Insert Curve Spline by Points to create two

splines.
One spline is located down the front of the bottle, and one is
down the back of the bottle. You will use the intersections of the
primary strings and the section plane lines to create them.
In the Spline by Points

dialog, verify that Curve
Type is Specify Degree. À
Enter 3 as the Curve

Degree, then hit Enter. Á
Be certain that the

Associative option is OFF. Á
ÏÏÏ
Â
Â
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
In the Infer Point toolbar (display it if necessary) enable only

Intersection Point.
On the graphics screen, select five intersection points for the

first spline.
TIP Watch the cursor as you select points.
An intersection icon will appear when an intersection

point is in the selection circle. A point will be calculated
using curves inside the circle, and displayed.
If more than one intersection point can be calculated, the

cursor will also display three dots (•••) and the quick pick
tool will appear to help select which intersection you
want.
Choose MB2 (or OK) when the last point for first spline is
selected.
The spline is created, and the dialog remains active.
Create a second Spline by Points on the other side of the
bottle, using the same method.
Step 13 Add these two new splines to the definition of the model.
Use Edit → Feature → Parameters...
Display Parameters.
Add String.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Step 14 Shade the model to see the improvement in the shape.
ÏÏÏ Try Analysis Face Reflections Colored Lines in Front

orientation.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Step 15 Make layer 5 selectable to see a simple cap for the bottle.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Handle
Step 1 Open the part fff_handle and use FileSave As to save it

using your initials in the name (***_handle).
Step 2 Create the handle using a Curve Mesh freeform feature.

Evaluate the solid. Modify the curves and solid.
Step 3 Look at the end of the handle, where it comes to a point.

Make section curves of the area that you want to change.
For example you might want to create another section
string near the point. You could Section the solid and
create new splines, or create the curves directly. Make the
necessary changes.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ Step 4 Save and Close the part.

All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Cup
The intent of this project is for you to complete the construction of the cup
handle.
Step 1 Open the part fff_cup and use FileSave As to save it

using your initials in the name (***_cup).
Step 2 Complete the cup by creating the handle. Guide curves

currently exist for the handle. Create section strings -
one at each end of the handle, and as many others as you
need to create the handle using a Swept feature. Try
several different handles.
ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Evaluate the handle, and edit it as necessary. ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
Step 4 Save and Close the part.
ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
Changing the design of a Hood
The intent of the project is for you to change the hood and create a single sheet
body, similar to the figure below. Use the curve, freeform, and editing options
as necessary. You may wish to use Iso-trim, variable offsets, curve projection,
surface trimming, ruled sheets, face blends, and quilt options.
Step 1 Open the part fff_hood_scoop.
Sheet Body and Lines
Completed Blends and

Scoop on Hood
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E Completed Quilt Sheet
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Optional Activities
Creating Sheets for a Fender
The intent of this project is for you to use some of the lines and curves of the
fender to create the basic shapes (sheets) that could be used to create a final
finished fender.
Step 1 Open the part fff_fender.
Raw Data of Lines
Example of Sheets That

You Could Create
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
The intent of this activity is for you to create a sheet body so that the parameter
lines are parallel to the yellow section curves. ÏÏÏ
Optional Activities
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
E
ÏÏÏ
All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Manual
Glossary
Glossary ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
GL
ÉÉÉ
ABS - Absolute coordinate system.
Absolute Coordinate System - Coordinate system in which all geometry is located
from a fixed or absolute zero point.
active view - One of up to 49 views per layout in which you can directly work.
angle - In Unigraphics, an angle measured on the XĆY plane of a coordinate
system is positive if the direction that it is swept is counterclockwise as viewed from
the positive Z axis side of the XĆY plane. An angle swept in the opposite direction
is said to be negative.
arc - An incomplete circle; sometimes used interchangeably with the term circle."
ASCII - American Standard Code for Information Interchange. It is a set of 8Ćbit
binary numbers representing the alphabet, punctuation, numerals, and other
special symbols used in text representation and communications protocol.
aspect ratio - The ratio of length to height which represents the change in size of a
symbol from its original.
assembly - A collection of piece parts and subĆassemblies representing a product.
In Unigraphics, an assembly is a part file which contains components.
assembly part - A Unigraphics part file which is a userĆdefined, structured
combination of subĆassemblies, components and/or objects.
associativity - The ability to tie together (link) separate pieces of information to
aid in automating the design, drafting, and manufacture of parts in Unigraphics.
attributes - Pieces of information that can be associated with Unigraphics
geometry and parts such as assigning a name to an object.
block font - A Unigraphics character font which is the default font used for
creating text in drafting objects and dimensions.
body - Class of objects containing sheets and solids (see solid body and sheet body).
bottomĆup modeling - Modeling technique where component parts are designed
and edited in isolation of their usage within some higher level assembly. All
assemblies using the component are automatically updated when opened to reflect
the geometric edits made at the piece part level.
EDS Mechanical Free Form

All Rights Reserved Student Manual GL-1
Glossary
ÉÉÉ boundary - A set of geometric objects that describes the containment of a part
ÉÉÉ from a vantage point.
ÉÉÉ
GL
ÉÉÉ
CAD/CAM - Computer Aided Design/Computer Aided Manufacturing.
category, layer - A name assigned to a layer, or group of layers. A category, if

descriptive of the type of data found on the layers to which it is assigned, will assist
the user in identifying and managing data in a part file.
chaining - A method of selecting a sequence of curves which are joined

endĆtoĆend.
circle - A complete and closed arc, sometimes used interchangeably with the term
arc."
component - A collection of objects, similar to a group, in an assembly part. A

component may be a subĆassembly consisting of other, lower level components.
component part - The part file or master" pointed to by a component within an

assembly. The actual geometry is stored in the component part and referenced, not
copied, by the assembly. A separate Unigraphics part file that the system associates
with a component object in the assembly part.
cone direction - Defines the cone direction using the Vector Subfunction.
cone origin - Defines the base origin using the Point Subfunction.
half angle - The half vertex angle defines the angle formed by the axis of the cone
and its side.
constraints - Refer to the methods you can use to refine and limit your sketch.
The methods of constraining a sketch are geometric and dimensional.
construction points - Points used to create a spline. Construction points may be

used as poles (control vertices), defining points, or data points. See POLES,
DEFINING POINTS, and DATA POINTS.
control point - Represents a specific location on an existing object. A line has

three control points: both end points and the midpoint of the line. The control
point for a closed circle is its center, while the control points for an open arc are its
end and midpoints. A spline has a control point at each knot point. A control point
is a position on existing geometry. Any of the following points: 1. Existing Points 2.
Endpoints of conics 3. Endpoints and midpoints of open arcs 4. Center points of
circles 5. Midpoints and endpoints of lines 6. Endpoints of splines.
convert curve - A method of creating a bĆcurve in which curves (lines, arcs, conics
or splines) may be selected for conversion into a bĆcurve.
Mechanical Free Form Unigraphics NX

GL-2 Student Manual
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Glossary
Coordinate System - A system of axes used in specifying positions (CSYS).

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
counterclockwise - The rightĆhand rule determines the counterĆ clockwise
direction. If the thumb is aligned with the ZC axis and pointing in the positive
direction, counterclockwise is defined as the direction the fingers would move from
ÉÉÉ
GL
ÉÉÉ
the positive XC axis to the positive YC axis.
current layout - The layout currently displayed on the screen. Layout data is kept
in an intermediate storage area until it is saved.
curve - A curve in Unigraphics is any line, arc, conic, spline or bĆcurve. A

geometric object; this may refer to a line, an arc, a conic, or a spline.
defaults - Assumed values when they are not specifically defined.
defining points - Spline construction points. Splines created using defining points
are forced to pass through the points. These points are guaranteed to be on the
spline.
degreeĆofĆfreedom arrows - ArrowĆlike indicators that show areas that require

more information to fully constrain a sketch.
design in context - The ability to directly edit component geometry as it is

displayed in the assembly. Geometry from other components can be selected to aid
in the modeling. Also referred to as edit in place.
dimensional constraint - This is a scalar value or expression which limits the

measure of some geometric object such as the length of a line, the radius of an arc,
or the distance between two points.
directory - A hierarchical file organization structure which contains a list of

filenames together with information for locating those files.
displayed part - The part currently displayed in the graphics window.
edit in place - See design in context.
emphasize work part - A color coding option which helps distinguish geometry in
the work part from geometry in other parts within the same assembly.
endpoint - An endpoint of a curve or an existing point.
expression - An arithmetic or conditional statement that has a value. Expressions

are used to control dimensions and the relationships between dimensions of a
model.
face - A region on the outside of a body enclosed by edges.

Glossary
ÉÉÉ feature - An allĆencompassing term which refers to all solids, bodies, and
ÉÉÉ primitives.
ÉÉÉ
GL
ÉÉÉ file - A group or unit of logically related data which is labeled or named" and
associated with a specified space. In Unigraphics, parts, and patterns are a few
types of files.
filtering - See object filtering.
font box - A rectangle or box" composed of dashed line objects. The font box
defines the size, width and spacing of characters belonging to a particular font.
font, character - A set of characters designed at a certain size, width and spacing.
font, line - Various styles of lines and curves, such as solid, dashed, etc.
free form feature - A body of zero thickness. (see body and sheet body)
generator curve - A contiguous set of curves, either open or closed, that can be
swept or revolved to create a body.
geometric constraint - A relationship between one or more geometric objects that

forces a limitation. For example, two lines that are perpendicular or parallel
specifies a geometric constraint.
grid - A rectangular array of implied points used to accurately align locations

which are entered by using the screen position" option.
guide curve - A set of contiguous curves that define a path for a sweep operation.
virtual intersection - Intersection formed by extending two line segments that do

not touch to the position that they cross. The line segments must be nonĆparallel
and coplanar.
inflection - A point on a spline where the curve changes from concave to convex,
or vice versa.
interactive step - An individual menu in a sequence of menus used in performing a

Unigraphics function.
isometric view (TfrĆISO) - Isometric view orientation - one where equal distances
along the coordinate axes are also equal to the view plane. One of the axes is
vertical.
knot points - The defining points of a spline. Points along a BĆspline, representing
the endpoints of each spline segment.

GL-4 Student Manual
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Glossary
layer - A layer is a partition of a part. Layers are analogous to the transparent

ÉÉÉ
material used by conventional designers. For example, the user may create all
ÉÉÉ
geometry on one layer, all text and dimensions on a second, and tool paths on a
third. ÉÉÉ
GL
ÉÉÉ
layout - A collection of viewports or window areas, in which views are displayed.
The standard layouts in Unigraphics include one, two, four or six viewports.
layouts - Standard layouts are available to the user. These include:
L1 - Single View,
L2 - Two Views,
L3 - Two Views,
L4 - Four Views,
L6 - Six Views.
Information window - The window used in listing operations, such as Info.
loaded part - Any part currently opened and in memory. Parts are loaded explicitly
using the File→Open option and implicitly when they are used in an assembly being
opened.
menu - A list of options from which the user makes a selection.
model space - The coordinate system of a newly created part. This is also referred
to as the absolute coordinate system." Any other coordinate system may be
thought of as a rotation and/or translation of the absolute coordinate system.
name, expression - - The name of an expression is the single variable on the left
hand side of the expression. All expression names must be unique in a part file.
Each expression can have only one name. See expression.
objects - All geometry within the Unigraphics environment.
offset face - A Unigraphics surface type created by projecting (offsetting) points
along all the normals of a selected surface at a specified distance to create a true"
offset.
options - A number of various alternatives (functions, modes, parameters, etc.)
from among which the user can choose.
origin - The point X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 0 for any particular coordinate system.
parametric design - Concept used to define and control the relationships between
the features of a model. Concept where the features of the model are defined by
parameters.
part - A Unigraphics file containing a .prt extension. It may be a piece part
containing model geometry, a subĆassembly, or a topĆlevel assembly.

Glossary
ÉÉÉ part or model - A collection of Unigraphics objects which together may represent
ÉÉÉ some object or structure.
ÉÉÉ
GL
ÉÉÉ partially loaded part - A component part which, for performance reasons, has not
been fully loaded. Only those portions of the component part necessary to render
the higher level assembly are initially loaded (the reference set).
point set - A distribution of points on a curve between two bounding points on that
curve.
Point Subfunction Menu - A list of options (methods) by which positions can be

specified in Unigraphics.
readĆonly part - A part for which the user does not have write access privilege.
real time dynamics - Produces smooth pan, zoom, and rotation of a part, though
placing great demand on the CPU.
Refresh - A function which causes the system to refresh the display list on the
viewing screen. This removes temporary display items and fills in holes left by Blank
or Delete.
rightĆhand rule, conventional - The rightĆhand rule is used to determine the

orientation of a coordinate system. If the origin of the coordinate system is in the
palm of the right fist, with the back of the hand lying on a table, the outward
extension of the index finger corresponds to the positive Y axis, the upward
extension of the middle finger corresponds to the positive Z axis, and the outward
extension of the thumb corresponds to the positive X axis.
rightĆhand rule for rotation - The rightĆhand rule for rotation is used to associate
vectors with directions of rotation. When the thumb is extended and aligned with a
given vector, the curled fingers determine the associated direction of rotation.
Conversely, when the curled fingers are held so as to indicate a given direction of
rotation, the extended thumb determines the associated vector.
screen cursor (cursor) - A marker on the screen which the user moves around
using some position indicator device. Used for indicating positions, selecting
objects, etc. Takes the form of a fullĆscreen cross.
sheet - A object consisting of one or more faces not enclosing a volume. A body of
zeroĆthickness. Also called sheet body.)
sketch - A collection of geometric objects that closely approximates the outline of

a particular design. You refine your sketch with dimensional and geometric
constraints until you achieve a precise representation of your design. The sketch
can then be extruded or revolved to obtain a 3D object or feature.

GL-6 Student Manual
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Glossary
Sketch Coordinate System (SCS) - The SCS is a coordinate system which

ÉÉÉ
corresponds to the plane of the sketch. When a sketch is created the WCS is
ÉÉÉ
changed to the SCS of the new sketch.
solid body - An enclosed volume. A type of body (see Body).

ÉÉÉ
GL
ÉÉÉ
spline - A smooth freeĆform curve.
stored layout - The last saved version of a layout.
stored view - The last saved version of a view.
string - A contiguous series of lines and/or arcs connected at their end points.
subĆassembly - A part which both contains components and is itself used as a

component in higherĆlevel assemblies.
surface - The underlying geometry used to define a face on a sheet body. A

surface is always a sheet but a sheet is not necessarily a surface (see sheet body).
The underlying geometry used to define the shape of a face on a sheet.
system - The Unigraphics System.
temporary part - An empty part which is optionally created for any component
parts which cannot be found in the process of opening an assembly.
topĆdown modeling - Modeling technique where component parts can be created

and edited while working at the assembly level. Geometric changes made at the
assembly level are automatically reflected in the individual component part when
saved.
trim - To shorten or extend a curve.
trimetric view (TfrĆTri) - A viewing orientation which provides you with an

excellent view of the principal axes. In Unigraphics II, the trimetric view has the
ZĆaxis vertical. The measure along the XĆaxis is 7/8 of the measure along Z, and the
measure along the YĆaxis is 3/4 of the measure along Z.
Unigraphics - A computer based turnkey graphics system for computerĆaided

design, drafting, and manufacturing, produced by UGS.
units - The unit of measure in which you may work when constructing in
Unigraphics. Upon log on, you may define the unit of measure as inches or
millimeters.
upgraded component - A component which was originally created preĆV10 but has
been opened in V10 and upgraded to remove the duplicate geometry.

Glossary
ÉÉÉ version - A term which identifies the state of a part with respect to a series of
ÉÉÉ modifications that have been made to the part since its creation.
ÉÉÉ
GL
ÉÉÉ view - A particular display of the model. View parameters include view orientation
matrix; center; scale; X,Y and Z clipping bounds; perspective vector; drawing
reference point and scale. Eight standard views are available to the user: Top,
Front, Right, Left, Bottom, Back, TfrĆISO (topĆfrontĆright isometric), and TfrĆTri
(topĆfrontĆright trimetric).
view dependent edit - A mode in which the user can edit a part in the current work
view only.
view dependent modifications - Modifications to the display of geometry in a

particular view. These include erase from view and modify color, font and width.
view dependent geometry - Geometry created within a particular view. It will only
be displayed in that view.
WCS - Work Coordinate System.
WCS, work plane - The WCS (Work Coordinate System) is the coordinate system
singled out by the user for use in construction, verification, etc. The coordinates of
the WCS are called work coordinates and are denoted by XC, YC, ZC. The XCĆYC
plane is called the work plane.
Work Coordinate System - See WCS.
work layer - The layer on which geometry is being constructed. You may create
objects on only one layer at a time.
work part - The part in which you create and edit geometry. The work part can be
your displayed part or any component part which is contained in your displayed
assembly part. When displaying a piece part, the work part is always the same as
the displayed part.
work view - The view in which work is being performed. When the creation mode
is view dependent, any construction and view dependent editing that is performed
will occur only in the current work view.
XC axis - XĆaxis of the work coordinate system.
YC axis - YĆaxis of the work coordinate system.
ZC axis - ZĆaxis of the work coordinate system.

GL-8 Student Manual
EDS
All Rights Reserved
Index
Index
A Change Edge, 7-46

edge and cross tangents, 7-47
ABS, GL-1 edge and normals, 7-47
edge curvature, 7-48
Absolute Coordinate System, GL-1 edge only, 7-46
Active View, GL-1 master and subject, 7-48
Circle, GL-2
Alignment, ruled and through curves, 4-9
ÉÉÉ
Circular Extensions, 7-2
Alignment Methods, 4-9
Combined Projection, projection vector options,
angles, 4-35
arclength, 4-10
by points, 4-32
2-61
Component, GL-2
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
IN
distance, 4-35
parameter, 4-10
spine string, 4-36
Part, GL-2
Cone
Direction, GL-2
ÉÉÉ
Origin, GL-2
Angle, GL-1
Conic Rho, 5-9
Angled Extensions, 7-2 constant, 5-9
Arc, GL-1 general, 5-9
least tension, 5-9
ASCII, GL-1 Constraints, GL-2
Aspect Ratio, GL-1 Construction Points, GL-2
Assemblies, GL-1 Control Point, GL-2
Associativity, GL-1 Convert, Curves to BĆCurves, GL-2
Coordinate Systems, GL-3
Attribute, GL-1
Sketch, GL-7
Counterclockwise, GL-3
B Create
curve, extract, isocline curves, E-25
Body, GL-1 free form feature, ruling and through curves,
alignment, 4-9
Bottom-Up Modeling, GL-1 Cubic, 4-56
Boundary, GL-2 Current Layout, GL-3
Bridge, 5-41 Cursor, GL-6
continuity type, 5-43 Curvature, change, 2-77
drag, 5-44 Curve, GL-3
editing, 5-44 combined projection, 2-59
first side string, 5-42 extract, E-17
reset, 5-44 extract isocline, E-25
second side string, 5-42 intersection curve, 2-64
side faces, 5-42 join, E-20
Bridge Curve, 2-43 offset, 2-35
continuity method, 2-44 offset in face, 2-72
project, 2-52
spline, 2-4
wrap/unwrap, E-30
C
Category, Layer, GL-2 D
Chaining, GL-2 Defaults, GL-3
EDS Mechanical Free Form IN-1

Index
Defining Points, GL-3 Edit in Place, GL-3

DegreeĆofĆfreedom Arrows, GL-3 Edit Spline, by adding a point, E-3
Design in Context, GL-3 Emphasize Work Part, GL-3
Deviation, 6-27 Endpoint, GL-3
curve to face, 6-28 Equal Arc Length Segments, A-3
edge to face, 6-27
Error Messages
Deviation Check, introduction to, 2-97 arc length greater than or equal to the total arc
Diagnostic Tools, 6-29 length, A-4
Examine Geometry, 6-29 cannot decrease degree of multi-segment
b-spline, 2-89
Information B-Surface, 6-29
degree greater than maximum, 2-90
ÉÉÉ Dimension Constraints, GL-3 degree less than minimum, 2-90
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
IN
Direction, Cone, GL-2
Directory, GL-3
intersection point not on curve, A-3
Error messages
ÉÉÉ Displayed Part, GL-3

Divide Curve
file contains bad point data on line xx, C-6
wrong number of values to define point on line xx,
C-6
by corners, A-5 Expressions, GL-3
by equal segments, A-2 Names, GL-5
by input arc length segments, A-4 Extensions, 7-2, 7-19
by knotpoint segments, A-4 angled extension, 7-8
segment by bounding objects, A-3 circular extension, 7-9
Draft law extension, 7-15
Analysis by Face Slope, 6-14 normal, 7-7
Analysis by Isoclines, 6-13 self intersecting sheets, 7-19, 7-20
Analyzing, 6-12 sheet corner, 7-6
constructing, 7-61 tangential, 7-4
definition, 6-12 fixed length method, 7-5
Sheets to Match a Parting String, 7-62 percentage method, 7-6
Extract, isocline curves, E-25
E
F
Edit
curve Face, GL-3
divide curve, A-2 Face Analysis, 6-2, 6-5, 6-7, 6-10, 6-11
by corners, A-5 analysis type, 6-6
by equal segments, A-2 Gaussian radius, 6-6
by input arc length segments, A-4 maximum radius, 6-6
by knotpoint segments, A-4 mean radius, 6-6
segment by bounding objects, A-3 minimum radius, 6-6
edit spline, by adding a point, E-3 normal radius, 6-6
segmenting a curve, A-2 sectional radius, 6-6
stretch, A-6 U radius, 6-6
stretch, rectangle, A-7 V radius, 6-6
Edit Curve, divide, A-2 display type, 6-2, 6-3
by corners, A-5 fringe, 6-2
by equal segments, A-2 hedgehog, 6-3
by input arc length segments, A-4 resolution, 6-4
by knotpoint segments, A-4 sectioning plane, 6-6
segment by bounding objects, A-3 Features, GL-4
Edit Feature Parameters, 4-7 File, GL-4
IN-2 Mechanical Free Form

EDS
Student Manual All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX
Index
Filtering, GL-4
K
Fit Methods, 2-19
by segments, 2-19 Knot Points, GL-4
by tolerance, 2-19
Font
Box, GL-4
L
Character, GL-4 Law Curve, B-2
Line, GL-4 base point, B-3
Framing Data, 2-95 coordinate system, B-3
orientation, B-3
Free Form Construction Result, 4-6
Law Subfunctions, B-4, B-7ćB-26
Free Form Feature, GL-4 By Equation, by equation, B-5
ÉÉÉ
Free Form Modeling, definition of, 1-2 Graphics Laws, B-6
by law curve, B-6
Numeric Laws, B-5
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
IN
G
constant, B-5
cubic, B-5
linear, B-5
ÉÉÉ
Generator Curve, GL-4 values along spine - cubic, B-5
Geometric Constraint, GL-4 values along spine - linear, B-5
Layer, GL-5
Grid, GL-4
Layout, GL-5
Guide Curve, GL-4
Linear, 4-56
Guide String, 4-53
Listing Window, GL-5
Loaded Part, GL-5
H
Half Angle, GL-2 M
Helix, B-15 Matching Edges, 7-46
number of turns, B-15 Menu, GL-5
orientation, B-16
pitch, B-15 Model, GL-6
radius method, B-16 Model Space, GL-5
tolerance, B-17
turn direction, B-16
N
I N-Sided Surface, 5-59
Multiple Triangular Patches, 5-60
Shape Control, 5-60
Inflection, GL-4
Trimmed Single Sheet, 5-60
Info, Object, Type, Face, 4-6 Normal Extensions, 7-2, 7-19
Intersection Curve, reuse first set, 2-65 Number of Segments, A-3
Isocline curves, extract, E-25 NURBS, 2-5
J O
Join Methods Object, GL-5
general spline, E-21 Offset
polynomial, E-21 3D Axial, 2-36

Index
distance, 2-36 mff_enlarge_1, 7-21

draft, 2-36 mff_enlarge_2, 7-25
law control, 2-36 mff_examine_geom, 6-31
mff_ext_1, 7-10
Offset Curves
mff_ext_2, 7-13
3D Axial, 2-36
mff_ext_3, E-50
Options, 2-36
mff_extract_curve_1, E-18
Rough Offset, 2-36
mff_hook, 2-28
Trim, 2-36
mff_intersect_curve_1, 2-66
Offset Sheet, 7-27 mff_isocline_curves_1, E-27
associative offsets, 7-28 mff_join_curves_1, E-22
deleting, 7-28 mff_law_ext_draft, 7-17
ÉÉÉ
distance tolerance, 7-28 mff_make_planar, 7-53
transforming, 7-28 mff_match_edge_1, 7-49
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
IN
variable offset, 7-29
Offset Surface, GL-5
mff_match_parting, 7-81
mff_match_parting_solution, 7-89
ÉÉÉ
mff_mesh_1, E-61
Origin, Cone, GL-2 mff_mesh_3, 4-44
mff_n-sided_1, 5-61
mff_n-sided_2, 5-64
P mff_offset-in-face_1, 2-73
mff_offset_1, 7-30
Parameter, 4-56 mff_offset_2, 7-32
Parameter Expression Variable, B-5 mff_offset_curve_1, 2-37
mff_offset_curve_2, 2-39
Parametric Design, GL-5 mff_parting_string_1, 7-92
Parametric Equations, B-7 mff_project_curves_1, 2-57
mff_ruled_1, 4-12
Part, GL-5, GL-6 mff_s2sa_1, 8-7
Partially Loaded Part, GL-6 mff_section_1, 5-15
mff_section_3, 5-28
Partings, 7-90
mff_section_4, 5-30
Parts Used mff_section_5, 5-33
mff_3d_offset, 2-41 mff_section_6, 5-39
mff_3dspline, 3-16 mff_sew_1, 7-36
mff_align_1, 4-11 mff_smooth, 2-92, E-15
mff_analyze_radius_1, 6-22 mff_soft_blend_1, 5-49
mff_analyze_radius_2, 6-24 mff_soft_blend_2, 5-56
mff_angle_law, 4-82 mff_spline_1, 2-12, 2-20
mff_boatframe, E-54 mff_spline_2, B-21
mff_bottle_pt_file, C-7 mff_spline_law, B-23
mff_bridge_3, 5-45 mff_spline_planes, D-4
mff_bridge_4, 5-46 mff_sweep_1, 4-60
mff_bridge_curve_1, 2-45 mff_sweep_2, 4-65
mff_cam_1, 4-80 mff_sweep_3, E-64
mff_combined-projection_1, 2-62 mff_sweep_4, 4-74
mff_curve_analysis, 3-10 mff_sweep_5, 4-78
mff_deviation, 3-21 mff_sweep_orient_1, 4-69
mff_draft_analysis_1, 6-15 mff_symmetric_bridge, 2-49
mff_draft1, 7-63 mff_thicken_1, 8-4
mff_draft2, 7-72 mff_thrucurves_1, 4-22
mff_drag_poles, 2-98 mff_thrucurves_3, 4-16
mff_edit_poles_1, E-41, E-43 mff_thrucurves_4, 4-33
mff_editspl_1, E-5 mff_trim_curve_1, E-36
mff_editspl_2, 2-81 mff_trim_curve_2, 2-112
mff_editspl_3, E-11 mff_trim_sheet_1, 7-44
mff_editspl_4, 2-87 mff_trimbody_1, E-55

EDS
Index
mff_wrap_curves_1, E-34 rho, 5-9

section type (U direction), 5-6
Patch Types, 4-30
conic, 5-6
Point Set, GL-6 cubic, 5-6
Point Subfunction, GL-6 quintic, 5-6
spine string, 5-3
Primary Sheets, brief introduction, 4-3 system created apex curve, 5-8
Project Curves, Direction Method, 2-53 three-points-arc, 5-24
along face normals, 2-54 two-points-radius, 5-23
along vector, 2-55 Sew, 7-33
at angle to vector, 2-55 sheets, 7-33
equal arclength, 2-56 solids, 7-34
ÉÉÉ
toward a line, 2-54
toward a point, 2-54 Sheet, GL-6
Sheet Body, 4-2
applications, 4-4 ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
IN
R
ReadĆOnly Part, GL-6
Sketch, GL-6
Coordinate System, GL-7 ÉÉÉ
Slope
Real Time Dynamics, GL-6 angle, 2-11
Refresh, GL-6 automatic slope, 2-11
change, E-2
Right Hand Rule, GL-6 direction point, 2-11
Rotation, GL-6 slope of curve, 2-11
vector component, 2-11
Ruled Features, 4-9 vector to point, 2-11
section strings, 4-9
Soft Blend, 5-48
Solid Body, 4-2, GL-7
S Solid or Sheet Bodies, 4-43
SCS, GL-7 Spline, GL-7
analyzing, 3-7
Section Feature, editing, 5-32 Construction Methods, Through Point, By Poles,
Section Features, 5-2 2-10
apex string, 5-7 Creating, 2-8
circle, 5-25 edit, by adding a point, E-3
circular tangent, 5-23 features, 2-9
ends-apex-hilite, 5-37 non-planar, 3-15
ends-apex-rho, 5-11 Segmentation, 2-7
ends-apex-shoulder, 5-10 Splines
ends-slope-cubic, 5-22, 5-25 Analysis Display, introduction to, 3-2
ends-slopes-hilite, 5-38 by poles, 2-10
ends-slopes-rho, 5-26 change weights, 2-19
ends-slopes-shoulder, 5-10 defining points, 2-7
filing type (V direction), 5-7 Degree and Segments, 2-6
cubic, 5-7 editing, 2-75
quintic, 5-7 add point, E-3
fillet-bridge, 5-13 adding poles, 2-80
fillet-rho, 5-12 change degree, 2-89
fillet-shoulder, 5-14 change stiffness, 2-90
five-points, 5-27 constrain options, 2-80
four-points-slope, 5-26, 5-38 along direction, 2-80
highlight conic, 5-3 end curvatures, 2-80
linear tangent, 5-22 end slopes, 2-80
point-radius-angle-arc, 5-24 on a plane, 2-80

Index
on curve plane, 2-80 another curve, 4-67

on view plane, 2-80 face normals, 4-67
deviation check, 2-78 fixed, 4-67
dragging poles, 2-97 forced direction, 4-67
fit splines, 2-86 vector direction, 4-67
micro positioning, E-2 scaling control - one guide, 4-68
move point, E-2 a point, 4-68
delta offset, E-2 another curve, 4-68
destination point, E-2 area law, 4-68
drag, E-2 blending function, 4-68
moving multiple points, E-10 constant, 4-68
direction point, E-10 perimeter law, 4-68
ÉÉÉ
distance normal to curve, E-10 section string, 4-55
vector and distance, E-10 spine string, 4-59
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
IN
moving poles
multiple, 2-79
System, GL-7
ÉÉÉ
single, 2-79
points from file, E-4
remove point, E-4
T
spline smoothing, 2-91 Tangential Extensions, 7-2, 7-19
trim curve, 2-109
Temporary Part, GL-7
editing , moving poles, 2-79
Evaluating, introduction to, 3-2 TfrĆISO, GL-4
Fit, introduction to, 2-18 TfrĆTri, GL-7
fit, 2-19
Thicken, 8-2
Guidelines for creating, 2-9
first offset, 8-2
knotpoints, 2-7
second offset, 8-2
perpendicular to planes, D-1
target solid body, 8-3
points from a file, 2-10
Quality, introduction to, 3-2 Through Curve Mesh Features, 4-37
through points, 2-10 constraints, 4-41
cross strings, 4-37
Stored Layout, GL-7 emphasis, 4-43
Stored View, GL-7 intersection tolerance, 4-41
primary string, 4-37
Stretch, A-6
selecting points as primary strings, 4-40
Rectangle, A-7
using a spine, 4-40
String, GL-7 Through Curves, 4-20
Strings, 4-3 closed in U, 4-31
closed in V, 4-31
SubĆassembly, GL-7
degree, 4-30
Suggestions for Designers, 1-3, 8-5 patch types, 4-30
multiple , 4-31
Surface, GL-7
single, 4-31
Swept Features, 4-53 section strings, 4-20
guide strings, 4-53
Tolerances, 4-7
one guide string, 4-53
angle tolerance, 4-8
three guide strings, 4-54 Distance and Angle, 4-43
two guide strings, 4-54 distance tolerances, 4-8
Swept features Top-Down Modeling, GL-7
interpolation methods, 4-56
cubic, 4-56 Trim, GL-7
linear, 4-56 Trim Curve
orientation control - one guide, 4-67 circular, 2-111
a point, 4-67 linear, 2-111
angular law, 4-67 natural, 2-111

EDS
Index
none, 2-111
W
Trimmed Sheet , 7-39
projection along, 7-40 WCS, GL-8
regions will be discarded, 7-43 Work Layer, GL-8
regions will be kept, 7-43
Work Part, GL-8
Wrap/Unwrap
cut line, E-33
U tangent line, E-32
wrap face, E-32
U and V Grids, 4-4
Unigraphics, GL-7
Units, GL-7 X ÉÉÉ
Upgrade, Component, GL-7 XCĆAxis, GL-8 ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
IN
V Y ÉÉÉ
YCĆAxis, GL-8
Version, GL-8
View, GL-8
Isometric, GL-4 Z
Trimetric, GL-7
Work, GL-8 ZCĆAxis, GL-8

Index
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
IN
ÉÉÉ

EDS
Student Profile
Name Date
Employer
U.S. citizen? Yes / No
When is your planned departure time?________________am/pm
Please answer the following questions as honestly as you can. We are concerned about providing training that
meets your needs. If you have any additional comments please write them on the back of this form.
1. Job title:
2. Current responsibilities:
3. How long have you held these responsibilities? Years ______ Months ______
4. How long have you been working with CAD/CAM/CAE systems? Years ______
5. With what other CAD/CAM/CAE systems are you familiar?
6. Are you currently using Unigraphics? _______ Version _______ Hours per week?
7. What is the function of your CAD/CAM/CAE system (documentation, modeling, analysis,
translation interface, etc.)?
8. What do you model in your Unigraphics part files (castings, assemblies, mechanical parts, etc.)?
9. Please list other completed CAD/CAM/CAE courses and the provider including Unigraphics CBT
and CAST:
Course Provider
10. Please check the box that best describes your current skill level in the various Unigraphics
disciplines listed below.
none novice intermediate advanced future use

Wireframe Modeling
Solid Modeling
Parametric Modeling
Drafting
Assemblies
Manufacturing

Additional Comments
Mechanical Free Form EDS Unigraphics NX

NX Mechanical Free Form
Course Agenda
Day 1 Monday Morning

Introduction
Lesson 1. Overview
Lesson 2. Developed Curves
Afternoon
Lesson 2. Developed Curves (continued)
Lesson 3. Curve Analysis
Workbook Section 1 Splines and Spline Analysis
Day 2 Tuesday Morning

Lesson 4. Primary Sheets and Bodies
Afternoon
Lesson 4. Primary Sheets and Bodies (continued)
Workbook Section 2 Primary Sheets
Day 3 Wednesday Morning

Lesson 5. Transitions
Afternoon
Lesson 5. Transitions (continued)
Workbook Section 3 Transitions
Workbook Section 4 Additional Transitions
Day 4 Thursday Morning

Lesson 6. Face Analysis
Workbook Section 5 Face Analysis
Afternoon
Lesson 7. Working with Sheets and Curves
Day 5 Friday Morning

Lesson 7. Working with Sheets and Curves (continued)
Workbook Section 6 Working with Sheets
Workbook Section 7 Additional Work with Sheets
Afternoon
Lesson 8. Sheets and solids
Workbook Section 8 Sheets and Solids


Training Course Evaluation
Name (Optional) Date
Instructor Location Unigraphics NX
Please give your honest opinion about the training you have received during this class. Provide additional
comments on the reverse side of this evaluation form.
Please check the box if you would like your comments, regarding the training you just received, featured in our
training publications. We will contact you if more information is needed.
Hotel Accommodations (if applicable) Hotel name
What was your overall impression of this hotel? Poor 2 3 4 5 6 7
Facilities - How would you rate the training facilities? Poor 2 3 4 5 6 7
Instruction - How would you rate the instruction? Poor 2 3 4 5 6 7
Was the instructor knowledgeable of the subject? Poor 2 3 4 5 6 7

Comments
Were the course objectives clearly defined and were they met? Yes No
Please explain:
Did the course materials have sufficient detail for learning Free Form functions?
Please explain:
Were concepts effectively communicated so that you understand the application? Yes No Please
explain:
How well prepared do you now feel to use the functions covered in this course in your day to day
activities? Please explain:
Were the student activities effective in learning Unigraphics Free Form? Yes No
Please explain:
over

Were the workbook activities effective in reinforcing the concepts taught? Yes No
Please explain:
Did this course meet your expectations and requirements relative to Free Form modeling? Comment:
What was your impression of the Free Form software?

Comment:
Do you have any other suggestions on how the course could be improved? Yes No
Please explain:
In order to continually improve our courseware a post class survey is conducted. Would you be willing
to participate in this survey? (If you check this box, please make sure that your name is on this sheet.)
Circle the job title which best describes your occupation:

Engineer Drafter
Product Designer Manager
NC Programmer System Administrator
Tool Designer Other_________________________________
Circle the category which best describes your company's business:
Aerospace Automotive
Consumer Products Medical
Machinery Other_________________________________
What do you model in your Unigraphics part files (castings, assemblies, mechanical components,
etc.)?
Course - What was your overall impression? Poor 2 3 4 5 6 7

Additional Comments

Suggestions for the Designer
Keep the model as simple as possible.
Always be consistent when selecting geometry.
We recommend keeping splines to degree three whenever possible.
A practical reason to use degree five curves is when curvature
continuity is required.
We suggest that you avoid degrees higher than five unless you have
and understand a reason to use a higher degree.
Unless you have compelling reasons to use more than two segments,
we recommend using separate curves whenever two segments are
insufficient to capture the shape you want.
Make sure the model meets the specifications that you were given.
Some items to check:
The model must be full scale, because manufacturing cuts the
actual part.
Check for sharp transitions or kinks where two sheets meet.
Use different layers for overlapping geometry.
Use layer categories to organize the data in your part file.
Name objects and features. This makes it much easier to identify and
select objects in a complex model.
Attach data concerning design intent or other important information
to individual features via the Model Navigator, Properties, Attributes.
Use the largest practical radius. Small radii may increase the
complexity of the manufacturing process.
When practical, create small blends, holes, or chamfers last. This
enables downstream users such as Finite Element Analysts to link at
timestamp" to avoid having to deal with these features.
To diagnose thicken, hollow, or blending problems, look to the
underlying curves!


This chart shows one of many possible free form design processes.
Create Defining Evaluate Curves

Curves
Create Primary Evaluate Sheets

Sheets or bodies
Create Construction
Sheets or Bodies,
and Construction
Curves
Create Transitions Evaluate Sheets
Final Operations:
Thicken, Trim, Sew
or Boolean Ops



MFF mt10035 NX M

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MFF mt10035 NX M

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MFF mt10035 NX M

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UNIGRAPHICS

MECHANICAL FREE FORM

2002 Electronic Data Systems Corporation. All rights reserved.

Restricted Rights Legend

Warranties and Liabilities

EDS, the EDS logo, UNIGRAPHICS SOLUTIONS, UNIGRAPHICS, GRIP, PARASOLID,

Version 15.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . February 1999

Introduction to Mechanical Free Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Developed Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Procedure for Symmetric Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Mechanical Free Form

Change Degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89

Curve Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Activity 4-2: Ruled, Parameter & Arclength Alignment . . 4-12

Mechanical Free Form

Activity 5-7: Create Bottle Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Transforming and Deleting Base Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Sheets and Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Divide Curve and Stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Using the Law Subfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Mechanical Free Form

Activity B-1: Creating a Law Curve Using a Sketch . . . . . B-21

Inputting Points from a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Splines Perpendicular to Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Optional Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

Activity E-12: Creating Bodies from Wireframe Geometry E-54

Mechanical Free Form

This course is intended for designers, engineers, manufacturing engineers,

Practical Applications of Unigraphics course

Basic understanding of parametric/explicit modeling, and the Master Model

Working knowledge of the following:

Creation and editing of splines and developed curves.

Class Standards for Unigraphics Part Files

Class Part File Naming

This class utilizes the following filenaming standard:

Layers and Categories

Layers 1-100, Model Geometry (Category: MODEL)

Layers 1-14, Solid Geometry (Category: SOLIDS)

Layers 15-20, Linked Objects (Category: LINKED OBJECTS)

Layers 21-40, Sketch Geometry (Category: SKETCHES)

Layers 41-60, Developed Curve Geometry (Category: 3DCURVES)

Layers 61-80, Reference Geometry (Category: DATUMS)

Layers 81-100, Sheet Bodies (Category: SHEETS)

Layers 101 - 120, Drafting Objects (Category: DRAFT)

Layers 101 - 110, Drawing Borders (Category: FORMATS)

Layers 121 - 130, Mechanism Tools (Category: MECH)

Layers 151 - 180, Manufacturing (Category: MFG)

Layers 181 - 190, Quality Tools (Category: QA)

Layers 201 - 250, Assembly Component Objects (Category: COMPONENTS)

TIP Once a seed part is established, it should be writeĆprotected to avoid

How to Use This Manual

Step 1 This is an example of a step.

This is an example of an action box.

The general format for lesson content is:

Obviously, it is always necessary for students to consider the classroom situation

The workbook example is an automotive application. The automotive industry

Classroom System Information

Student Login: Username:

(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)

A Free Form" design process may include:

Informed geometry construction leads to well behaved" Free Form models.